rEceal Engineeruse

Vol 16 No. 4Dec Jan1970171

Communications capitalTo the earthbound pedestrian gazing upward in mid -Manhattan, orto an airborne traveller taking a flying look at the city from above, RCAis an unmistakable presence in New York. In bold block letter -forms,our modernized RCA trademark thrusts skyward from atop the 850 -foothigh RCA Building in Rockefeller Plaza. More than a corporate sign,it serves too as a beacon which, if no other landmark were visible,would still inform the stranger that he is in New York and, therefore,in the very center of worldwide communications.

From the day of our founding, and throughout our fifty-year history,RCA has been part of New York. In that short span of time, we've growninto a vast multinational enterprise, one of the world's great commoncarriers of thought and the acknowledged leader of the informationindustry. This accomplishment, by itself, is a major reason why NewYork ranks as the global capital of communications.

Thanks in large measure to the many -faceted skills of our RCA engi-neers, we make a significant contribution to New York in many ways-as broadcaster, communications carrier, technical educator, purveyorof sophisticated electronic products and information systems, sup-plier of electronic and non -electronic services, and socially responsi-ble citizen as well.

It is especially gratifying, therefore, to find this issue of RCA Engineerfeaturing many of our activities in New York. As it does so, let me takethe occasion to offer my own salute to RCA engineers, not only in NewYork, but throughout the world, for all that they are doing to help im-prove the quality of life wherever people work and live.

Robert W. SarnoffChairman of the Boardand PresidentRCANew York, N.Y.

RCA Engineer Staff

Editor

Associate Editor

Editorial Secretary

Design and Layout

Subscriptions

Consulting Editors

Technical Publications Adm.,Electronic Components

Technical Publications Adm.,Laboratories

Technical Publications Adm.Corporate Engineering Services

Editorial Advisory Board

Staff VP, Personnel Adm.

Mgr.. Quality and ReliabilityAssurance, Solid State Div.

VP. Engineering, NBCTelevision Network

Mgr.. Technical InformationServices, RCA Laboratcries

Manager, Consumer ProductsAdm., RCA Service Co.

Div. VP, Technical PlanningElectronic Components

Chief Engineer,Record Division

Chief Technical Advisor,Consumer Electronics Div.

VP, Engineering andLeased Systems,Global Communications, Inc.

Director. CorporateEngineering Services

Chief Engineer,Graphic Systems Division

Manager, EngineeringProfessional Development

Chief Engineer,Government Engineering

Our coverThe modern RCA trademark atop the RCA Build-ing at Rockefeller Plaza is the central symbol inthis unusual skyline view of New York City. Photocredit: Dave Hecht, RCA Records.

Vol 16 No.4Dec 1970Jan 1971

A technical journal published byRCA Corporate Engineering Services 2-8,Camden. N.J.

RCA Engineer articles are indexedannually in the April -May Issue andin the "Index to RCA Technical Papers."

Contents

Eaceal Engineer To disseminate to RCA engineers technicalinformation of professional value To publishin an appropriate manner important technicaldevelopments at RCA. and the role of the engi-neer To serve as a medium of interchange oftechnical information between various groupsat RCA To create a community of engIneer-ing interest within the company by stressingthe interrelated nature of all technical contribu-tions To help publicize engineering achieve-

ments in a manner that will promote the inter-ests and reputation of RCA in the engineeringfield To provide a convenient means by whichthe RCA engineer may review his professionalwork before associates and engineering man-agement To announce outstanding and un-usual achievements of RCA engineers in amanner most likely to enhance their prestigeand professional status.

Editorial input Metrics and RCA 2

Engineer and the Corporation Metrication K. M. McKee 3

National Broadcasting Co. Color mobile unit for every TV station C. M. Eining 8

NBC television field operations C. W. Ackerson 13

Video edging R. J. Butler 16

NBC Radio Network facilities and operation S. T. Aed 19

New television studio for the Tonight Show 0. S. Paganuzzi 22

Burbank computer operation K. D. Erhardt 28

RCA Records In the recording studio-keeping pace with change J. M. Woram 34

New York recording studios J. E. Volkmann I A. Stevens

The case for four channels J. Pfeiffer 43

RCA Global Communications, Inc. Alaska communications system J. Sellers 48

Data, voice, and television services L. Donato 52

Hot line voice/data system S. Solomon 55

Pulantat earth station J. Walsh I TinWin 58

International and satellite transmission W. Phillips 62

RCA Institutes The evoution and development of RCA Institutes H. Fezer 64

General interest papers New schlieren light valve for television projection Dr. J. A. vanRaalte 70

High-performance FM receivers using high -gain integrated -circuitIF amplifiers T. J. Robe L. Kaplan 74

Integrated circuits for RF and IF service H. M. Kleinman 80

Notes Estimating failure rates for MSI and LSI integrated circuits M. S. Plesher 86

Drill Chuck for a wire -wrap tool J. F. Kingsbury 87

Departments Pen and Podium

Patents Granted

Dates and Deadlines

News and Highlights

88

90

91

92

Copyright 1971 RCA CorporationAll Rights Reserved

editorialinput

Mr. Ken McKee's excellent articleon "Metrication" provides, for thefirst time in the pages of the RCAEngineer, an insight to the metricconversion program now in prog-ress in England and presents manyimportant and not widely publicizedpoints of history. Ken's account isobjective and forthright with ampleclues to the problems and com-plexities involved in changing themeasurement practices of a greatnation.

One major problem far from solvedconcerns threaded fasteners. TheUnited Kingdom joined with Can-ada and the United States in 1948in the adoption of the ABC unifiedthreads now universally used inCanada and USA. After 20 years,however, as Mr. McKee points out,large volume usage of the olderBritish 'BA' threads persists in Eng-land. As part of the program tometricate in Great Britain, Britishcompanies are now asked tochange to still another thread stan-dard. It is understandable that op-position exists and likely that manyyears will pass before metricthreads gain popular acceptancein England.

metrics and RCA

On the people side of the program,Ken McKee explains that one of theresponsibilities assigned to therelatively new British MetricationBoard is that of "preparing the pub-lic for the change." Many Britishersconsider this a formidable taskthat should have received farmore attention before the programwas launched. Evidences of politi-cal controversy born of a sense offrustration among many who feelthey were not adequately consultedabout a change of such magnitudeappear frequently in the Britishpress and are causing the gov-ernment to reconsider some of theextremes in the scope of the transi-tion.

In the United States the NationalBureau of Standards is engaged in

an in-depth measurements studyreaching into every sector of theeconomy. The work, the first of itskind ever undertaken, is in its thirdand last year and scheduled forcompletion in August 1971. At thattime the Secretary of Commerceplans to submit to the Presidentand the Congress a detailed reportrevealing the findings of the study.It is anticipated that the data madeavailable in the Secretary's reportwill provide valuable guidance tothe Nation and to RCA in establish-ing future measurement policy.

Until events of the future dictatea reappraisal, RCA's continuingpractice is to use those units ofmeasure which are well estab-lished, implemented, and univers-ally understood in each of the manylocations in which RCA operates.This applies to metric units in in-ternational locations as well as tothe customary units in the UnitedStates and Canada. In some appli-cations, a combination of both met-ric and customary units is usedwhen such a combination betterserves customers in the intendedmarket area.

Accounts of the experiences of ourgood friends in England and re-ports such as that by Ken McKeefeatured in this issue of the RCAEngineer are regarded as the mostvaluable type of input for the inves-tigation in USA.

Editorial acknowledgement: Thanks to S. H.Watson, Manager, Corporate Standardizing,for this Editorial Input. Mr. Watson is emi-nently qualified to discuss the metric situa-tion in the U.S. Recently, at the invitation ofthe Secretary of Commerce, he became amember of the National Metric AdvisoryPanel, and at the request of the ManagingDirector of the American National StandardsInstitute, he is serving on the ANSI MetricAdvisory Committee. In addition, Mr. Watsonrepresents the Industrial Electronics Divisionof the Electronic Industries Association onthe EIA Metric Study Panel, and as chairmanof the EIA Engineering Policy Council, hewas instrumental in establishing the EIAMetric Group.

This Issue: Special thanks go also to W. A.

Howard of NBC, R. Andrews of RCA Records,and W. Leis of RCA Globcom who were respon-sible for much of the planning and coordinationthat made this "New York" issue a reality.

Future Issues

The next issue of the RCA Engineer featuresconsumer electronics. Some of the topics tobe discussed are:

Microelectronics in consumer products

Monolithic integration of color TV receivers

Solid-state black -and -white TV design

New -generation color -TV receiver

Single-vidicon color TV camerasfor home use

Homefax

Modular concepts in TV design

Beam lead technology

Discussions of the following themes areplanned for future issues.

Computers

Displays, optics, photochromics

Graphic systems

Systems programming developments

Computer peripherals

Advanced Technology Laboratories

Mathematics for engineering

Video playback systems

2

MetricationK. M. McKee

The basic metric system holds little mystery for scientists and engineers. For nearly acentury. all fundamental scientific work has been published using metric units. Overthis period. the system has evolved from units founded on simple definitions of length.mass. and time to present day coherent SI units specially designed to meet the needsof engineers and ever advancing technology. It has taken two generations for metrica-tion to achieve general international acceptance. While the extent of its use varieswidely from nation to nation, the pace of adoption by advanced as well as lessdeveloped nations has quickened. Beginning with the proposals of a dozen scientists180 years ago. the system has now grown to become the international language ofmeasurement.

MO UNDERSTAND THE BASIS OF MET-RICATION and the variety of units

used in the measurement world of to-day, we have to go back in time to the18th century. In England prior to theeighteenth century, all measurementunits were based on natural dimen-sions chosen quite independently ofone another. The foot was the lengthof an average man's foot and the yardthe length of a man's arm. Such unitshad the advantage of being easily visu-alised and, for many trades, offered aready means of rough checking. Longerdistances between places were mea-sured in miles, a mile originally being1000 double paces. An acre was theunit of land measurement and repre-sented the area one man could culti-vate on his own. There was then rarelyany need to inter -relate these units, butwhen this eventually occurred, it is notreally surprising that awkward rela-tionships arose and remain to this day:

1,296 square inches = 1 square yard43,560 square feet = 1 acre

While there was no co-ordinating au-thority, regional divergences devel-oped. An instance of the confusionthat existed as recently as 1904 ap-pears in a report by Mr. Isaac Connell,then Secretary of the Scottish Chamberof Agriculture:

"According to district the stone of hayor straw may be 8, 14, 22, 221/2 or24 lbs. For example in Caithness andSutherlandshire the standard is 28 lbs,in Ross -shire 14 lbs, in Invernesshire23 lbs, in Berwickshire, Roxburghshire,Nairn & Morayshire 23 lbs, in Dum-friesshire and Berwick Town 24 lbs."

Reprint RE -16-4-15Final manuscript received May 18, 1970.

For many centuries England too hadseveral pounds in use by a variety oftrades: Tower, Troy, Mercantile,Avoirdupois-and all different.

National standardization has sinceironed out local but not internationaldifferences. On a transatlantic flight toNew York some years ago, a US jetwas refuelled at London with US in-stead of British gallons. The enginescut out over the Atlantic 500 milesshort of its destination. Similar errorshave also been recurring between Brit-ish and American quarts, pints, andgills, since England adopted the 10 lbale gallon in 1824, and the UnitedStates adopted the British Excise winegallon in 1832. In absence of an agreedstandardizing authority, the samewords in the same language of mea-surement can clearly come to representsubstantially different quantities.

The metric system emerges

The chaotic state of regional weightsand measures and the general tur-bulence after the French Revolution,caused the National Assembly ofFrance in 1791 to appoint the cele-brated mathematician Lagrange andeleven other outstanding men from theFrench Academy of Sciences to revisethe whole French measurement sys-tem. The scientists recommended theunit of length to be one ten millionthof the Earth's quadrant and called itthe metre from the Greek metron-ameasure. A new and important featureof the system was that the ratios be-tween units, their multiples and sub -multiples, were powers of ten. At first,all the fundamental units were basedon dimensions occurring in nature.Later it was decided to establish fixed

TheEngineeranCorporation

41

Kenneth M. McKee, Mgr.European Technical RelationsRCA Internatonal Ltd.Londongraduated in 1949 from Queens University with theBSc in electrical and electronic engineering. Priorto this, he served with Royal Signals in the BritishArmy and received a commission in 1941. He wasin command of communications units on activeservice with 2nd Army from D-day through toBerlin. Promoted to the rank of Captain, he laterserved in Palestine and Egypt, becoming ChiefInstructor at the Middle East School of Signals,Cairo, in 1946. On completion of his Universitystudies, he joined EMI Research Laboratories inEngland and was responsible for the design anddevelopment of studio film recorders and telecine.Three years Iater, he was engaged in the tech-nical marketing of EMI's range of broadcast &industrial TV products. In this capacity, he wastransferred to the Far East and assisted in estab-lishing television in Thailand. While there, he be-came Extra -mural Lecturer in Electronics at Chula-longcorn University, Bangkok. Two years after hisreturn, he joined the United Shoe MachineryGroup to introduce automatic production systemsinto the UK electronics industry. In 1959, he tookup his present position with International Licens-ing in support of RCA's technical operations inEurope. Mr. McKee is a Member of the RoyalTelevision Society, a Member of the Institution ofElectronic & Radio Engineers, and a Fellow of theIEE.

3

standards, for example, the platinum -iridium metre bar, which could becopied with greater ease and accuracythan the units could be determinedfrom natural parameters.

The metric system became legal inFrance in 1801 but it took forty yearsto become obligatory. Eighty yearsafter inception, it had been adopted byseven other European States, and thegovernments of several other countries(including the United Kingdom andthe United States) had made its uselegal. This led to the establishment ofthe first permanent international stan-dardising authority, the ConferenceGeneral des Poids et Mesures (ccvm).The Convention du Metre signed in1875 by seventeen states also estab-lished the laboratories of the BureauInternational des Poids et Mesures atSevres near Paris.

Growth in the adoption of the metricsystem in the nineteenth century wasstimulated by the scientific activity inleading centres of research in Europe.The great advances made in scientificknowledge were built on the collabora-tion of scientists all over the world.Experiment and measurement were thevery essence of progress in uncoveringthe underlying pattern of natural pro-cesses. The scientist's need was for alogical and international language ofmeasurement, in which the results ofhis work could be expressed and un-derstood by fellow scientists every-where. The attractions of the metricsystem were obvious, so much so thatby the turn of the century, metric unitswere used almost exclusively for sci-entific measurement.

CGS absolute and practical units

The measurement language adoptedby the scientists favoured three pri-mary units: the centimeter, thegramme, and the second. These unitswere found to be convenient forbenchtop experiments by scientistswho were then mainly physicists andchemists. A whole series of derivedunits was added, such as the dyne, erg,and calorie, to form the cos system.Certain local 'dialects' developed inthe course of time, but the system re-mained intact as the measurement lan-guage of the laboratory for over acentury.

The discovery by Gauss in 1833 thatmagnetic fields could be measured in

the fundamental units of mechanicsopened the way for all electromagneticand later electrostatic quantities to bedefined in terms of the basic metricunits of length, mass, and time. Thirtyfive years later, the British Associationformally recommended linking me-chanical CGS units to these 'absolute'electrical units. Unfortunately, the sizeof many of the latter units was foundto be unsuitable for engineering use,so the Association proposed an addi-tional "practical" system, consisting ofthe Volt, Ampere, Ohm, and Farad.The practical units were arranged tobe exact multiples of cos absoluteelectromagnetic units. The British As-sociation units were adopted interna-tionally some thirteen years after in1881.

Engineers found not only the cosabsolute electromagnetic and electro-static units inconvenient, but the centi-meter, gramme, and their derivativeswere generally too small for most pur-poses. To overcome the objections, themetric "technical" system was devised.employing the metre, kilogramme -force, and second. The kilogramme -force was equivalent to the pound -forcein the British gravitational system.Since gravity varies by about 0.5%over the Earth's surface, units of forcecan only be equated to units of weightfor low accuracy work. Higher accu-racies in gravitational systems involvean artificial "standard" gravity with afixed value of g arising where forcesare other than gravitational. A scaled -up replica of the cos system for engi-neers was introduced at a later date,known as the MTS system, standing formetre, tonne -mass, and second system.The tonne (or metric ton) is a namefor the megagramme and is still usedin metric countries today. Both these"engineering" systems have since beensuperseded, but many of the units con-tinue in use.

Difficulties also arose in the accuratedetermination of the absolute electri-cal cos units, which resulted in the in-troduction of the International Ohm.Ampere, Volt. and Watt. The Interna-tional Ampere was defined in terms ofthe current required to deposit a statedweight of silver in grammes from asolution of silver nitrate. The interna-tional Ohm was the resistance of aspecified column of mercury at thetemperature of melting ice. The Volt

and Watt could then be readily de-rived from the Ohm and Ampere. TheInternational Units were for all pur-poses intended to be equal to the Brit-ish Association's practical units definedin terms of cos absolute units. Greatcare was taken to ensure accuracy, butin due course, improved measurementtechniques showed up second orderdiscrepancies in the original figures.With the demand for ever-increasingprecision, it became apparent that theInternational Units could no longer beregarded as equal to British Associa-tion practical units, or related in anysimple way to cos absolute units.

Giorgi's MKS system

An historic event occurred in 1904,though few realised its significance atthe time. A young Italian engineerGiovanni Giorgi read a paper to the6th International Electrical Congressat St. Louis, Mo., in which he pointedout that by taking the metre, kilo-gramme, and second as primary units,a complete and logical system could beformed for mechanical units thatwould include the cos practical units.Moreover, if a fourth electrical unitwere added, an absolute system ofunits embracing electrical as well asmechanical technology could beevolved. Giorgi suggested the ohm forthe fourth primary unit, but the am-pere has subsequently been chosen forwhat has become famous as the MKSAsystem.

Giorgi's proposals attracted little at-tention for many years but growinginterest by scientists and engineerstwenty three years later eventually re-sulted in the International ElectricalCommission setting up a committee tostudy MKS. It was not until 1935 thatthe International Electronics Confer-ence (IEC) unanimously recom-mended the MKSA system for electricalengineers. Since Wold War II virtuallyall other international engineering andscientific committees including theConference General des Poids et Mea-sures (CGPM) have one by one en-dorsed this decision.

SI and coherenceThe CGPM meets in Paris every sixyears to provide an internationalforum for all engineers and scientistsconcerned with metric measurement.It was a remarkable coincidence that

4

at the "decimal" tenth meeting in 1954a step was taken that has had far-reaching consequences in the develop-ment of the metric system. Two furtherprimary units were added to those ofthe MKSA system: the kelvin as theunit of temperature and the candela asthe unit of luminous intensity. Withonly these six basic units, a series ofunits was simply and logically derivedwith the object of meeting the require-ments of all technologies. At the 11thmeeting of the CGPM, it was decidedto call it "Systeme Internationald'Unite's". which can be abbreviatedto st in most languages.

The st units have all the desirablefeatures of previous metric units andin addition have the important advan-tage of being coherent. A system iscoherent if, when any two unit quanti-ties are multiplied or divided, the re-sultant quantity is in the appropriateunits of the system, without the intro-duction of a special numerical factor.For instance, the product of volts andamperes to give watts is coherent. Anacre, on the other hand, is a non -coherent unit as it cannot be directlyobtained by the product of any twounits of length. Coherence simplifiescalculations, improves accuracy, andlightens the burden of arithmetic-particularly in engineering.

Derived SI units

1)eri\ecl si units are based on the pri-mary units and not on multiples orsubmultiples of primary units. Hence,the unit of force is the newton. whichis the force producing an accelerationof 1 metre/see on a mass of 1 kg. Theunit of energy is the joule, produced inthe work done by a force of one new-ton moving one metre. The unit ofpower is the watt, equivalent to a rateof working of one joule per second.All forms of energy are measured inthe same units, so that the joule andwatt are the st thermal and electrical,as well as the mechanical, units ofenergy.

It may strike some engineers as strangethat the watt has become a mechanicalunit. The horsepower had a very realvalue in the early days of steam andinternal-combustion engines in ena-bling the user to visualize how manyhorses an engine would replace. Now-adays, with aeroengines rated in tenthousands of hp and the extensive use

of tiny fractional -hp motors, the rele-vance of the term has largely beenlost. Furthermore, the use in Europe ofmetric horsepower, whose 'horse' de-velops about 10 watts less power, hasadded an element of ambiguity.

There is only one st unit for a par-ticular measurement, but one which isinfinitely adjustable in magnitude bythe use of the well known decimalprefixes. The CGPM recommends thatwhere the size of derived units has tobe altered in this way, the prefixshould be applied to the numerator,and not to the denominator. For exam-ple, the unit of pressure is the newtonper square meter and is very small. Amilion-times multiple is frequentlyneeded, so this should be expressed asMN/m' rather than N/mtre, althoughthe two are actually identical.

The simplicity and coherence of SI

units enable engineers to calculatemore rapidly with less effort and withless dependence on tables, slide rule.and the computer. It is worth notingtwo chance short cuts. The accelera-tion due to gravity, which is 9.81m/sec' can be rounded up to ten forthe quick mental calculations so oftenused by engineers. Secondly, normalatmospheric pressure can be taken as100 kN/m2 (or 100kP). It will be ap-preciated that in changing to si units,some equally useful approximations inprevious systems will inevitably belost.

There are two st supplementary units.the radian (rad) as the unit of planeangle and the steradian (sr) as the unitof solid angle. These are often em-ployed in mechanics in associationwith the first three primary units. Thethermodynamic unit of temperature isthe kelvin. while the practical unit hasbecome the degree celsius in place ofcentigrade. The change of name tocelsius was made principally because agrade in several major Europeancountries is one hundredth of a rightangle, and a centigrade a hundredthpart of this unit.

The International Standards Organisa-tion approved in 1967 and issued in1969, ISO Recommendation R1000which provides the rules for the use ofsi units. A list of the derived s unitshaving special names is shown inTable II. The unit of pressure, thepascal. and the unit of magnetic flux.

Table I-The six Si primary units

Quantity Unit SymbollengthMSStimeelectric currenttemperatureluminous intrisity

metrekilogrammesecondamperekelvincandela

rnkg

AKcd

Table II-Derived SI units with special names.

Quantity Unit Symbolfrequencyforcepressurework, energy. heatpowerelectric chargeelectric potentialelectric capacitanceelectric resistanceelectric -conductancemagnetic fluxmagnetic flux densityinductanceluminous fluxilluminationtemperature

hertz /1:= I/snewton N =kg m/s2pascal P = Njoule /=N mwatt W= //scoulomb C=A svolt V= W/Afarad F=A s/Vohm 0= V/Asiemens S=1/S2weber IVb =V stesta T= Wb/m,henry /I -= V s/Alumen Irn =cd srlux lx=Im/m'celsius °C= K -273.15

Table III-Metrication status of the largermetric countries.

Afghanistan tinis Laos UMSAlgeria ums Lebanon umsAngola ums Libya umsArgentina ums Malagasy umsAustralia cm Malaysia umsAustria Est Mali umsBelgium umsBolivia ums Mexico VMSBrazil Est Morocco timsBulgaria Est Mozambique umsCeylon cm Nepal LSIChad ums Netherlands PSI

Chile ASi New Zealand cmChina ums Nigeria umsColumbia ums Norway PSI

Congo ums Pakistan csiCosta Rica ums Paraguay umsCzechoslovakia Es: Peru VMSDenmark PSI Philippines umsEcuador ums Poland PSI

Eire cm Portugal PSI

Ethiopia Est Rumania LSIFinland Est Saudi Arabia umsFormosa ums Somalia umsFrance Est South Africa csiGermany East Est Spain PSI

Germany West Est Sudan VMSGreece ums Sweden L1MS

Greenland ums Switzerland PSI

Guatemala ums Syria tintsHungary PSI Taiwan umsIceland ums Tanzania LSIIndia PSI Thailand PSI

Indonesia Lists Tunisia VMSIran ASI Turkey ASIIraq Ast UAR ASIIsrael ASI UK cmItaly PSI Uruguay Elmsjapan PSI USSR PSI

Jordan ums Venezuela LSIKenya est Vietnam VMSKorea Ls! Yugoslavia LSI

Legend

Est-passed legislation making st the only legalsystem of measurement.PSI-using metric system, and preparing to makeSi the only legal system.ASI-using metric system, and officially approvedISO/R1000 on st.cal-not using metric system, but in process ofchanging to st.ums-using metric system for normal measure-ment and business.

5

1

1967

BSI WORK. REPARATION OF PRIORITYBRITISH STANDARDS FOR METRIC I

MATERIALS. TOOLS AND COMPONENTS

2AVAILABILITY OF METRICMATERIALS. TOOLS ANDCOMPONENTS FROM STOCK

3

4

5

DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT

PRODUCTION LANNING

OVERALL PERIOD OF CHANGETO METRIC PRODUCTION

1968 1969

ElmA11111111111

TERMINAL DATES FOR MAIN CHANGE IN

ELECTRIC CABLE INDUSTRY

PAPER B PRINTING INDUSTRIES

CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY

1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 11975

GONT NUING MET CATION OF REMAINING BRITISHSTANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE

Fig. 1-Basic British programme for adoption of the metric system in engineering.

the siemens, have neither as yet re-ceived full international acceptance.All the remaining derived st unitshave compound names made up fromcombinations of the units in Tables Iand II (e.g., metre per second or am-pere per metre). In course of time, itis probable that names of other greatscientists and engineers will replacethe more cumbersome st unit names.

International acceptance of SI

Over the past fifteen years, manycountries have set up committees tostudy, in depth, the implications of in-ternational metrication on their owneconomies in the light of benefits andcosts to be expected on changing over.An increasing number have reached adecision in favour of adopting st overperiods ranging up to ten years. Thereare, at present, 134 countries eitherusing or committed to the metric sys-tem. Over a third of these are verysmall states indeed. Table III indicatesthe st status of the larger nations,which will interest readers concernedwith products for sale on internationalmarkets.

Although the majority of metric coun-tries have formally endorsed thechange to st, some st units are stillquite unfamiliar. In almost every case,units from previous metric systemscontinue legally in use. France has hadst legislation since 1961, but also al-lows certain non-st units from the cussystem including the mille (nauticalmile), noeud (knot) , watt hour, calo-rie, litre, dyne, erg and bar. Germany

INITIAL PERIOD OF CHANGEUP TO 25%

MAIN PERIOD OF CHANGEFROM 25%70 75%

=11 MORE THAN 75%METRIC WORKING

introduced it's st implementation orderin March 1969, which permits the grad(angle) , tonne bar, poise, and watthour. It is apparent that even the ad-vanced metric countries have someway to go before metrication to st iscomplete.

Pros and cons of metricationEstimates can be prepared on the costto a nation of metrication, but it hasbeen found difficult to obtain convinc-ing figures. There is no doubt, how-ever, that the more industrialised thecountry, the larger the number of mea-suring instruments, precision machinesand tools of every kind it possesses.Hence, the greater will be the cost andthe importance of the decision tochange -over. Serious consideration hasalso to be given to the even less tan-gible costs of not changing, in the lossof future trade with and to metriccountries.

Probably the most rewarding indirectbenefit from metrication is the oppor-tunity it affords to reduce variety. Byreshaping standards, it becomes pos-sible to cut down size ranges andeliminate superfluous types. Take thecase of fasteners: no less than 214screw -thread forms exist and 834 sym-bols in the various languages of theindustrial nations are needed to defineall these threads. In England, wherethere are five threads, an internal re-port of a large electronics companyshows that 7,000 different screws onthe company list could be reduced to200 with the adoption of no metric

threads. One of the five thread formsis the British Association thread, whichin itself offers an example of the scopefor rationalization.

The BA thread is the standard forsmall nuts and bolts used in tens ofmillions daily by the UK electrical andelectronics industries. The size 0 BA isjust under 1/4 inch in diameter andsizes go down to about 1/16 inchdiameter at 10 BA, making a total ofeleven sizes within this narrow range.Most manufacturers decided long agoto stock only even -number BA sizes;others, for some reason, preferred oddnumbers. Suppliers thus have to makeand carry stocks of eleven sizes, wheresix would suffice. The Iso metricthread has only five choices within thesame range. Extending this type ofrationalization to all components, it iseasy to visualise how production runscan be lengthened, designs and as-sembly simplified, stocks pared down,with a consequent reduction in unitcosts.

National metrication programmes

Once the government of a country hasdecided to adopt the metric system, adecision has to be reached on thelength of the change -over period. Aprogramme then must be prepared in-dicating the timing of the change foreach sector of the economy. Some ofthe more advanced countries recentlyhave planned the change to take placeover ten years, that is from the initialissue of metric standards to over 75%metric production. Programmes of thistype developed by the Government ofthe United Kingdom will tend to setthe future pattern for other nationschanging over from imperial units.

In 1968, the UK Government estab-lished the guideline date of 1975 formetrication by the country as a whole.Committees representing all interestsconcerned in a particular sector of theeconomy have been established toidentify problems and work out pro-grammes against the guideline date.The programme chart for the Britishengineering sector is shown in Fig. 1.A Metrication Board has been formedto stimulate, oversee, and co-ordinatesector planning, and also to be respon-sible for preparing the public for thechange. Finally, in 1971, legislationwill have been passed specifying met -

6

ric units and enabling the legal changesto be made covering all sectors.

Partial and complete metrication

Each sector comprises a vast numberof companies producing an extensiverange of products. Company top man-agement has the responsibility of de-ciding when and how to introducemetric designs so as to minimise costs,gain maximum advantage from ratio-nalisation, and at the same timeachieve a high level of metrication bythe guideline date. In certain instances,it is initially more viable to aim atreaching a stage of metrication ratherthan complete metric redesign in asingle step. The following stages ofmetric conversion can usually be at-tained either separately or combinedwith minimal additional effort:

1) Dual dimensioning of drawings with-out change of design to enable metrictools and instruments to be used inproduction, and in technical literaturefor product sales to metric countries.2) A partial redesign to include isometric fasteners, where previously inch -unit fasteners were used.3) A partial redesign to provide inter-faces in metric units (e.g. mountings,flanges, connectors, etc.) which willallow operation with metric products.4) A partial redesign to permit the use

O

UI

O

2

0

Prepare companystandards & stock lists

Train designers, planners.supervisors

aveortII

of OEM -supplied metric componentsand sub -assemblies.

Partial metrication allows the gradualintroduction of metric working with-out premature write-off of costly tool-ing. It is however only to be regardedas an interim measure, even if, in theinterests of economy, the process hasto be extended over a period of years.Every opportunity has to be taken todesign a fully metric product when theprevious design needs to be replacedbecause profitability has declined, or ithas become technically obsolete. Theoutline network analysis (Fig. 2) illu-strates the typical procedure for intro-ducing a metric product in a modernplant.

World metric trends

We have traced the growth and evolu-tion of the metric language of mea-surement from its origins in the 18thcentury with Lagrange's commissionof twelve distinguished scientiststhrough to the 20th century's Interna-tional System of Units based onGiorgi's proposals. What will happennow? Even the leading metric nationsare not, at present, using the SI vocab-ulary exclusively. Over the next de-cade, it can be expected that the

V

1-

ko

majority of metric countries will fullyadopt st units and the remnants ofprevious systems will eventually dropcompletely out of use. There is alsolittle doubt that large internationalcorporations, whose manufacturingand marketing operations span metriccountries on all five continents, willbe a major influence in bringing aboutstandardisation of units and measuringtechniques. By agreement between theworld's standardising authorities suchas the CGPM, ISO, and IEC, the rangeof coherent st units is likely to be ex-tended and periodically modified tomeet technological needs over the nextcentury.

References

1. Face to Face with Metrication, Report of theProceedings of BSI Standards Conference(Sept 22-23. 1969).

2. Going Metric Reports on Council of IndustrialDesign Seminar London (Feb 1969).

3. The Adoption of the Metric System in theElectrical Industry. BSI Publication PD6427(Ian 1969).

4. The Adoption of the Metric System in Engi-neering, BSI Publication PD6424 (July 1968).

5. Rules for the Use of Units of the InternationalSystem of Units and a Selection of the DecimalMultiples and Sub -Multiples of the SI Units,ISO Recommendation R1000 (1st Ed., Feb1969).

6. Anderton. P. and Biggs, P. H. Changing tothe Metric System, Conversion factors. Sym-bols & Definitions (HMSO, 1969).

7. Hvistendahl. H. S. Engineering Units andPhysical Qualities (Macmillan, 1964).

Prepare sales

literature etc.

Prepare design Make and testdrawings ispecificatVzns

S sIssue drawings for

Print & distribute sales lit

t1

Finalize drawin s

15,

prototype

EVENT 1 Announcement of company policy

EVENT II Outline production planning completed

EVENT M All metric production resources available

EVENT i Metric product on sale

special Wang i gaugesrs

m. ale

Fig. 2-Analysis of the introduction of a metric product.

41/44

Szo4

4=c00,.0

Procure sub -contracted parts

oevss

s9co'co080 s,

V

cw

V

EVENTIQ

Es'

PRODUCTION

DEPARTMENTS

Charles M. Ening, SupervisorTechnical OperationsWMAO-TV, NBCChicago, Illinoisjoined KVOR, Colorado Springs as a part-timetransmitter and studio engineer in 1938. He re-ceived the BA in Physics from Colorado CollegeIn 1943. After training at Northwestern University,he was commissioned in the Naval Reserve andsent to Radar School at Harvard and MIT. gradu-ating in 1944. He then attended Submarine Schoolin New London, Connecticut, and after graduationin September 1944 served aboard submarines inthe Pacific until World War II ended. Until May1946, his ship was engaged in experimental workfor the Naval Underwater Sound Laboratory, NewLondon, in which work he participated. He builtKRDO, Colorado Springs, and was its first ChiefEngineer. He joined KOA, Denver, in 1947 (thenan NBC -owned station) and transferred to Chicagoin 1950. He worked as MCR Engineer, TechnicalDirector and became Video Tape Supervisor in1960. He has been in his present position since1965, at which time he started building mobileunits as project engineer. He is active in civicaffairs in his home village and recently received aDistinguished Citizen award in recognition of hiscontributions. He is a member of the Chicago Sec-tion. Society of Motion Picture and TelevisionEngineers, and serves on the Board of Managersof this organization.

Color mobile unit for everyTV stationC. M. Eining

The design and construction of color television mobile units for today's fast growingfield requirements takes the engineer into many fascinating areas not usually en-countered in studio design and construction. Gross vehicle weight, load distribution,tire loading, suspension systems become familiar terms. Heating and air-conditioningrequirements also are different in many respects. To get a closer look at these facetsof design and construction, let us examine in some detail the evolution of a group offour color mobile units of three distinct types developed and built by the engineeringstaff of WMAQ-TV in Chicago. One or more of these types should meet the field needsof almost any television station or network.

1956, WNBQ, Chicago (nowINWMAQ-TV) became the "world'sfirst all -color TV station" with film andlive camera facilities to maintain full -color programming. Color video tapewas added in 1959, as the equipmentbecame available. The program climatein Chicago at that time was such thatthere was very little interest in fieldactivity, and a six -camera monochromeunit represented our only mobile capa-bility. .s was used primarily for orig-inating Network sports programs, andsaw little use for the local station. Thissituation continued until 1965, when acompact, self -powered, monochromeVideo Tape Unit was constructed.

CG -1 and CG -2

For several years, we had recognizedthe need for a small compact mobileunit that could go into the field on amoment's notice and move rapidly tothe scene of a disaster, fire, riot, orother news event. It should have itsown power generating equipment andvideo tape recorder, and be capable oftaping in motion. When the TR-5 taperecorder came along, we decided thetime had come to go into the hardwarestage. The result is shown in Fig. 1.

The vehicle is a 1966 Ford EconolineWindow Van, and has a five kilowattair-cooled engine generator to supplypower for equipment, air-conditioning,and limited lighting. Audio is singlechannel, with automatic gain control.The tracks from the side door allowtwo men to safely remove the videotape recorder. The equipment cabinet

Reprint RE -16-4-2Final manuscript received May 26, 1970.

also is removable, so the equipmentmay be taken into a high-rise buildingfor taping.

In early 1967, we obtained a three-vidicon color camera, and so colonizedthis unit. This camera was recentlymodernized with plumbicons and isstill in use, although in a different ve-hicle (Fig. 2) . This unit was construct-ed by a sister station at the same timeas ours was built, and subsequently waspurchased by us. It now carries thedesignation CG -1. CG -2 had a 3-Plum-bicon Backpack Portable camera in-stalled in the fall of 1968. Except forthe different cameras, the two mobileunits are virtually identical. Normaltechnical staffing on either unit is twomen. One operates the camera, theother is a combination video -audio -VTR engineer. If taping is done inmotion, a driver is added. The staffingis augmented as the requirements in-crease. An audio engineer is added forother than one -mike pickups, and alighting engineer for other than simplelighting.

Since these units were rather unique atthe time, it took several months beforethey were put to other than experimen-tal use. After the "play" period, theunits were heavily scheduled, as theirflexibility became recognized. The oneunit has been airborne in a C-119, goneon a weekend cruise on a DestroyerEscort, and acted as its own king-sizeddolly-up and down aisles at a boatshow. It has been used extensively as awild -footage getter for documentaryprograms, with the individual pieceselectronically edited to a composite reelat the studios. At the present time, one

8

of these units is assigned to gatherstories for the Noon News Show. Sincemost newsworthy events happen in thecivic and governmental offices after9:00 or 10:00 a.m., there frequently isnot time for film processing before theNoon News. Tape may be passed to amotorcycle messenger for delivery tothe studios, while the unit goes on toanother location. The present recordfor this type unit at our station, is ninestories at nine different locations inseven working hours.

CG -3

Our next venture was a big one in allrespects: size, capabilities, and facili-ties represent state -of -the art. The CG -3was designed as a major facility, withcomplete capability for network sportscoverage-probably the most demand-ing routine program requirement inexistence today. This "unit" is actuallyin two parts, each part a thirty-five footsemi -trailer, each custom built, eachwith a stainless steel exterior (Fig. 3) .

Air bag suspension is used on each ve-hicle. The "B" unit acts as a carryallfor the cameras, tripods, pan heads,dollies, cables, mikes, and the manyitems that are needed for a large pick-up. There is also a video tape room inthe front.

Looking at the "A" or control unitfirst, the vehicle is air-conditioned bytwo four -ton units mounted in theskirt compartments just forward of thewheels. These air conditioners havehot -gas bypasses so the compressors do

Fig. 2-CG-1 compact mobile unit with Cohu color canera.

Fig. 1-CG-2 compact mobile unit wit Cohu color camera.

not cycle on and off; thus large varia-tions in power load are avoided. Theseair conditioners also have 12 kW ofelectric heating each.

Forward of the air conditioner on thecurb side, is the broadcast servicespanel with audio, video, interphone,studio address, and squawk -box termi-nations. Also located here are intercon-nection facilities for marrying systemswith other units, and this will be dis-cussed later. On the street side is a sim-ilar compartment where all telephoneterminal equipment is located with lugstrips and other connectors installed bythe telephone company. This compart-ment is reserved entirely for their use.

Interior layout

Starting at the front of the vehicle (Fig.4) , the monitor housing has sixteenmonochrome monitors, two color moni-tors, and a monochrome off -the -air re-ceiver. The storage area contains a filecabinet for instruction books and blue-prints, with coat hanging space above.Immediately to the rear is a console forthe Technical Director, the Director,and a drop-leaf table for the Producer.The next console provides work spaceand communications for the TechnicalSupervisor and the Associate Director.The audio area is elevated eight inchesto allow the audio engineer and his as-sistant a better view of the monitors.The audio patch rack is in back of theaudio engineer next to the wall, andthe other two racks in this row containthe main and auxiliary video switchingsystems. The next row of racks house

the Rhubidium frequency standard,three sync generators, pulse and videodistribution amplifiers, and the Trans-mission Engineer's monitoring, switch-ing and communications equipment.There are no dead -back racks; allequipment is accessible from rackfront or back. The rear -most area isthe video control area.

Before building this unit, mock-upswere made of all areas to obtain opti-mum layout of equipment and to studyhuman engineering factors. We feel theslight additional expense involved wasmore than justified by the end results.

Video

The CG -3 has five Plumbicon color cam-eras installed, with space and facilitiesfor a sixth. At present, a monochromecamera, used for titles is installed inthe sixth position (Fig. 4) . This area islocated in the rear of the vehicle. Thereis a color monitor for each pair of cam-eras, and each is switchable by a 22 -input switcher. The leading videoengineer also has a vectorscope avail-able.

Video from the cameras is routed to theauxiliary switching system and then tothe main program switching system.The auxiliary switcher is a 22 in -10out INC reed relay crossbar, with SCR -

controlled overlap switching. Six out-puts are used as follows:

1) Insert camera selection, and emer-gency program switching.2) Video tape feed isolation bus.

9

Fig. 3-CG-3 color mobile unit.

[Mt11.00

CY I I IA I MI I

33 FEET

TOP VIEW

Fig. 4-CG-3 mobile unit interior layout.

3) Transmission engineer monitor andscope switching.4) , 5) , and 6) Video control color moni-tor switching.

The main switching system is a relay -type switcher. Basically it is a two -busswitcher, with a lap dissolve functionbetween the two buses. A and B effectsbuses are provided, with choice of 29different wipes, spotlight, additive andnon -additive mix, and insert effects.Three isolated video tape feed buses arealso provided, two on the main switch-er, and the third from the auxiliaryswitcher. The insert camera -emergencyswitching bus of the auxiliary switcheris also located on this panel.

For purposes of adding titles to pic-tures, we have provided an "instantinsert" mixer just prior to switcheroutput. The insert camera bus providesone input to this mixer and the switcherthe other input. The title, which canbe colonized and black edged is theninserted or taken out by a single alter -

ISSN

MOICIN

retoall

MON

tin14616.61

nate-action pushbutton, without havingto use the effects buses at all. Thisrelieves the Technical Director of aconsiderable amount of strain in a fast -paced sporting event.

Audio

The audio installation is built aroundten four -channel remote amplifiers.This provides facilities for thirty-twomicrophone inputs, plus regular andemergency program amplifiers. Tennemo inputs with individual level -setcontrols and preview keys are pro-vided. Utility amplifiers with inputcombining networks and isolated out-puts with individual level setting foreach input and output complete theprogram audio setup. Reel and cart-ridge tape recorders are provided.

Communications

Probably the greatest challenge to anygroup building a major mobile unit islaying out an adequate communications

system. A unit such as CG -3 involves alarge production and engineering crewwhich must also communicate surelyand swiftly with the outside world.Typically, twenty-five to twenty-eightpeople may be involved at a remotelocation, plus others at the studio con-trol point and also Telco personnel. Afull breakdown of the communicationsfacilities in CG -3 is beyond the scopeof this paper; however, a brief run-down of the systems is in order.

There are three basic systems of com-munications in CG -3:

1) Interrupted Feedback/Studio Ad-dress/Cue (IFB/SA/CUE)2) Squawk Box3) Interphone and Telco PL

IFB/SA/CUE system-This system isbasically for production use althoughthe Technical Director and audio andvideo engineers are cross -connected in-to this system. There are interruptedfeedback circuits to handle six differentinputs, a requirement which is seldomneeded, but very important whenneeded. Such a requirement might arisewhen production control for a groupof pickup points is centered in CG -3.An election, Inauguration, state fu-neral, or a space shot may require suchfacilities. The SA function of this sys-tem allows talk from the unit to twoseparate remote communication boxesfor instructing talent or for like pur-poses. The cue system is fed to allcameras, and may be used for programorders, in event of failure of the normalcamera PL or Interphone system.

Squawk box-This system is an engi-neering system of intercommunications,and connects the Technical Director,lead video engineer, audio, VTR,Transmission Engineer, and two re-mote points.

Interphone and Telco private linesystem-This is the largest system ofcommunications; it interconnects com-pletely all personnel at the remotelocation, both production and engi-neering, who have any need for com-munication with others. The telephonecompany communications are also tiedinto this system. Not all stations on thesystem have access to all other stations,but are set up on a need -for -access andon a priority basis.

Although we have not used it in thisfashion, CG -3 is designed so the video

10

consoles in the rear may be removed,leaving a large area with three switch -able color monitors. By the addition ofa long table and chairs, a "commandpost" setup is available for coordinat-ing a large number of incoming feeds.In this configuration, the unit couldact as a regional switching and com-munication center for such an event ascoverage of a national election.

CG -3B

The CG -3B unit (Fig. 5) is best de-scribed as a cargo (or carryall) VideoTape Unit, and it is still under construc-tion at this time. It is a support unitthat carries cameras, lenses, tripods,dollies, cables, microphones, and allthe many items that go into a majortelevision coverage effort. It is fullyheated and air-conditioned, with facili-ties equal to CG -3A in these respects.There are hydraulic lift gates at therear and side doors so the heavy itemsmay be unloaded with ease.

The rear room of the vehicle (Fig. 6) iscompartmented to hold the many indi-vidual items of cargo. The front portionof this unit is the video tape room,which provides space for two videotape machines, with space available fora Slo-Mo disk. After cargo is clearedout, the rear of the vehicle may be usedfor title camera or video -graph setup.A technical maintenance workbench isalso in this area.

A third function of the carryall is crewcomfort. Coverage of a baseball gameor golf match in a broiling sun, or afootball game in sub -freezing weatheris difficult enough under the best con-ditions, and we attempt to provide thebest conditions. The following are pro-vided:

A 110 gallon capacity stainless steelwater tank, foam insulated underneaththe floor between the air conditioners.A coffee urnA water coolerTen gallon electric hot water heater.Two wash basins, hot and cold water.A jet -aircraft -type toilet.

We feel we have done a little innovat-ing in this area. Anyone who has beenextensively in mobile unit operationscan tell many stories of personal dis-comfort due to the lack of facilitiesto support basic human needs. Whyshould a man have to hike a couple ofhundred yards on a golf course to get

a drink of water, or a longer distancefor a cup of coffee? We don't think heshould. As far as our sanitary facilityis concerned, the manufacturer claimssufficient capacity to support the day-time needs of a twenty-five man crewfor thirteen days before servicing isnecessary.

CG -4

Now, let's look at another type of colorunit, an expansion of our compactvideo tape unit concept; This one isnot quite so compact (Fig. 7) . This isa two-plumbicon-camera unit with ahigh -band tape machine (equipped forelectronic editing) with its own gener-ator for power, heat, air-conditioning,and program lighting.

The vehicle is custom, the chassis beingbuilt to our specifications by the JayMadsen Corporation, Bath, New York.This chassis has air bag suspension (in-stead of conventional springs) , airbrakes, a 534 -cubic -inch industrial V-8engine, a six -speed -forward automatictransmission and power steering. Thebody is also custom, and was built byGerstenschlager, Wooster, Ohio. It has

two three -ton air conditioners with hot -gas bypasses, and eight kW of electricheat. A thirty kilowatt generator sup-plies power for technical, air-condition-ing, and lighting use. Looking at thefloor plan (Fig. 8) we find the generatorin the left rear, the air conditioners inthe right rear, and cargo space in be-tween. Two TK-44A cameras, eachwith two hundred feet of camera cable,may be carried in heated condition, forrapid setup and taping when arrivingon location. Just forward of this areais the monitor bridge, which also holdsthe power panel, the audio monitoringspeaker, and the sync generator. Belowthis bridge, on the right side of the ve-hicle, is the audio console, with twovideo consoles next to it. There is stillspace for a third video console. On theleft side, just forward of the audio andvideo consoles, is a TR-60 tape machinewith an electronic editing facility. For-ward of this, and elevated ten inchesabove the floor in the center of thevehicle is the Technical Director -Direc-tor console. This console contains theentire electronics and control head of a12 -input, pre-set Grass Valley switcherwhich program buses with cutbar and

Fig. 5-CG-3B (carryall) showing hydraulic lift gate on rear. A similar gate is on the side.

35 FUT

rISO 4M1 SIN

CIIITI» WI III

4 I4155 1111111%I I :I :

Fig. 6-CG-3B interior layout.

r---

TOP VIEW

° 11

CII ITI I

Il511.118 HI CP

7:000110°.

PINT

11

Fig. 7-CG-4 exterior.

27 FEET

11111MTIR

111111

CONSOLE

TR- II

SWITCN.

CONSOLE

OZ 0001G

VIDEO

CONSOLE

11101

AUDIO LEAFIII CONDITIONERS CONSOLE

TOP VIEW

Fig. 8-CG-4 interior layout.

DFRONT

flip-flop switching. It also includestwo special -effects buses and a special -effects package with spotlight andpositioner. Communications for theTechnical Director and Director arealso integral in this package. This mo-bile unit is designed to be readily strip-ped, so the equipment may be movedinto a building. Audio and video con-soles may be taken out by removingtwo bolts in each. Four bolts hold thevideo tape machine and the switchingconsole. With the exception of thevideo tape machine, the equipment islight enough to be removed by man-power without mechanical aid.

The audio console consists of two four -channel remote amplifiers, and is setup so one amplifier sub -masters theother so seven inputs are available.This console also contains an audiooscillator for test purposes. Beingadded is interrupted feedback.

The roof of the vehicle has a subway -grill -type roof plate. By the use of "J"bolts, it is possible to mount trainableseats and cameras or microwave dishesfor taping or microwave operations inmotion. Also provided is space for athirty-foot pneumatically operated mastwith remote control head for a micro-wave dish. This last item is planned forfuture installation.

Marriage capability

With a group of mobile units such asdescribed, the technique known as"marriage," is frequently used, where-by a number of units are used, and oneunit switches all cameras and tape ma-chines as necessary. Normally, the syncgenerators of the slave units are gen-locked to the primary unit. Audio isusually handled by the primary unit.

Connectors are provided on each unitfor communications and for cameratally light switching.

Divorce capability

Once in a great while, a larger numberof one- and two -camera pickups is de-sired, such as election night coverageof multiple campaign headquarters.Our overall planning of mobile capa-bility allows this in one form or an-other. CG -2, with its single camera, hasthe sync generator and communicationssystem mounted in the console. Theconsole may be lifted out of the vehicleby removing two bolts. This package.plus a remote audio amplifier and acolor monitor then constitutes one re-mote setup.

The large unit, CG -3, has its cameraspackaged in double, double and single,or single camera consoles. The singlepackage is interchangeable with the onein CG -2 or those in CG -4. The doublecamera consoles may be switched withmechanically interlocked pushbuttonswitcher, although we are planningsomething a little more sophisticatedfor the future.

Our concept of readily removable cam-eras is being carried one step further.As we replace our thirteen -year -oldTK-41 studio cameras with TK-44A's,they are being packaged in the sameconsole as those used in field, withcommunications internal, but withoutsync generators. By stripping mobileunits of cameras, sync generators, andremote amplifiers and by utilizing stu-dio cameras as well, we can come upwith combinations to meet a large va-riety of situations. Our goal. of course,is to make maximum utilization of ex-pensive equipment, and not having a

camera sit idle in the studio when itmay he needed badly in the field.

Future mobile unit designconsiderations

As recently as four years ago when webuilt our first video tape mobile unit,the choice of vehicle, air conditioners.and engine generators was very limited.Now, however, there is a variety ofsmall van -type vehicles on the market,with considerably beefed up weight -carrying capacity. Foam insulation kitsand interior finish are available atreasonable prices. Roof -mounted airconditioners are available with theevaporator and condenser in the roofpackage. Two of these units may besupplied by a compressor, which isdriven by the truck engine, withoutoverheating the engine even whenparked. This reduces the power drainnecessary from the engine generator,and power becomes available for ad-ditional lighting. Engine generators areavailable in smaller, better sound -insulated packages which can slide outon built-in tracks for servicing. It isinteresting to note that most of thesedevelopments seem to be a result of thegreat upsurge in motor home andcamper ownership.

As far as equipment is concerned, thereare many attractive items on the mar-ket. Cableless RF cameras would cer-tainly increase our mobility andcoverage. Multiple RF mikes would in-crease audio mobility. A lightweight,miniature, quadraplex, high -band tapemachine is available. With this newhardware, we are looking forward inthe near future to rebuilding our single -camera units. The state -of -the art hasadvanced so much in the past fouryears since they were built, that theyare looking very obsolete to us!

19

it

Clayton W. Ackerson, Mgr.NBC-TV Field OperationsNational Broadcasting CompanyNew York, N.Y.is a graduate of Air Force Technical School; hestudied Radio and Television Engineering atCapital Radio ana Engineering School, and phys-ics and mathematics at New York University andState University Farmingdale, New York. Mr.

Ackerson was employed in the CommunicationsDepartment of American Airlines in New Yorkfrom 1939 to 1951. He joined NBC in 1951 as aTV Maintenance Engineer, and has worked in allphases of TV Broadcasting with NBC: mainte-nance, field operations, and installation and de-sign. He was appointed to his present positionAugust, 1966.

NBC television fieldoperationsC. W. Ackerson

The television broadcast industry is highly competitive and extremely challenging-a fact which hardly comes uneer the heading of unusua news. That which is unusual,however. concerns the increasingly high premium the business is placing on thelogistical know-how and technica amumer of the pe:ple directly involved in liveoriginations from sites outside the normal television stud o.

Fig. 1-Above right, a fleet of NBC mobileunits used for remote pickups across theNation. Most of these units are 40 -ft trailerscustom built for NBC. In the foreground, leftto right, are Alan Fendrick, William Trevar-than, Sherman Atwood, and Alan Walsh.Fig. 2-Below, NBC color camera at theSuper Bowl Game in Miami 1969.

IN 1969 the National BroadcastingCompany did more than two hun-

dred pickups. These pickups ran awide gamut of production importance,from spot news coverage involvingone camera, to the multi -camera treat-ment of Network golf matches, WorldSeries Baseball, Super Bowl Football,space shots, news of all kinds, pa-rades, political happenings, and a vari-ety of other events which involvedthe major movement of equipmentand personnel to the site of the action.

The increasing emphasis by all Net-works on live field television is pro-ducing problems which constantlyarise to plague crews and supervisorypersonnel. Logistically, the pace anddemands of in -the -field television pro-duction involve a staggering amountof equipment. Moving this equipmentoften creates problems, even thoughthe NBC-TV Network has at its dis-posal major amounts of field equip-ment located mainly in four widelyscattered geographical areas of thecountry: New York, Burbank, Chi-cago, and Washington, D.C. (Fig. 1).

The major articles of equipment lo-cated at these four distribution centersconsist of twelve tractor -trailers, eight

Reprint RE -16-4-9Final menuscrip: received May 20, 1970.

13

Fig. 3-Above, a portable, back rack, RF-connected camera used at FirestoneCountry Club in Akron, Ohio by NBC field crew.Fig. 4-Right, NBC color camera on a fork lift at Firestone Country Club atAkron, Ohio.Fig. 5-Facing page, left, platform constructed for NBC color camera to coverthe 18th hole at the Firestone Country Club, Akron, Ohio.Fig. 6-Facing page, right, a one -camera RF-connected mobile unit used tofollow parades or for quick on -the -spot coverage of News events as theyhappen.

miscellaneous trucks, forty color cam-eras, twenty miles of camera cable,forty miles of audio cable, two hun-dred video monitors, twelve videotape recorders, four video discrecorders, and two hundred fifty mi-crophones. Despite this vast accumu-lation of equipment, there are timeswhen it becomes necessary to augmentthis stockpile by renting from outsidevendors.

Football

With the emphasis on Network sportscontinuing to show a steady increase,maximum and unique engineering ef-forts are needed at an acceleratedpace. The Super Bowl Football Game,which was telecast exclusively byNBC in January, 1969, offers a case inpoint (Fig. 2). This prestigious sport-ing event was covered by thirteencolor cameras, two video tape ma-chines, three video disc recorders, twoaudio tape recorders and forty videomonitors, operated by forty-eight engi-neers. The normal football gamecoverage uses less than half thisamount of equipment and personnel.To accomplish the Super Bowl pick-up, it was necessary to use two of ourregular mobile units, with all produc-tion being done from one control area.

The two major problems concernedthe ability to communicate with allpersons involved with the operation:Producer, Director, Technical Direc-tor, Cameramen, Video Tape and Disc

Operators, Video Control Operators,Audio Control Engineers, Lighting Di-rector, Maintenance Engineers, Side-line Camera Vehicle and SidelineMicrophone Operators. The ability tocommunicate immediately with eachperson involved while on the air wasprobably the most important singlefactor for a successful production. Thesecond major problem was the methodused to switch all the cameras. Tomeet the demands for program con-tinuity, it was necessary to previewall cameras and select the proper onein program sequence, to establishvarious effects (split screens, etc.), toinsert graphics, to select any of thecameras for either the two video tapemachines (for instant replay) or thethree video disc recorders (for instantreplay, stop action, or slow motion).The program also had to be fed fromthe tape or disc facilities. In short,the switching system had to be capa-ble of eighteen separate inputs andeight program outputs.

Golf

In sports, a golf match is a most com-plex pickup, mainly because of thelarge area that must be covered withcameras and microphones (Figs. 3, 4,5), but also because of the extremelycomplicated communications require-ments. All cameras must be raised:some are on fixed platforms from 6 to40 feet above the ground, and somecameras are on fork-lift trucks with

the ability to move on the course andto be elevated to at least 28 feet. One -hundred -foot cranes are also usedas camera platforms. For communi-cations, two separate walky-talkysystems are used for scoring and infor-mation. One channel has a base sta-tion with ten moving stations thataccompany each foursome and reportthe stroke -by -stroke progress of eachplayer. The other channel is for scor-ing only, for all eighteen holes, eventhough only the last five holes of playon our live telecasts are covered.

Skiing

The Federation International Skiing(FIS) Championships which was heldearly this year, is an example of pro-gramming originating outside of NBCfacilities. Equipment and personnelwere supplied by European broad-casters. The Alpine events were heldin Val Gardens in the Dolomites ofNorthern Italy. The government -owned network (RAI) constructed acomplete broadcast facility in Ortisei,Italy, for this event. The broadcastcenter consisted of two three -cameracolor studios, six color video taperecorders, one slow-motion recorder,two color film chains, film processingand editing facilities, and all commu-nication facilities. The broadcast cen-ter also functioned as an audio andvideo distribution center for all sub-scribers. Remote units were thenrigged at each ski site (five separate

14

locations) and were connected viamicrowave to the broadcast center.Due to heavy snow conditions, cameraplatforms and camera cables were in-stalled during November, 1969, to beused during February, 1970. Each re-mote unit was equipped with five orsix cameras. The FIS scheduling ofevents prevented the use of the mobileunits in more than one location, ex-cept where both men's and ladies'courses ran parallel, as at the slalomcourses. NBC arranged for unilateraltime at each remote location-forcamera usage either before or afterthe event, depending on lighting con-ditions and availability of equipment.This enabled NBC to have talent oncamera which was video taped at thebroadcast center. The entire event wasthen video taped in each case andedited for playback later. Due to differ-ent broadcast standards used in theUnited States and Europe, all editedtape playbacks from both Italy andCzechoslovakia were routed throughLondon and the BBC Standards Con-verter. The conversion was from 625line PAL to 525 line N.T.S.C.

The Nordic Events were held in theBysoke Tatry Mountains in EasternCzechoslovakia, 25 miles from thePolish border. Slovak Television sup-plied the broadcast facilities with aug-mentation of equipment from ORF inVienna, Austria. With this arrange-ment, the same cameras (four in num-ber) could be used for both the

70 -meter and the 90 -meter JumpingCompetition by simple camera shift-ing. Duplicate cables had been in-stalled prior to the heavy snowfall.On one occasion, lines for video andaudio were set up from Czechoslo-vakia to Milan, Italy, which was theclosest video recording facility to ValGardena. The Nordic Event was videotaped in Milan and hand carried tothe Ortisie broadcast center (fourhours by train and 30 minutes by car).This, along with other program mate-rial from Val Gardena, was editedinto a show and played back to theUnited States from Italy. The finalweek of competition took place in

Czechoslovakia. The jump, CrossCountry Races, and the closing cere-monies were all recorded, edited, andplayed back to the United States fromthis location via the London BBCConverter.

Parades

Of the six parades presented by NBCTelevision during the year, three hon-ored the Apollo 11 Astronauts in NewYork, Chicago. and Los Angeles.These parades were combined broad-casters' pools and the New Yorkparade -pool host was NBC. The equip-ment used was two two -camera mo-bile units, one five -camera unit, onehelicopter, and one one -camera unit(Fig. 6) that followed the parade atall times. In addition, there were fif-teen single -camera locations and five

microwave positions (one for the heli-copter and four for the mobile unittraveling with the parade). The Astro-nauts were in New York approximate-ly three hours, and were on camerafor almost the entire time.

For the Apollo 11 capsule recovery inthe Pacific Ocean, NBC had the taskof bringing to the public viewer theactual landing ceremony of the Astro-nauts. The ship used for this recoverywas the Aircraft Carrier U.S.S. Prince-ton. Onboard Princeton was a com-plete NBC color mobile unit, aseparate power generator, a completesatellite transmitting ground station,a complete radio mobile unit, and acrew of forty-two production and en-gineering personnel. The equipmentwas placed on board in San Diego,California, and the crew boarded atHawaii. The mission was a thirty-eightday operation.

WeatherThe weather is one factor in FieldOperations that the Engineering De-partment can do little about. In thesummer we fight heat, wind, and rain.The heat we have been able to over-come, but rain and wind we just livewith. In winter, we have wind again,plus rain, snow, sleet and tempera-tures to 20° below zero. Doing a foot-ball game one Sunday in Buffalo inDecember and the following week do-ing a game in Miami, calls for a bit ofingenuity.

15

A INPUT

Video edgingR. J. Butler

For more pleasing and more readable title inserts in a television presentaticn, a video -edge capability has been added to certain video switchers used by NBC. This paperdescribes the development and design of the video -edge equipment anc highlightssome of the technical and economic tradeoffs inherent in the use of this equipment inthe TV studio.

"V O MORE EASILY UNDERSTAND how a

I video edge is created, a short re-view of a standard insert is necessary.The terms insert, self -key, and mattingare all synonomous and are, in effect,equal to a video -operated electronicswitch (Fig. 1). In general, there arethree inputs to the unit: the A inputconnected to the normal closed ter-minal of the switch; the B input con-nected to the normally open terminalof the switch; and the keying inputwhich operates the switch. It is stan-dard that a positive -going signal at thekeying input will cause the switchto transfer from the normally closedcontact (A) to normally open con-tact (B). When operated in the insertor self -key mode, the B input and thekeying input are tied together. Thisarrangement will automatically pro-duce an insert output which will bemostly A except at those times whenthe B input is positive or white.

Since there is additional processingrequired in the video path which con-nects the B input signal to the actualswitching function, it is normal forthe switching voltage to be slightlydelayed in relation to actual 13 video.Left uncorrected, this delay wouldresult in a displacement between thecutout created by the switching volt-age and the B video signal that shouldfit into the cutout. Fig. 2 shows the

Reprint RE -16-4-13Final manuscript received July 15, 1970.

KEYING INPUT

Fig. 1-Video insert amplifier.

OUTPUT

A INPUT

additional trim delays that bring thevideo signals at the terminals of elec-tronic switch back into line with theswitching -voltage. Had the delays notbeen corrected, the video to be in-serted would have been fore -shortenedat the horizontal leading edge andwould have been outlined at the backedge as shown in Fig. 3.

As Fig. 3 indicates, a border can becreated by simply mistiming theswitching voltage in relation to thevideo signal at the terminal of theelectronic switch. This procedure hascertain drawbacks, such as reductionof the size of the insert material anda border only on the horizontal lead-ing or trailing edge. The best solu-tion is to create a switching voltagewhich begins before and ends afterthe arrival of true video at the a ter-minal of the electronic switch. If, forinstance, the insert video is a set ofletters making up a title, the switch-ing voltage can be considered as thesame title video with wider letters(Fig. 4). If an outline is requiredwhich also edges the top and bottomof the title, the switching signal willbe composed of the same letters butin this case they will be both widerand higher than the original B videoinput.

Video delay to produceoutlined insertsI he switching signal, although a closereplica of the B video input, is not of

Dr F

8 INPUT

NC

NO

B INPUT VIDEO

OUTPUT B INPUT VIDEO AS

EQUIPDELAY

DI

KEYING INPUT

D,.02.D,

Fig. 2-Video insert amplifier withkeying delay compensation.

KEYING SIGNAL DELAYEDB Y ADDED PROCESSING

B INSERTED INTO ASHOWING THE EFFECTOF MISTIMED KEYINGSIGNAL

Fig. 3-Uncorrected video delay re-sults in substandard edge and insert.

Robert J. Butler, DirectorEngineering Planning andEquipment DevelopmentNational Broadcasting CompanyNew York, New Yorkstudied Electrical Engineering at New York Univer-sity and joined the RCA Service Company in Feb-ruary 1947. He was transferred to the NationalBroadcasting Company in March of 1952 and hasworked in all phases of color studio development.Mr. Butler was appointed Project Engineer in theNBC Engineering Planning and Equipment Devel-opment Group in October of 1966. He was namedDirector of the group in 1969.

identical character. The original tiebetween the a video input and thekeying input must be separated by anadditional amount of processingwhich will perform three necessaryoperations:

1) Modify of the original B video to pro-duce a switching signal that is widerand higher than the original geometry ofthe B signal.2) Add an appropriate delay to true Bvideo signal so that its arrival time onthe electronic switch will be centeredwithin the switching signal, and3) Steps 1) and 2), which are accom-plished by video delay, will cause un-wanted sync delay which must becancelled by the additional video pro-cessing equipment.

If the smallest picture element is tobe edged by a switching signal gen-erated from the matrixing of the origi-nal element, nine delayed replicas ofthe original element would be re-quired. Fig. 5a shows the geometric

E3

F.-KEYRIO SIGNAL DELAY

B INPUT VIDEO

KEYING SIGNAL WIDERAND HIGHER THANORIGINAL B VIDEO

B INSERTED INTO AWITH BORDERS TOP,B OTTOM, LEFT ANDRIGHT

Fig. 4-Corrected video delay.

16

LINE

OLINE I

GEOMETRY

A3 WAVE SHAPE

Fig. 5a-A 9 -element matrix canoutline the smallest picture ele-ment.

arrangement of these signals and theirdelay status is listed as follows:

A-Undelayed (original location of Bvideo)s-delayed by 1 picture elementc-delayed by 2 picture elementsn-delayed by 1 horizontal lineE-delayed by 1 horizontal line +1 pic-ture element (new location of B video)F-delayed by 1 horizontal line +2 pic-ture elementsG-delayed by 2 horizontal linesH-delayed by 2 horizontal lines +1picture element1-delayed by 2 horizontal lines +2 pic-ture elements

The number of required matrix sig-nals to produce a switching signal canbe reduced if the size of the smallestpicture signal to be edged has a widthequal to or larger than twice the out-line which is to surround it. This sit-uation is shown in Fig. 5b and thedelay status of the six signals involvedare as follows:

A-undelayedB-delayed by twice border widthc-delayed by 1 horizontal lineo-delayed by 1 horizontal line + twiceborder widthE-delayed by 2 horizontal linesF-delayed by 2 horizontal lines +twice border width

Many factors govern the size of thehorizontal outline but the most im-portant is the proportionality betweenthe vertical edge and the horizontaledge. For practical reasons, one ver-tical line (two interlaced lines) perfield was chosen as the amount of thevertical edge. If the horizontal edgeis to be proportional to a vertical edgeof one line per field, the followingformula can be used to calculate thecorrect width of the horizontal edge:

No. of lines of edgeNo. of picture lines per field

X(Picture time in 1 hor line) (0.75)

Substituting the appropriate numbersin the formula yield a horizontal bor-der width X-164 nanoseconds:

LINE fo I A5

Fig. 5b-A 6 -element matrix wherethe picture element is larger thantwo times corder width.

GEOMETRY

WAVE SHAPE

1/242-X/39.75 its

If we remember the rules for a six-

element matrix, the picture signal isdelayed by exactly twice the borderwidth (Fig. 5). It is easy to see thatunless the picture to be edged has awidth of at least the amount of thedelay, unwanted serrations will occurin the reconstructed waveform (Fig.Sc). A 2T pulse which has a widthof 250 nanoseconds represents thenarrowest signal which can pass the4-MHZ-band limit imposed by theTV transmitter. A border width of 164

nanoseconds surrounding a 2T pulsecreated by a picture delay of 328 nswould result in a reconstructed 6 -ele-ment switching signal with unwantedserrations because overlap of thematrixed elements would not be com-plete (Fig. 5c). For many reasons, notthe least of which was the fact thatunwanted serrations in a 6 -elementmatrix could only occur when thenarrowest possible signal was beingprocessed, a compromise borderwidth of 140 ns was chosen.

Implementation of 6 -element matrix

The original a video signal is delayedand matrixed to produce a geometri-cally larger signal for switching asshown in Fig. 6_ The first unit in the

path is a splitting amp; it in turnsupplies video to a series of /H -delaylines and a non -additive mixer(NAM). The output of the NAM is acombination of a 2H -delayed signal,and a zero -delayed signal. All outputsof the NAM and /H -delay lines areunity level and 75 -ohm source termi-nated. The resistive matrix at theinput to the clipping amp is composedof two 75 -ohm resistors in series re-spectively with the output of the 1H -delay line and the output of the NAMamplifier. Arranged in this fashion,the unterminated cable which alsoconnects to the input of the clipperamp looks back into a source im-pedance of 75 ohms. All signals ar-

LINE f-V-1

5

GEOMETRY

WAVE SHAPE

Fig. 5c-A 6 -element matrix wherethe picture element is smaller thantwo times border width.

riving at the clipper amp input willtravel down the cable, reflect back,and be absorbed by the correct ter-minating impedance of the source.The echo created by the untermi-nated cable at the input of the clipperamp has the effect of widening theoriginal video signal. The waveshapescf Fig. 6 show this widening and thevarious level conditions that can re-sult. The function of the clippingamplifier is to restore the peak levelof the output signal back to the samelevel as originally supplied by the B

switcher output. The switching signalnow arriving at the insert amp is bothhigher and wider than the originalvideo input. To place the originalvideo correctly in the center of thenewly constructed switching signal,the B video must be delayed by halfthe vertical delay-/H-and by halfthe horizontal delay-one borderwidth. Although cable delay D1 andD2 are of the same length, D2 actsas if it were twice as long as D1 be-cause it is unterminated. Cable delayD1 therefore correctly positions thevideo signal in the center of theswitching signal.

Luckily, the border width chosenhelps in solving the color phase prob-lem which would naturally resultwhen delaying the B video signal by1H. The odd -harmonic relationshipbetween subcarrier and line rate re-sult in a 180° color phase shift of theB video if passed through an exact/H -delay line. The addition of D1 in

A IN

B IN VIDEODA

VEN

LINE I

A

LOW 3 L0E

LINE SL

Fig.

.I

0V.I°I0 V

IH

DELAY

A NC

IH

DELAY

75w.

cunuYEA

HORIZONTALLY

NAM

2

DM:TERMINATE°

tfl1 tt

f-tf-n-k 1 tCOINCIDENT

6-Implementation of the 6 -element matrix.

17

series with the /H -delay line servestwo purposes:

1) To center the B video within its bor-ders, and2) To cancel the unwanted phase shiftresulting from the use of a 1H delayline.

Operational considerationsAn edging capability will be an add-on feature to an existing switcher.Video timing within the switchermust be maintained even though aserious modification of the effectspath is to take place. Economicallyspeaking, video edging is quite expen-sive: its cost is about equal to thecost of a complete effects amp. There-fore, if there is any way to makethe added edge equipment do doubleduty, its expense is less painful. Inarriving at a functional arrangementof edging equipment, all the abovefactors were taken into consideration.The results are shown in Fig. 7.

The area within the dotted lines isthe edge package. Physically, it con-sists of two 31/2" rack frames. The 1Hand 2H delay lines make up the firstunit. The second unit is further modu-larized and contains as sub -modules:

1 video amplifierI sync generatorI color lockI insert amp (used as NAM)2 processing ampsI module containing 16 miniaturizedDPDT relaysI power supply

The circuits shown outside of thedotted lines represent, in part, equip-ment which might be found in astandard video switcher. At the top

DAA

of the drawing, the effects A and aamplifiers represent the output oftwo switching busses, which wouldnormally feed directly into the effects#1 amplifier. In a similar manner,effects c and D shown at the bottomof the drawing would normally berouted directly to the effects #2 amp-lifier. Introduction of the edge pack-age allows additional processing to beadded to the B path if desired, or tothe D path on an either/or basis. Thefunction of the two -by -one relays lo-cated at the right of the drawing isto allow appropriate transfers ofvideo inputs to the effects #1 or #2amplifiers when edge processing isrequested. K 1 , interlocked with thetwo -by -one relays, routes the input tovideo amplifier (DA) and on to edgeprocessing. The processing amplifiers,which are in series with both the s de-layed video and the matrixed switch-ing voltage, work in conjunction withthe sync generator and color -lockmodules to restore correctly timedsync and blanking to the output videosignals. In addition, the processingamplifier in series with the matrixedswitching voltage serves as the clip-ping amp required to normalizelevels. As the waveforms of Fig. 6show, the gain of this amplifiershould be 2 to 1 and have a whiteclip capability so that peak level doesnot exceed unity as compared to theedge -package video input.

Ideally, the edge package should belocated as close to the existing effectsequipment as possible. Even withclose proximity, hookup cable length

DA

DA

DI

DS

VIDEO

DA

D4

DELAY

INSERT

NAM

PROC`

AMP

41

PROC

AMP

2 I

DI

SYNC

GEN

COLOR

LOCK

2

DI

-0

2.

2

o A IN

o B lB

B DO

EFF

D B OUT

o D OUT

EFF2

OLT

o

o

C IN

becomes a problem. After experiencein installing this type equipment, itbecame apparent that to preservecolor phase and border width, thevalue of the D1 delay which ideallywould be one-half cycle of subcarrier(140 ns) should be increased 11/2

cycles of subcarrier (420 ns). Thisincrease in the D1 delay allows forhookup cable delays and limited mod-ification of horizontal border width.Added delays, D3 and D4, are nownecessary to position the switchingvoltage to the new location of thetrue B video.

Control additionsThree logical inputs must be ad-dressed to the edge package from theTechnical Director's operating con-sole:

1) Assignment of the edge equipment toeither effects #1 or effects #2.2) Edge -on or edge -off.3) Color -on or color -off.

Many times the video signal which isto be edged originates from a black -and -white electronic character gen-erator. It is sometimes desirableunder these conditions to tint thewhite letters by adding subcarrier tothe true a yideo. This function is ac-complished in the edge package byrelays K5 and K6. Operation of theserelays is interlocked with the assign-ment function and will route sub -carrier from the color lock modulethrough appropriate video pads tothe normal termination of the B or D

video signal at the effects amp input.

External logic prevents the operationof the edge on or color on push-buttons unless the assigned effectsamplifier is in the insert mode. Whenin the insert mode, if edge on is oper-ated, the inserted material will droptwo interlaced lines and shift to theright by 11/2 cycles of subcarrier.

ConclusionsTo date, six edge packages havebeen installed in four different switch-ers. The problems which arose werenot so much the creation of theproper signals but the integration ofthese signals into the already existentsystem. Our experience indicates thatwith the exception of the color tint-ing all functions performed by equip-ment shown in Fig. 7 must be pro-vided when providing an edgecapability.

Fig. 7-Complete video -edge package.

18

.4c

1111.11a

...ay- WV MO An MOre Met nhenlill am.m.

1111.0 .1AS

' sy

NO

woos. .wwow

NBC Radio Network facilitiesand operationSammie T. Aed

A properly designed radio plant. whether network or local, is one which is techn callymodern and ccmpact yet can expand programming without physically changing thepresent facilities. Such is NBC's Radio central facility in New York's Radio City. Thisis the facility which services the NBC Radio Network. the "hub of the wheel" thatdistributes programming throughout the United States. The supporting "spokes" leadfrom/to Washington D.C., Cleveland, Chicago. and San Francisco for further dissemi-nation. The operation is set up in such a way that a simple turn of a key makes anyof the supporting spokes the hub, or the central feed point for the Network.

Sammie T. Aed, Director

Radio Division Engineering

National Broadcasting Company

New York, N.Y.

graduated from Capitol Radio Engineering Institute,

Washington, D.C. in 1947. During U.S. Army tenure

(1942-1945), he attended Yale University. From

1947 to 1962, Mi. Aed served in Engineer ng forWGAY-AM/FM Silver Springs, Maryland; WEAM

Arlington. Virginia; and WMAL Washington -7 D.C.He joined the American Broadcasting Company in

New York in 1962 as a Studio Engineer and in1963 was appointed Director of Engineering/Pro-gram Operations, Radio Network for ABC. Mr. Aed

joined NBC in h's present position in 1969.

TIIE NEW YORK STUDIO COMPLEX(Fig. 1) consists of three control

areas-Studios 5A, 5B, and 5C-plustwo supporting tape areas -5C Tapeand 588 Tape. Each studio is indepen-dent of the others, though identical instructure, and each possesses the flex-ibility of utilizing the facilities of theothers, singly or totally.

Individually, each technical area func-tions separately or is, in itself, a com-plete station operation. For example,the audio engineer in 5A may set upa three-way program conversationwith London, Berlin, and Rome corre-spondents merely by switch selection.

Reprint RE -16-4-4Final manuscript received June 19, 1970.

19

M111AITEt.:M,IC F.

-ONDFr4UIP

SHAFT ELECTRICCLOSET

FTST2=ELlailll T7.14try 11 I.

suPeaviioe

J [

7lb C RADIO CI-WTI:2AL .1

--.,IELEC74C

C LC SE' ."L

","

1 I 11LEETTrl -FT

COKITRO',_

7.4TRANSMISSION

') tr.'. I_OC LCCI,T L Sy r--

snNETWORK STUDIO

SeANA1C

Fig. 1-Layout of NBC Radio Central, New York, showing studio, news, tape, maintenance, andequipment areas.

The correspondents in each locationcan hear the other two without caus-ing feedback, while the engineer isrecording the conversation. Simulta-neously, 5C can be feeding a live showto the network, and 5B can be record-ing a live studio show.

In addition, Studio 5A is used for re-cording, interviews and news specials,such as space shots and elections. Stu-dio 5B (Figs. 2 and 3) is scheduledprimarily on weekdays to handle re-cordings and interviews; on weekendsit is solely devoted to "Monitor" feeds

to the network. This leaves Studio 5Cas the prime news origination point.

As an added service to our affiliatedstations, we utilize the "hotline" alert-ing device. This "hotline" pulse, whenactivated in New York, is detected bythe affiliated stations' "hotline" re-ceiver (Fig. 4) , and operates an alarm,buzzer, or light-or it may be used tostart a recorder. These "hotlines" arecoded and are bulletin alerts orprogram information announcements.This, basically, is our operating radioplant.

Fig. 2-Studio 5B in Radio Central, typical of studio in these facilities.

The word radio has many meanings,including "the transmission of infor-mation"; hence, the air studios per-forming this function must havesupport. For news, this support is sup-plied by 5C Tape and Studio 520 TapeEdit Room (Figs. 5 and 6). Thesehandle the recording, collation, andediting of overseas reports, tape andlive reports from correspondents, in-puts from affiliates, and telephonefeeds. The tapes and reports are pro-cessed, edited, and made into cart-ridges for use on upcoming newscasts.In addition, school desk units (Fig. 7)have been installed which allow newseditors to hold two-way conversationswith our foreign and domestic cor-respondents besides serving as thecommunications funnel between alloperating areas.

Additional support is supplied by ourField Operations, or Remotes, in suchareas as Apollo launch or recoverysites, political conventions, etc. as wellas that supplied on a regular basis byNBC in Washington, D.C., coveringthe White House, Capitol Hill, andother major Government sources. Fur-ther support is provided in the form oforiginating from our owned stations inCleveland, Chicago, and San Fran-cisco.

Simplicity of operation? Sounds likeit- yet not so simple. Engineers areever standing by, recording incomingfeeds from overseas, cross-country, lo-cally, and all is in readiness for theNews Department to decide whichsegment of a recording will be usedin a newscast. This means that onefeed, or as many as eight, can be re-corded and supplied to News at onetime. But this is what makes the"news" ever changing and updated-a ready combination of old and new.

"Monitor" is a different story. Thisinstitution has been on the air fifteenyears and is broadcast weekends only(a total of nineteen hours) culminat-ing each week in approximately 80hours of preparation of unknownnumbers of hours and volumes of re-cordings and field jobs to make thepresentation timely, interesting, andentertaining. This does not take intoaccount the additional effort involvedwith "current news and events" whichmay be injected at any point at the

20

request of News as these events hap-pen. "Monitor" programs, due to thevolume and complexity of material,require separate editing areas. Fouredit rooms are located in Recording.The edit rooms are booked by "Moni-tor" producers 10 to 12 hours dailyfor tape processing, commercial dub-bing, and promotional material.

All of this seemingly special carehelps bring a superior product to thelistener, as evidenced by the Pea-body award winning program "Sec-ond Sunday" and such highly regardedprograms as "Emphasis," "Perspec-tive in the News," and Joe Garagiola's"Sports." NBC Radio, New York, de-votes the talents of 31 engineers in sixtechnical operating areas to service222 affiliated stations. This type ofservice to our affiliates includes News,Religion, and Public Service. Thepainstaking expertise of the NBC NewYork radio engineering operation af-fords these affiliates-and ultimatelythe public-timely, reliable, and tech-nically sound broadcasting.

To insure this reliability and faithfultranscription, the power supplies, am-plifiers, and console functions mustnecessarily have redundancy. Eventhe cartridge and reel tape machinesare terminated in easily removed blue-ribbon plugs for rapid equipmentinterchange, as may be required. Main-tenance, therefore, is simple and fast.hence, less costly.

The philosophy of NBC Radio Engi-neering can be summarized as theability to handle a variety of functionsutilizing a minimum of operating facil-ities enabling maximum distributionof a superior product, and this is

accomplished through the same basicmeans of the industry we serve-communications. The communicationswheel turns as each spoke (Washing-ton, D.C., Cleveland, Chicago, andSan Francisco) functions as a radialto the hub (New York) . Furtherexpanded, the present ease of inter-communications between departmentand facilities essentially confirms thatNBC's flagship facility is indeed "aproperly designed radio plant . . . af-fording the capability of expandedprogramming without physicallychanging its present facilities."

Fig. 3-Studio 5B Control Room; there are four custom-ouilt consoles ofthis type.

Fig. 4-Hot line receiver; each affiliated sta-tion has one of these 'or fast news alerts.

&

Fig. 6-588 tape -edit room used for news.

Fig. 7-The NBC school deskwhere all overseas contacts aremade with new reports for newsreports.

Fig. 5-5C tape facilities; overseas news re-ports are taped and edited here for on -the -airuse.

0. Stephen Paganuzzi. DirectorBroadcast Systems EngineeringNational Broadcasting CompanyNew York, N.Y.received the AB in Physics from Columbia Univer-sity in 1949. After two years experience in designand production of electronic equipment, he joinedNBC as a TV Maintenance Engineer. During thisperiod he assisted in the original installations ofmonochrome and color film vidicon systems andearly system development in color video tape. Healso worked with the Facilities Design group dur-ing various system installations. In 1960, he be-came a Facilities Design Engineer and worked on

New television studiofor the Tonight Show0. S. Paganuzzi

Since 1962. Johnny Carson has hosted NBC's Tonight Show from Radio City Studio6B, a studio with a proud heritage in broadcasting. Ed Wynn, Milton Berle, and BobHope are only a few of the performers that have appeared in this studio. Convertedfrom one of the original radio studios. 6B has been modified a number of times-from radio to TV, from monochrome TV to color-but it was not until Johnny's long-term residency that it was decided in 1969 to completely rebuild the studio.

the design of the telecine film system in New Yorkand Chicago, video tape improvements, TV Newsand Special Events facilities, TV audio systems,the reconstruction of the present NBC NetworkRadio Plant and Mobile Unit communications fa-cilities. He coordinated the design of TV Studios3A and 38 in Radio City and became a FacilitiesDesign Project Engineer in 1968. Recently he hassupervised the design of Studio 6B in Radio City,the WNBC local radio plant, a N.Y. Telecine audioand video monitoring system and a special eventsstudio in Washington. Mr. Paganuzzi was recentlypromoted to Director of Broadcast Systems Engi-neering.

7, ---SCENE DOCK

PINRAIL

PLAYING AREA

ORCHESTRA-PLATFORM,"

L

L. LT

AUDIENCE

SPOTLIGHT

ALTHOUGH studio 6B is not thelargest studio in Radio City, its

size is such that it readily allows forthe many broadcasting demands oftoday's TV studio, especially provid-ing the audience reaction intimacy re-quired by the Tonight Show. It has aplaying area of approximately 2700square feet and an audience seatingcapacity of 250 persons. These figuresrepresent an increase of approxi-mately 35% in playing area and 3%in seating capacity over the formerstudio layout. In addition, the entireproject was completed with a studioout -of -service time of 41/2 months.This necessitated a rigid constructionschedule, much pre -planning and totalcooperation from all involved.

As shown in the architectural layout(Fig. 1) . the control complex consistsof three main areas: production (orTv) control, audio control, and videocontrol. During a show, productioncontrol is "the center of action" fromwhich the director coordinates the en-tire show. However, this control roomis also capable of handling "specialevents" presentations (conventions,elections, etc.) where it is necessary tocoordinate additional outside locationsin relation to the studio operation. Thisis normally done by the producer sit-ting at the console directly behind thedirector. Of necessity, many communi-cations and monitoring devices arebuilt into these consoles to facilitatethe coordination effort.

Video

The heart of the video system is avertical -interval type switcher (Fig. 2)adapted to NBC operational require-ments. It contains nine output busesReprint RE -16-4-5Final manuscript received June 18, 1970.

Fig. 1-Studio 6B layout.

22

providing seventeen inputs and oneeffects re-entry. A delegate switch pro-vides the capability of substitutingtwo more effects re-entrys (normallyused as previews) for two of theprimary entries.

An additional tenth bus is provided asa preview; however, this is a smallswitcher, completely separated fromthe main unit. Thus, if the mainswitcher fails, the preview switchermay be substituted on the programbus. Its normal function as a previewallows it to be continuously monitoredprior to emergency use.

All of the video switchers designed byNBC are operated by pushbutton -addressed control relays. The relays,in turn, route trigger pulses to theproper video cross -points. This systemhas been utilized to facilitate customdesign. Every switcher built by NBCis basically the same-only the con-trol logic need be modified for specificinstallation requirements. This methodof design simplifies the incorporationof such features as Preset -Programswitching "flip-flop," double Presetoperation for Black or Insert -Over -Program, search -Preset -remote -start,Lap lever controls with no mechanicaldirection (they always dissolve fromPreset to Program) and many con-trol lockout features for the preven-tion of operational errors (such as anattempt to dissolve between non -synchronous inputs) .

All inputs to the switcher are of acomposite -video nature, and theswitcher is essentially "free-floating"with reference to time base. The Ef-fects equipment is fed from an exter-nally locked sync generator makingpossible the processing of a signal notsynchronous with the Radio City timebase. it is also possible to operate oneof the cameras from this generatorthus allowing inserts into any timebase on the Program Bus (Superlockoperation).

The cameras used in this studio arelatest design plumbicon types withcontrols mounted in a specially de-signed low silhouette console. Notethe "joystick" central control positionproviding one-man operation (Fig. 3) .These controls allow fingertip changesof both pedestal and gain (as well aspreview pushbutton access) on allfour cameras from one central loca-

O

A

S

PGM

PST

PVW I

PVW 2PVW 3PVW 4

PVW 5

LAP

L

EFF

> E

A/BLAP

2

EFF

I:I /

INS

1 I

Fig. 2-Simplified block diagram of the video switcher.

kFig. 3-Video control console; the "joystick"right-hand corner of the photo.

tion. Though seldom used, remote"paint pots" are also provided for thevideo operator. All of the colorplexersand power supplies are mounted tothe left of the video operator in a rackbay which additionally provides a

video patch area, chroma-key ampli-fiers, video distribution amplifiers,pulse distribution amplifiers, and testequipment.

In conjunction with the switchingequipment, the sensitivity and stabilityof the cameras allows video effects

AB/CTRANSLAP

L2

2

central controlcontrol position is located in the lower

which were highly impractical a fewyears ago.

A camera -cable patchboard is pro-vided within the control area to allowany of the floor cameras to plug intoa floor outlet with proper video con-sole control (Fig. 4). A camera -tally -assignment panel makes it possible tofeed camera video into any position onthe switcher with the camera tally fol-lowing the proper pushbutton. Thispanel provides the additional capabil-ity of separating any camera position

TO KMDISTRIBUTION

23

poem

frog'

Fig. 4-Rack-mounted equipment for camera control lo-cated in the video control room.

communications panel from normalstudio operation and allowing directconnection to a remote studio. Thus,a camera from 6B may be "borrowed"for use in any pre -selected area.

Monitoring

One of the areas requiring carefulconsideration in the design of anystudio complex are the monitoringfunctions-audio and video. Today'sproduction groups involve many peo-ple with diverse requirements forputting a show together. Studio 6Bhas provision (in addition to the nor-mally required audience facilities) forunique patching audio and video tofourteen floor (stage) outlets. Thesefloor outlets exist over and above thenormal requirements for floor speak-ers (PA) , headset monitoring, com-munications, cue lights, and specialfeeds and are all grouped together withthe microphone input trunks into aBroadcast Service Panel (BSP) . Sevenof these locations are provided aboutthe floor area.

Within the production control room(Fig. 5) , one waveform monitor andnineteen video continuity monitors(one per input plus three special) aremounted on hanging shelves for totalviewing. Color monitors (21 in.) areprovided on the Program and Presetbus outputs as well as two largemonochrome monitors for Program(Channel output) and Preview moni-toring. To avoid confusion in theidentification of a particular programsource, tally -light readouts are pro-vided above the Program and Presetmonitors as well as monitor shelf iden-tification placards (white illuminated)below each continuity monitor. These

Fig. 5-Control 'oom as viewed from the program director's and producer'sdesk.

placards turn red as a particularsource achieves on -air status.

For audio, four self-contained posi-tions have been provided within theproduction consoles which allowmonitoring of twenty-four normal in -plant feeds plus six patchable feedsfrom the central equipment area. Inconjunction with this thirty -point sys-tem, four additional cue amplifiershave been mounted on panels to pro-vide four positions for ten -point in-coming line monitoring. Note in Fig.5, the continuous rails provided in theturret of the director and producerconsole and the pawl -lock fasteners ateach corner of the inserted panels. Aseach of the panels is a plug-in modulartype, they may be moved left or rightin the console turret for maximumoperator convenience.

A Program and Preset speaker is pro-vided in the control room ceiling forquality monitoring, the dual provisionallowing simultaneous Program andPreview capability.

The audio -booth program speaker isa high quality type, but in addition, asmaller preview speaker is provided.The video -booth program speaker isof the same quality as the audio pre-view but a smaller existant type allowsmonitoring of an associated studio towhich one of the 6B cameras mightbe assigned.

Audio and video monitoring also ex-tends out to the lighting bridge, thefamed "Green Room" and all otherdressing rooms associated with the 6Bstudio. These dressing room feeds areinterruptable from the control roomor floor manager patch -in position toprovide an Actor's Call System. The

call system defeats any monitoringvolume control settings in the variouslocations so that a stage call will comeout of the speakers at a preset level.

The transcription turntable (TT) /tape area (Fig. 6) is also providedwith a program speaker which is in-terrupted by footswitch cueing of theturntables. Note the wall mountingof the RT-21 tape machines over theturntables. Each of the tape machineshas its own built-in cue amplifier foraudio monitoring. In addition, twonine -inch monitors are provided onswing shelves for convenient TT/tapeviewing or for viewing at the audioconsole. Patchable wall outlets areprovided at the audio position. Builtinto the audio console (Fig. 7) , in linewith his volume indicators, two 9 inchvideo monitors (Program and Preset)are provided for the audio man.

In the audience area, nine 23 -in. moni-tors are suspended by steel cablewound on power -driven winchesmounted in the ceiling. This methodof raising and lowering the monitorsplus a rotatable yoke hanger provideease of maintenance and full freedomof monitor orientation. The audiencePA system is of the low-level type;i.e., many small speakers are hungabove the audience just above reachgiving full coverage with lowerspeaker level than the normal theatresystem. In addition, the speakers are"sectorized" into groups allowing lev-els to be lowered to follow a hand-held mic in the audience area. A PAoperator sits in the audience to coor-dinate the entire effort.

AudioThe audio console (Fig. 7) is a com-

24

Fig. 6-Portion of the audio control equipment, includingtranscription turntables and tape machines.

pletely customized unit built to NBCspecifications. Following video tech-niques, the console is built in twoequipment racks and remotely con-trolled from the console. This includesrelay switch operation and LDR fad-ers. This compact packaging providesan extremely low noise console andsimplifies layout and wiring.

The audio routing through the consoleis straight -forward. Forty-two micro-phone faders are provided which maybe delegated to any of five submasters.These in turn are routed through amicrophone master fader. Each faderhas an associated Echo Send faderwhich is delegated when the preampis assigned. An eighteen -position jobswitcher allows selection of incomingremote feeds with a sixth submasterfor level control. Should a nineteenthbutton be pressed, the remotes arerouted through the control relay logicof the video switcher thus providingaudio -tracking -video; a simplifiedblock diagram of the audio system isshown in Fig. 8.

As auxiliary equipment, two echotrunks, four microphone equalizers,four compressors, two effects filtersand various coils, pads and sparefaders are provided for patch -in use.The effects filters are fed through aneffects relay system designed to trackpreset camera inputs to the video pro-gram bus. The net result allows sucheffects as a telephone conversationwith the "off -camera" end of the con-versation filtered to sound like thereceiving end of a telephone. Of nec-essity, the switching between bothends of the conversation would occurtoo rapidly for the audioman to fol-

Fig. 7-Audio control console.

low with the filter insertion-thus, theuse of relays.

Of particular interest is the mix -feedsystem used in Radio City. Manytimes it is important that a returnmonitoring trunk to a particular loca-tion consist of total or partial programwithout the location itself mixed in.This is especially necessary when re-mote speaker monitoring is requiredbecause acoustic feedback through a"hot" microphone would result. Thesources for the mix -grid originate fromthe console submasters (including theremote submaster) and are fed to twomix -assignment panels: one for thePA system, and one for the outgoinglines. Individual pushbuttons (backedby high isolation) allow any mix com-bination of the seven submasters to besent out to the system locations.

Communicatio is

The ability for an entire TV produc-tion group to act as a team rests solelyon the calibre of the system communi-cations. Physical proximity, wherepractical, allows immediate verbal andvisual cueing. These considerationswere made as part of the architecturallayout. But there are many additionallocations outside of the control roomarea that also require communication:cameras, remotes, video tape, film.master control, etc. Individual loca-tions also make different demands onthe methods of communications usedwith the areas: headset, speaker, two-way, one-way, etc. For this reasonthree distinct communications systemsare incorporated in Studio 6B: Inter-com, Interphone, and IFB/SA/CUE(Interrupted Feed Back/Studio Ad-dress/Cueing System).

The IFB/SA/CUE system is relatedto the mix feed audio setups previ-ously mentioned. Each of the mix out-puts is routed through an interruptrelay panel prior to connection to anoutgoing line, studio trunk, or plantdistribution trunk. This, then, allowsinterruption of a monitoring feedbackto any location with a verbal cue fromany of three control positions.

Within the same panel are the relaysproviding the amplified studio addresscapability normally used when re-hearsing a show (or "on air" ifdesired). Proper muting relays are in-corporated to prevent feedback whenin "on air" or rehearsal modes. Oper-ating positions are provided for bothengineering and production.

The Cueing System (again incorpo-rated within the same panel with IFBand SA) operates selectively fromeither the director or producer micro-phone. A direct tap from either micro-phone is provided allowing everythingspoken into these mic's to be heard atthree locations: an audio consolespeaker, studio wall outlets, or themodulation input to a cue transmitter.This low frequency transmitter allowsa stage manager complete freedomwhen walking throughout the stagingarea and yet provides (by means of asmall portable receiver) continuouscueing from the control room.

As noted on the single lines, each ofthese systems (IFB/SA/CUE) is di-rectly related; therefore, the combina-tion provided by the single panelexcludes duplication of equipment.

The intercom system provided is pri-marily used when lighting the studio.During setup, it provides "hands-off"

25

5.-a,

10 0 .4 '""

any

MAW

Pm Non { MORS

IMO

FY0

M-

1,04MT Noe

taA 00017101

CMG

34.-a-A>i 14I

$0310

ONO. TO WOW.O 00 000 aua TwOu ra

lue avocTivo,P.m mew

Fig. 8-Simplified block diagram of the audio control system.

operation between the Lighting Boothand the floor; during show time, it

provides fast communication betweenthe Lighting Director (or TechnicalDirector) and the Video Booth.

The interphone system is one of themost important, as it provides primarycommunications with the cameras. Asseen on the interphone block diagram,a relay panel allows crosspoint accessfrom any operating position to variousoperations buses. All headset positionsare amplified in both the transmit andreceive directions by means of smallindividual amplifiers. Transmitter bat-tery (for the carbon microphones) isisolated from the outgoing line so thateach position provides balanced iso-lated, "dry" circuit audio to the relaypanel. Thus, all interphone circuits arehandled as normal audio pairs. Com-pensation for levels due to changes inloading on any specific bus is done ateach position by means of a volumecontrol.

Lighting

The lighting booth is located within aportion of the studio staging area.However, it is built within the upperhalf of the studio providing for a com-mercial staging area on the floorbelow. The floor area of 305 squarefeet provides room for a 60 -positiondimmer board (18 no -dim and 42 12-

KW SCR dimmers) a 335 -load circuitpatch panel, a main remote -controlconsole, and a ten -preset auxiliaryconsole. The patch panel is shown inFig. 9.

The lighting grid consists of split bat-ten load pigtail assemblies hung frompower -driven rope sets. Additionalpipes hung between the lighting bat-tens provide room for more lamphangers, or function as utility hangersfor overhead speakers, productionscenery, etc.

Stage illumination is provided by acombination of incandescent andquartz lamps, although the majorityof lamps are of the quartz variety. Al-though the dimmer board capabilityis more than adequate for orthicon -camera lighting, a slight reductionfrom past practice has been made dueto the use of plumbicon tubes; how -

Fig. 9-Lighting patch panel.

TO dm mind mawMANO 00070

+0000n'i...T. goo..toe

1101111411 ULM,00.10,11 r Mar

ever, this reduction is not significantdue to the present practice of "stop-ping -down" the cameras for increaseddepth of field.

In addition to the stage illumination,provision has been made to dim the"house lights" as in standard theatrepractice.

Air conditioning

It has been found that variation instudio heat loads make it almost man-datory that each studio in Radio Cityhave its own supplemental air condi-tioning plant. The use of transistorizedequipment has reduced the heat loadsto such an extent that cooling isprimarily applied for set lighting and"people" load purposes.

A chilled water and fan unit suppliesthe additional cooling necessary foraudience comfort and contributes tofront -stage cooling. The control com-plex and backstage are fed from theregular Radio City central air condi-tioning system. However, normal airwould produce too low a control roomtemperature when the studio wasstanding by; therefore, each of thecontrol rooms has a supply ductheater with its own thermostat.

For economic reasons, the cooling fanunit is installed as part of the returngrid for the studio area. The proxim-

26

ity of the fan would cause acousticnoise within the studio were it not foran intricate baffle system to reduceboth fan noise and air rush.

Production aids

In addition to technical power, gen-eral lighting power, stage lightingpower, and air conditioning power,two panels are provided on the studiofloor for the distribution of specialeffects (stage) power. These panelsallow the operation of stoves, refrig-erators, etc. on the studio floor, butalso provide for rear projection de-vices. Note the large double doors atthe rear of the staging area providingaccess into the scene dock. These, inaddition to scenery movement, allowa rear projector to be located in thedock area (off the staging area) foron-stage rear -screen projection.

As an aid to the technical personnel,two ducts (one for low level distribu-tion; one for high level) completelyencircle the playing area. These ductsprovide the feeders for the broadcastservice panels. Running parallel tothese ducts is a ladder track on whichcamera cables are run. This track pro-vides an easy method for dressing

temporary cables off the floor for anyspecial production requirement.

An applause sign is hung from a motordriven batten on the grid thus makingit simple to raise or lower the sign asdesired.

Two Dyna-beam platforms are pro-vided at the rear of the audience withsufficient headroom to allow theatre -type spotlighting.

Architectural

To provide the audience with the"theatre look" and yet satisfy the pro-duction needs and economics of TVbroadcasting, the architectural fea-tures were given careful considera-tion. The walls below the duct workencircling the studio were coveredwith 2 -inch pressed fiberglass panelsproviding durability, decor, and acous-tic quality. Above the duct work, 2 -inch insulating fiberglass batts with avinyl textured overlay were set in clipframes. This construction allows anextremely simple installation coveringall pipe runs and yet provides easy ac-cess to these pipes.

The ceilingstype with all illuminating fixtures

flush to the surface (even the stagework -lights are recessed) . This con-struction again provides easy ceilingaccess with a good appearance andallows for grid maintenance.

New theatre seats were installed inthe audience area and carpeting wasinstalled up the aisles, throughout therear audience entry and along the rearwall of the seating area.

Conclusion

This studio was designed with theTonight Show in mind, but the facili-ties installed make possible the pro-duction of many different formats.The equipment installed was "state-of-the-art," but certainly improvementsare forthcoming rapidly. The nextstudio to be constructed will have newfacilities and methods incorporated,but all have been built upon theknowledge and experience gainedfrom their predecessors.

There is no doubt that the planningthat went into this studio has pro-duced the result desired-total integra-tion and efficiency with a unitizedcustom look.

97

Burbank computer operationK. D. Erhardt

For the past five years, the NBC Television Network in Burbank has used a computerto store, retrieve, and process program information for switching three televisionchannels. The programs for each day are fed from a variety of sources, including livestudios, film chains, and video tape recorders. With this system, the events requiredfor the entire day can be organized and entered into the computer in advance. Anexecutive program directs the computer to make tests of the program information asit is entered from a keyboard and just prior to air time. As a result of the operation.equipment and manpower needs have been reduced and program switching errorshave been reduced significantly.

OR NBC, television on the Westr Coast began in a location in Hol-lywood which originally had beenused as a Network radio studio. Butthose facilities soon became inade-quate for the scale of operation re-quired for television. Property waspurchased in Burbank with room toexpand, and initially two larger stu-dios were built for West Coastprogram originations. At this point(1952) all programs were fed throughswitching points in Hollywood wherethe film facilities and the manuallycontrolled switching systems were lo-cated, and the sequences of programmaterials for broadcast were assem-bled and distributed by the Hollywoodfacility.

With the advent of Color Televisionin 1954, more new facilities for bothlive and film originations were builtin Burbank. Gradually, the majorityof the programming shifted to Bur-bank, eventually reaching the pointwhere a new switching system wasneeded to release outgoing materialfrom that point.

The work begins

Planning was underway at this pointto move the whole operation to theBurbank location, so the dimensionsof the switching problems receivedmuch study. The program channels tobe fed were well established. Theywere the KNBC local station transmit-ter, the Pacific Coast NBC TelevisionNetwork, and Telco lines feeding pro-grams to NBC East Coast. The sourcesof television programs to those chan-nels would be a large assortment ofstudios, video tape machines, film

Reprint RE -16-4-8Final manuscript received May 26, 1970

cameras, cartridge audio tape ma-chines, announce microphones, etc.

Assembling, switching, and distribut-ing the programs just before the moveto Burbank involved the use of threestudio control rooms, two in Holly-wood and one in Burbank. The studiosin Hollywood had 5 and 4 film chains,respectively, and the studio in Bur-bank had 6 color film chains; the totalnumber of film chains was 15. In addi-tion, there was a Master ControlRoom in Hollywood which switchedbetween the studios to feed the threeoutgoing channels, and in Burbankthere was a Tape Central switchingpoint which had 8 inputs and 4 out-puts for preselection of video tapemachines before airing them eitherthrough one of the studios or throughthe Master Control Room.

Until now, the assembly switching ofprograms being fed to the Pacific net-work and to station KNBC was donethrough separate control rooms, eachof which had the necessary film chainsfor its operation. On occasions, whenit was necessary to divide the Pacificnetwork into smaller regions and feeddifferent program or commercial ma-terials to the different regions, a thirdcontrol room would be required.

The new Burbank Switching Centralwas designed so that with no increasein personnel, it could do the MasterControl switching functions previouslydone in Hollywood and eliminate theTape Central switching point and itsstaff, taking over its functions directly.

The new Switching Central was placedin service in the spring of 1962. Theoutput switching was done manuallyby loading information for each chan-nel into preset relays, then putting the

Kenneth D. Erhardt, Mgr.Film Technical OperationsNational Broadcasting CompanyBurbank, Californiaearned the Bachelor of Science in Electronics andRadio Engineering at California State PolytechnicCollege in June of 1950. Since then he has donepost graduate studies in Computers and Elec-tronics at U.C.L.A. Mr. Erhardt joined NBC radioin San Francisco in 1950, transferred later thesame year to the NBC Television Network in NewYork. From 1951 to 1953, he took part in fieldtesting the RCA/NTSC color television system.From 1953 to 1954, he worked in the NBC develop-ment laboratory in New York on color film pickupdevices. In 1954, he was transferred to Burbank toaid the opening of NBC's Burbank Color facility.From 1963 to 1966, he worked with NBC and Con-trol Data Corporation engineers in developing, in-stalling, and placing into operation the computercontrolled automatic switching system at Burbank.Mr. Erhardt is a member of SMPTE and, at present,is serving a second term on the Board of Managersof the Hollywood Chapter. For the past sevenyears, he has been a member of the Color Com-mittee of the SMPTE.

preset event on the air by using anenable pulse. Design of this systemanticipated the addition of a computerto effectively add additional presetlevels to the mechanical relay systemand do other tasks to aid the operator.

One other preparatory step was takenbefore the computer was installed. Bymaking small additions to the facilitiesin one of the Burbank control rooms,the release of programs and insertswhich were common to both KNBCand the Pacific Network were com-bined in one Control Room effectingfurther savings in equipment and man-power.

The project is completed

In March of 1966, the computerswitching facility was placed in opera-tion. Again, no extra people were

28

required in the technical area whereit was located and the last controlroom and part of its staff was releasedfrom continuous on -the -air service.

Completion of the computer -operatedSwitching Central facility made pos-sible the following comparison:

Prior operationalrequirements

15 film chains3 control rooms

Tape centralMaster control room

Coln puler -controlledrequirements

10 film chainsSwitching central

Manpower requirements were similar-ly reduced.

The nature of outgoing feedsKNBC channel

KNBC is on the air from Sign On(6AM) to Sign Off (1AM) . Signalsources include all sources whichoriginate programs to the Pacific Net-work. video tape, film, studios, andnetwork lines plus additional sourceswhich feed only the KNBC channel,tapes, films, etc. which are broadcastat times when the Pacific Network isnot being fed.

Pacific channel

This channel is on the air wheneverthe Pacific Network stations are beingfed, normally 7 AM to 3 PM; certainclosed circuit feeds from 3 PM to 4:30PM; 6 PM to 7 PM, 7:30 PM to 11PM and 11:30 PM to 1 AM. Signalsources will be films, video tapes,studios, and network lines.

East channel

The East channel is on the air whenprogram material is being fed to theEast Coast: mainly news material forvarious news programs which origi-nate in the East, live sports eventsfrom the West, etc. Sources will bemost often the output of a studio-occasionally video tape machines,rarely a film chain, sometimes incom-ing remote lines.

Important to the economics of thesituation is the fact that KNBC isone station of the Pacific Network.Programs broadcast on those twochannels can originate from the samesignal sources in closely alternatedsequences. This reduces the total num-ber of pieces of equipment and man-power required to service the two

channels compared to what would berequired if the switching systems wereseparate.

Dimensions of the switchingproblem

Sources of signals to the switchinggrid are:

Signal sourcesVideo Audio

10 Studios 10 1010 Film Chains each

multiplexed with10 20

35mm, 16mm, andslide projectors

19 Video Tape Machines 19 195 Nemos (incoming

lines)5 3

2 Network lines 2 22 Live Cameras 2 02 Slide Scanners 2 0

(Standby Fax)I Black and silence

position1

2 Announce Microphones 02 Audio Tape 0 2

Cartridge Machines1 Test Input 1 0

Total signal inputs 52 61

There are three output switching chan-nels which are fed out of the plantand are computer controlled. Fouradditional switching busses are usedwithin the plant and are manuallyswitched.

The computer hardware

The problem at hand is basically oneof on-line control of a real-time proc-ess. Accordingly, the selection of thespecific computer to use was narrowedto those types which have character-istics designed for that application.

Briefly, characteristics needed for on-line process control are:

1) Instruction list with many flexiblelogic manipulations,2) Adequate speed,3) Short word length,4) Multilevel priority interrupt system,5) Medium size, random access, non-volatile memory,6) Large random-access contact closureoutput interface,7) Large random-access input interface,and8) Only simple hardware arithmeticoperations.

The computer selected, after muchresearch of those available, was theModel 636 made by Daystrom. (Day -

Strom was acquired by Control DataCorporation while the project was inprogress) The Model 636 is a stored -

program general-purpose digital com-puter. Solid-state circuitry is usedthroughout for stable operation usinga minimum of power and producinglittle waste heat. Self-contained core -memory storage is available in mod-ules of 4096 words to a maximum of32,768 15 -bit -plus -parity words; theNBC application uses 20,480 words.Drum memories may be added, butwere not required in this case.

Memory lookup cycles and transferoperations are parallel operations.Most other arithmetic, logic, and simi-lar operations are done serially inmultiples of 17 pts. The number systemused in the hardware is binary, withtwo's complement arithmetic. Thebinary point is fixed, and the clockrate is 1 MHz.

The instruction list contains 131 dif-ferent commands. A distinctive featureof the Model 636 is the Partial Op-erand Command. When this commandimmediately precedes an instructionusing information from memory as anoperand, it causes any desired portionof the operand to be used rather thanthe whole word. This feature speedsthe action of unpacking informationstored in specially packed formats.

Another feature of this computer isthe availability of stored registercounting circuits which use "externalmemory access time," which meansthat these counters do not use anytime of the central processing circuitsbut are always available to the pro-grammer For timing operations. Count-ers are used in several places in theNBC Executive Program.

Since the principal interface of thecomputer is through the keyboard andrelay system of the switching centralfacility, only three pieces of peripheralhardware are used: a tape punch andreader which are mounted in the maincomputer cabinet, and an electric type-writer through which the computerwrites a log of operations it is askedto perform.

The switching central keyboard, key-board readouts, and monitor housingneed considerable description sincethey are the principle man -machineinterface in this system.

The keyboard (Fig. 1) has an arrayof buttons to allow the following

29

.1

- - -=111...mmimiFl .02;.j

1-1-F'," LIAMii00

Cl..... Li Gee..

# 0

S ell

O 0 *9

Fig. 1-Switching-central keyboard.

0'

0II I

I

0 1

Fig. 2-Keyboard readout panel.

S fRIMnt

L SUMO Of Ur1,0 CW111

FA I "" NURMUT

Fig. 3-Operator's panel.

1

PACIFIC

niI I

'7;1

rizt

CHA NEL P N

ilt

descriptors to be entered into com-puter memory for later use in on -the -air switching:

1) Channel used-KNBC/Pacific/East2) Time-

a) Actual clock time of day (AM orPM)

b) Interval time (time duration ofan event)

3) Category - studio/film chain/videotape/etc.4) Numbers5) Special factors-

a) Lap dissolve

EAST

Ll 1 I

I I I]b) Insertc) Audio overd) Slide change inhibite) Commercial audiof) Audio over offg) Separate rollh) Protection copyi) Video sourcej) Audio sourcek) BlackI) Load next eventm) Discard this eventn) Modify this evento) Readout at addressp) Enable bar

As the switching central operatorpresses the buttons needed to describean event, the computer program or-ganizes the information for storageand retrieval and simultaneously dis-plays it on the keyboard readout panel(Fig. 2). If the information so dis-played appears correct, then the oper-ator depresses the ENABLE bar, andthe computer stores that event andblanks out the display panel in prepa-ration for loading a following event.

At any time during the day, any eventloaded in the computer may be calledout for display on the keyboard read-out panel by asking the computer toReadout at Address (using the Chan-nel and Time of day as the Address) .While an event is displayed on thepanel it may be discarded or modifiedby pushing appropriate buttons. Thiswill result in the keyboard displaybeing modified to agree with buttonspushed. When satisfactory, anotherpress on the enable bar will result inthe computer replacing the old eventwith the new information. If a follow-ing event has already been loaded, thecomputer will step to it and displaydescriptors of that event. Successiveevents may be displayed simply byrepeatedly pushing the enable barwhile having the READOUT AT ADDRESS

button active.

Channel panelsOn the console at the operating posi-tion is a panel (Fig. 3) with separatecontrols for each outgoing channel.Part of the controls on this panel workthrough the computer and part ofthem operate only the relay system.The following functions are performedthrough this panel:

Through the computer:1) ENABLE-Placing events on the airwhich have previously been entered in-to preset relays.2) DISCARD EVENTS-Discards the eventat the preset level.3) DELAY EVENT-Prevents all eventsloaded with real-time starts from oc-curring automatically. The operator canstill make the events occur by using themanual controls.4) START ONLY-When pushed, this but-ton causes the computer to output a rollpulse to the next rolling device downthe list of events on its channel.5) START TIE-When operated alongwith other CHAN START TIE buttons, thiscontrol causes each channel so setup toreceive a start pulse when any STARTbutton is operated.

30

6) CHAN ENABLE TIE-When this andother CHANNEL ENABLE TIE switchesare operated, this switch causes eachsuch channel to receive a channel -en-able pulse when any one of their EN-ABLE bars is operated.7) PGM A/B-Reverses air and protec-tion copies of program sources.

Not through the computer:

1) Black-Momentarily switches bothaudio and video to black to delete unde-sired material.2) Black Tie-Connects black functionto a tie bus so that two or more chan-nels can be switched to black by push-ing one button.3) Video Delete Preset-Sets up a spe-cial effect device to delete a portion ofthe picture which might have letteringacross it.4) Emergency Preset to Program-In-terchanges the Audio and Video Pro-gram and Preset Amplifiers in thechannel path to allow a failed amplifierto be most quickly by-passed.5) PGM PST Transfer-Interchangesthe program and preset monitors whiledepressed to allow comparison of A & Bcopies of programs on the color pro-gram monitor. (Preset monitor is mono-chrome.6) Preset A/B-Reverses A and B

copies of program at preset level so thatwhen enabled, the copy aired on thenext enable pulse will be that whichwas loaded as B copy.7) Preset Monitor Mode Automatic-When in the preset condition, the pre-set monitor always displays the presetevent. In the automatic mode, if thereis a B copy running, the preset monitordisplays the B copy except for the 10seconds just preceding the next eventwhen it switches to preset to displayprerolls of films or tapes.

Software

Space (and your patience) does notpermit a complete description of thesoftware generated for this project.The logical processing of informationfrom computer loading through possi-ble modifications, on air switching,and final logging will be described topoint out some of the complex, inter-related situations.

As mentioned earlier, the total mem-ory used in the Model 636 computeris 20,480 words. Of this total, approx-imately 16,000 words are used to storethe executive program which is per-manently stored in memory. The exec-utive program consists of varioussub -programs, tied together by themulti -level priority interrupt featureof the Model 636. All sub -programsare not of equal comparative impor-tance at any given time. For example,

typing the output log has a lowerpriority than outputting an on -the -airswitch, so the sub -routine for typingwill be interrupted by a demand toswitch.

Consider the sequence of programevents listed in Table I.

Assume that the computer memorycontains the executive program, thatit is running, and that there are pre-viously loaded events at the on -the -airprogram level on each of the threeoutgoing channels.

To load the 8:00:00AM event for theKNBC channel into the computer, theoperator would first depress the READ-OUT AT ADDRESS and the KNBC channelbuttons on the keyboard loading panel(Fig. 1).

Prior to the first button being pressed,the computer would have been oper-ating in the 0 -level subroutine whichdeals with "housekeeping" functions,such as operating the typewriter,checking the events ahead (in thiscase there are none) to see if anyactions are required, etc. Once eachsecond, upon receiving a signal thata new clock time is available from theNBC digital clock, a check would bemade to see if any relays should beset at that time; if so, another sub-routine is entered to set those relays.Checking the clock time has prioritylevel 10 and outputing the relays haslevels 12 and 13-which are all higher -level -priority functions than house-keeping; thus, the computer will ceaseits housekeeping until the higherpriority items are finished.

When the READOUT AT ADDRESS buttonis pushed, a level -7 priority -interruptsignal is generated which pulls theprogram out of the housekeeping levelof programs and simultaneously putsa true signal on one wire of an inputword. The computer then enters a sub-routine which searches a particulargroup of input words correspondingto the interrupt signal which was true

to find which button was pushed. Thatbutton will then determine whichroutine the computer will enter to usethe information. In this case, it willinitiate a program for searching mem-ory and will output a signal to lightthe button which was pushed. But thisis not enough information to describean event.

A similar series of computer programevents will be triggered when theNext, the operator must enter the timeKNBC channel select button is pushed.of the event just ahead of the place hewishes to load a new event, in thiscase, the on -the -air event. Each num-ber button he presses will interruptthe computer 0 -level housekeepingroutine and cause it to determine whatbutton was pushed, then take appro-priate action to use the information.In the case of time digits, the numberswill enter the time readouts at theleast significant column and be movedto the left as each successive numberis loaded.

Once the time is loaded, enough in-formation is available to the computerfor it to search, which it will do whenthe keyboard ENABLE Bar is pressed.The search routine will locate, in bulkstorage, the event requested, unpack itfrom the format in which it wasstored, and display all descriptors forthe event on the keyboard readoutpanel (Fig. 2).

After checking the display on thepanel to confirm that it is the eventjust before the place to load the newevent, the operator will push the LOADNEXT EVENT button. The computerwill then branch to a group of sub-routines which will first blank thekeyboard display panel, advance theaddress number display by one digit,and initialize the subroutines forloading events. The operator will thenproceed to push buttons describing thenew event. After checking the displayfor correctness, he will push theENABLE bar, and the computer will

Time KNBC ChannelVideo Audio

Pacific Channel East ChannelVideo Audio Video Audio

8: 00: 00AM8:00:15AM8:01:15AM8:02:00AM

S1-1 Anne. 1F2-35 F2-35

VTR 2 VTR 2

Nemo 5 Nemo 5 Black

SL -2 ATR-1

Table I-Typical sequence of program events.

31

store the information, packed in a spe-cial format for later retrieval. Thesame procedure will be used for load-ing each of the events listed.

The list of all events loaded is tightlypacked and leaves no vacant spacesbetween events. Simple events requir-ing little space use a small -size format.Events with more information in themwill start with the same short format.then add another increment of mem-ory space to contain the additionalinformation. When events must beadded between previously loadedevents, the computer has an intricatesubroutine to perform which movesthe information (located where thenew event should be) to the end ofthe current list, then adds information.In turn, at the end of the new informa-tion, an address is added to lead thesearching program back to the originalsequence of stored events.

The format in which the informationis stored in bulk is designed for opti-mum information density but is notconvenient for quick use when switch-ing. For that purpose, the computerforms three tables of the next tenevents on each channel; thesecalled look -ahead tables. Events areplaced on the air from this table anda 0 -level -priority routine reloads thetable with new events to keep it full.The look -ahead tables store the infor-mation in a format for quick inspec-tion, whenever a time pulse (1 eachsecond) arrives, to determine whataction is required on that second.

As the 8:00:00AM time approaches,the computer examines the look -aheadtable for coming events. A slide iscalled for from film chain #1 on theKNBC channel at 8:00:00AM; so 10minutes or ten events (whichever isless time) before the event is due, thecomputer checks to see which projec-tor is multiplexed into film camera# 1. If it finds that the slide projectoris not multiplexed to the camera, itchecks to see if either of the otherprojectors on film camera #1 has apicture on the air on any channel. Ifthis is not so, another test is made tosee if any other event between nowand 8:00:00AM uses a picture fromfilm chain # 1. If not, the computeroutputs a pulse to change the multi-plexer on film chain #1 to face theslide projector. A short -interval timer

is set at this time also. When it over-flows and generates an interrupt, thecomputer checks the status wires tofind out whether the multiplexer re-sponded to the pulse. If so, fine; if not,a second pulse is transmitted andchecked; if this one fails also, adevice -warning light comes on and anaudible alarm is given to the operator.The same checking will be done forthe events on the look -ahead table forthe Pacific and East Channels.

Whenever an event goes on the air,the computer checks the look -aheadtable to find the next event and out-puts that event into the preset relaysfor the appropriate channel. It alsochecks to ensure the relays were setproperly.

When the 8:00:00AM time arrives,the computer checks the event at pre-set against requirements. If they arecorrect, it outputs an enable pulse toeach channel which has an eventcalled for at that time. Again, it checksto find out whether the scheduled re-lays operated. If not, it sets off alarms.

Basically, the same manipulations areperformed as each event approachesairtime. If a rolling device such as avideo tape machine or motion pictureprojector is the picture source comingup, the computer checks ahead andoutputs a start pulse to the device 5seconds before airtime for film or 10seconds for videotape. Once again,checks are made to determine whetherthe device responded to the pulse. Ifa rolling device fails to start, a secondtry is made and checked. If that failstoo, then the computer will not switchto the failed source. A start pulse willbe sent at the scheduled air time. Ifthat one succeeds then the device willgo on the air. If that last try fails, acheck will be made to see if a dupli-cate protection copy was loaded andif it is rolling; if so, the protectioncopy will be put on the air. As beforewith the multiplexer, when a devicefails to respond, red tally lights are litand a warning signal is sounded.

There is a remote possibility that thestatus wire was what failed and thedevice is operating properly, but thecomputer cannot determine this. Forreasons such as this, the operator canalways override the computer logicand manually switch to the event.

If any event is blocked from computerswitching for whatever the reason andthe operator does nothing about thesituation, the computer will discardthe failed event 1 second before thenext event is due to occur. This pre-vents losing a string of properly pre-pared events because of the failure ofone ahead.

Notice that in the Pacific Channel, the8: 02: 00AM event needs slide projector#2. But 35 -mm projector #2 is in useon the KNBC channel from 8:00:15to 8:01:15. This means that the #2multiplexer cannot be switched to theslide projector until 8:01:15, whenF2-35 leaves the air on KNBC. Thecomputer will detect this situation andwill light the warning light to alertthe operator but will not set off theaudible alarm since it is not an urgentproblem.

Following each instance of either load-ing or switching an event on the air,the computer will have stored descrip-tions of the events and, during 0 -levelpriority time will type out a log ofinformation about the events.

The example described above showedthat each event start time was knownahead of time. Such is not always thecase. Sometimes only sequences ofevents are known. Sometimes theevents occur in bursts, such as stationbreaks in a sporting event. In thatcase, the lengths of the components ofthe station break are known but notthe start time of the first one. Thecomputer will accept event loads inall combinations of these situations. Ifit has a start time, it will use it. Ifit has component lengths. (intervaltimes) but no initial start time, theenable bars will be lighted to tell theoperator that he must manually startthe next event. Once that is done thecomputer will count down throughthe interval times, making subsequentswitches when due. If no times at allare loaded, then each event will bequeued through the preset bus and theoperator will have to manually switcheach event when he is directed to doSO.

Many of the most frequently encoun-tered requirements and situations inbroadcasting have been described inthe foregoing. Additional features lessoften encountered include the follow -

32

ing which are implemented by activa-tion of extra buttons when loadingthe descriptors for an event into thecomputer:

a) Lap dissolves-Often, it is desirableto effect a slow transition from onesignal source to another rather than asudden cut. This can be done with bothsound and picture. A special button isprovided for VIDEO DISSOLVE and an-other for AUDIO DISSOLVE. If neither ofthese buttons are pushed when loadingan event, the transition will be by asudden cut. Either or both buttons maybe used to activate the dissolve actionon picture and/or sound.b) Slide Changes-The computer willoutput a change slide pulse to a slideprojector automatically in the followingtwo cases:

1) The slide picture has been on theair and is replaced with another pic-ture source; or2) An on -air slide change is desired(e.g., in a sequence of slides from thesame projector).

If it is desired that a slide remain inposition after it leaves the on -air condi-tion so that it can be aired again later,then a SLIDE CHANGE INHIBIT buttonmust be pressed to stop the computerfrom following its general rule de-scribed in 1) above.c) Audio over-To mix two soundsources (such as in making an an-nouncement over a music source) , theAUDIO OVER button is pressed. Whenthis is done, the original sound sourceis lowered in volume and the addedsource is used at full level. This condi-tion must be released when it is finishedby using the AUDIO -OVER -OFF button.

d) Insert-Sometimes picture materialsuch as addresses or phone numbersmust be superimposed over backgroundmaterial. Another separate INSERT but-ton is operated along with the eventnaming the source of the insert material.This added information causes the com-puter to switch to the special effectsamplifier which mixes the two signals.e) Separate rolls-Occasionally, it is de-sirable to have the computer start arolling device but not switch to it im-mediately. This situation is handled byusing a feature called "Separate Rolls".This feature may be added to anotherevent or loaded separately.f) Delay event-Under some condi-tions, an event which was originallyloaded to occur at a definite clock hourmust be delayed past that time. Whenthis happens, the operator presses theDELAY EVENT button, one for each chan-nel on which delay is needed. If theneed for delay goes away before theoriginally scheduled time, the DELAYEVENT button may be released, and theprogramming returns to normal. If theDELAY EVENT button is still activated atevent time (including pre -rolls), the

Fig. 4-Channel air monitors, preset monitors, and monitor readouts.

computer treats the events as beingloaded without times on them. The op-erator then must start rolling devicesand ENABLE the events to place them onthe air.g) Monitor housing readouts-For eachchannel, the time of day, the time of(or to) the next transition, the sourcesof audio and video on the air, the pro-tection source (if there is one) , and thevideo and audio sources at preset aredisplayed on readouts located above,below, and between the Channel Airand Preset Monitors (see Fig. 4).h) Punched tape loading-Normal load-ing of the computer is by pushing but-tons as described above. The computer,once loaded, can punch a tape of theevents previously loaded and, at a latertime, can be reloaded faster by usiag aspecial sub -routine which reads the in-formation on punched tape into mem-ory just as it was when the tape wasmade.i) Stalls-A part of the 0 -level programis a self -check routine. If this checkindicates anything amiss, the computerwill disconnect itself from the relaysystem, sound a stall alarm, then waitfor the operator to locate the cause ofthe trouble. The operator then mustoperate the switcher manually untilsuch time as the computer is put backin service.

Operating experience

The computer operation has met ex-pectations. Total down time for thepast two years has been less than 1%of total hours. This even includesdown time caused by intentional shut-downs for reasons other than systemfailures. Manpower has been saved inthe switching point operations. Thisis especially true when simultaneousfeeds having different sources must befed to the outgoing channels.

Since better planning of program op-erations must be done to allow timefor loading the computer, there arefewer errors caused by lack of infor-mation. In addition, there are fewerhuman switching errors because eachevent can be tested in advance.

Conclusions

Careful planningwith programming of a computer toaccomplish the repetitive mechanicaltasks associated with a televisionswitching operation, results in a largesaving in equipment and personnel.People are more effectively employedfor the tasks requiring judgement.

Operating mistakes are effectively re-duced by allowing operators moretime to perform the number of ma-nipulations required to produce a con-tinuous chain of program events andby enabling them to check their workahead of actual on -the -air switching.

Computer systems are already in usewhich aid pre -broadcast planning andextend beyond the switching functionto print bills for program producersand sponsor clients. The computeroperation at NBC in Burbank was oneof the pioneers in a field which canonly expand during the 1970's.

Acknowledgments

I he author wishes to acknowledgethe invaluable help in preparation ofthis paper supplied by Mr. John R.Kennedy and Mr. John Frishette, bothof the NBC Technical staff in Bur-bank.

33

In the recording studiokeeping pace with changeJ. M. Woram

Recording technology has had to keep pace with changes in both the art and thescience of sound reproduction. In this paper, the author discusses the historicalchanges in recording techniques and the role of the recording engineer in capturinga musical experience.

rr HERE ARE still many people aroundI who were born before the airplane

-people whose children have reachedthe moon, and whose grandchildrenmay work upon its surface. It requiresno special gift of perception to recog-nize the pace at which technology ac-celerates. Over four centuries afterLeonardo Da Vinci sketched his flyingmachines, the Wright Brothers success-fully sustained theirs in flight. It tookonly another 50 years for man to reachthe moon.

Concepts unknown a few years agowill be obsolete tomorrow. Changenow is taken as a matter of daily rou-tine. Of course, not all technologiesadvance at a space-age pace. Presum-

Reprint RE -16-4-1Final manuscript received June 8, 1970

ably, new developments in the repro-duction of sound will never take theheadlines away from space ventures,despite the continuing public interestin things recorded. But what about thetechnology of the recording studio?What sort of changes have taken placesince the early days of the wax cyl-inder?

As change was applied to the record-ing studio, the wax cylinder gave wayto the 78 -rpm disc, which was in turnsucceeded by the long playing record-first in mono, then in stereo; presently,experimentation is continuing in creat-ing four -channel recordings for use inthe home. Thus, concerning technolog-ical developments in sound recording,about all we can safely predict for thefuture is, "there'll be some changesmade."

Progress in sound reproductionAt the recording studio, the recordingengineer has had to keep pace withthese changes. Years ago, the record-ing process was reasonably straight-forward. A musical group would cometo the studio and gather around amegaphone. Eventually, the mega-phone was replaced by a microphoneand the wax cylinder by the disc. Inthose days, there was little margin forerror. The musicians had to know theirparts thoroughly, and the engineer hadto have the correct balances estab-lished be/ore recording began. Anytechnical or artistic fluffs, and the com-plete performance would have to bescrapped, the disc replaced with afresh one, and a new performancestarted. The engineer had to be incomplete command of the situation atall times-especially during the crucialfinal seconds.

With the introduction of tape, the ten-sion in the studio may have lessenedsomewhat. Now it was possible to sal-vage an almost perfect performanceby replacing the mistakes with retakes.As the first splice was made, a newtechnology-tape editing-was born.The engineer was now able to shiftsome of his responsibilities from "onsession" to "after session".

New skills were required of the engi-neer. While recording, he had to knowwhat work could be deferred, andwhat had to be re -done on session. Itwas still necessary to establish theright balances during the actual record-ing, and if splices were to be madelater, the engineer would have to besure the various takes mated withoutdistracting changes in tempo or level.

With the arrival of stereo, again newconcepts were introduced. Previously,the recorded sound was recorded to,and reproduced from, a point source.Now, a left -to -right dimension waspossible, and instrumental balancecould be distributed spacially. The dif-ficult task of combining all instrumentsonto one track was eased by the addi-tion of a second track. The engineernow had a new working tool. Likemany new tools, it introduced chal-lenges as it eliminated old problems.The record industry went through a"ping-pong" phase until the novelty ofstereo wore off, and recording per-sonnel learned how to exploit thepotentials of the new sound.

34

Multi -track recording

At first, it may seem pointless in pro-gressing beyond two track recording.since the finished product must even-tually be reduced to just two tracksfor home use. In fact, much of theclassical repertoire is still recorded twotrack since this format captures whatis usually a straightforward perform-ance of a work.

However, the Pop Scene is an entirelydifferent matter. Here, the finishedproduct may bear little resemblanceto the "reality" of a concert hall per-formance. Some of the best (and a lotof the worst) records contain soundsthat would be difficult, if not impossi-ble, to produce in real-time perform-ance, and the pop product has assumeda reality all its own. It is not restrictedto whatever can be accomplished dur-ing a single recording session.

Obviously, new tools and skills hadto be developed to meet the new re-quirements. One of the new tools isthe multi -track tape recorder. A typicalmachine is capable of recording inde-pendently on sixteen separate tracks;and there is a very good reason forusing so many tracks. Now, a record-ing may be done in "layers". This isespecially desirable with contemporaryrock groups in which each membermay play more than one part. Afterthe first session is over, additional

parts may be added on the remainingtracks.

Another advantage is that now theso-called sweetening session (the addi-tion of a large string or brass section)may be done later. Often, the basicwork of recording guitars, drums, andbass may take a relatively long time asdifferent guitars, drum patterns, mi-crophones, etc., are tried. It would beexpensive to hire a string and brasssection to sit around in the studiowhile the rock musicians figure outtheir parts. With multi -track, theseplayers do not have to be called inuntil after the basic tracks are com-pleted.

Modern recording techniques

Thus, the role of the engineer has hadto change to meet the new demands.Now, in addition to being concernedwith what is going on in the studio atthe moment, the engineer must alsotake into consideration the previouslyrecorded material and make provi-sions for whatever will be added lateron. To maintain synchronization be-tween all parts, the musicians must beable to hear what was recorded previ-ously, yet this earlier materal shouldnot be picked up again by the micro-phones now in use. Accordingly, ear-phones are used, and the engineerfeeds a blend of old (already recorded)and new material to the musicians

John Woram

Recording EngineeringRCA RecordsNew York, N.Y.studied Music Theory at Columbia University and studied Voice in Italy for two years. He also attendedRCA Institutes where he studied Audio Electronics. Mr. Woram joined RCA Records in 1959 as a QualityControl inspector, became a recording technician in 1965, and a recording engineer in 1968. Mr. Woramserves as a committeeman for the New York section of the Audio Engineering society and writes a monthlycolumn for db magazine. He is an instructor at the Manhatten School of Music and is an advisor to theCitizen Exchange Corps which exchanges films and tape,: with groups in the Soviet Union and the Eastern

European Countries.

' 1 tJ C:11=11=31=11711=1'. CICX31=8=11=7:1=

av

lt=mmmi!IMIIII!!!!!

.... i.e0V44ir

A modem multi -track recording console. Theunit contains some 800 operating controlsand indicator displays. In addition, there arealmost as many patching points available forspecial applications.

while recording the new material ontothe unused tracks of the tape ma-chines.

For this type of recording, new con-soles have been designed and con-structed. They provide, in addition torecording facilities, for the simultane-ous feeding back of the previouslyrecorded material.

Sophisticated monitoring systems havebeen developed to meet the new re-quirements. For example. while anytrack is being recorded, it is "newmaterial", and is monitored from thestudio. As soon as the recording onthat track is completed, it becomes"old material" and must now be moni-tored from the tape machines, andmicrophones assigned to one trackmust be switchable to any of theother tracks as the need arises.

Conclusion

We have come a long way from themegaphone and the wax cylinder, andthe recording engineer has had tokeep pace with the continuing changein equipment and recording technique.Recording has always been a precari-ous balance between art and science,and there are few rule books. Depend-ing on the circumstances, the engineermay be called upon to make musical orelectronic adjustments. As our record-ing technology advances, newer toolsare placed at his disposal, allowingmore and more flexibility in capturingand storing a musical experience. Nodoubt, the future will require newskills, but no matter what changes aremade, listeners can look forward tobetter and better sound, probably farbeyond anything Edison had in mindwhen he first recorded "Mary Had aLittle Lamb" nearly 100 years ago.

35

New York recording studiosJ. E. Volkmann A. Stevens

The acoustical environment of the recording studio and its associated monitoringcontrol room has been a most important link in the sound recording and reproductionchain from microphone -to -ear. It has gone through several cycles of live -to -dead andback again over recent decades. The present trend in rock and pops music continuestoward a "dead -dead". echoless. or tree -field environment; and if the pendulumfollows its regular course, it will swing to a "live -live" requirement which is occa-sionally heard in pops sound effects today. The newly designed studios being used byRCA Records in New York can accomodate several changes in the thrust of recordedmusic. since the reverberation can be changed as much as 2.5:1.

Fig. 1-The 44th Street entrance to the RCAStudio complex. This photograph was takenat night when many of the recording ses-sions occur.

John E. VolkmannRCA LaboratoriesPrinceton, N. J.received the BS in 1927 and the MS in 1928, andthe Professional Degree in Engineering Physics in1940 from the University of Illinois. Since then hehas worked continuously with RCA in the field ofacoustics, specializing in the development andapplication of large-scale auditorium loudspeakersand stereophonic sound systems, as well as con-sultant on architectural, electronic, and acousticproblems. He has contributed to the solution ofinnumerable projects including: stereo sound sys-tems for Radio City Music Hall, Hollywood Bowl.recording acoustics for Walt Disney's Fantasia.custom loudspeakers for New York World's Fairs of1939 and 1964-65. and Jones Beach Marine Sta-dium. After joining the Technical Staff of RCALaboratories in 1960. he served as consultant onthe acoustic design of all of RCA's new recording

Alan Stevens, Mgr.Facilities and Operations EngineeringRCA Records1133 Avenue of the AmericasNew York, N. Y.received the Bachelors and Masters degrees fromTemple University and attended Drexel Institute ofTechnology. Mr. Stevens initially joined govern-ment service in Civil Engineering, and later trans-ferred as an aeronautical engineer into researchwhere he was chief engineer for design and con-struction of turbine test station and served astechnical adviser to architects and engineers ondesign requirements for the Turbine Laboratory.In 1955, he joined a consulting engineering firmand was assigned as project manager covering

studios including RCA Italiana's 364.000 cu. ft.Studio A. He likewise was consultant on the RCA''pops" studios in Hollywood, Nashville, Chicago,Montreal, and the new RCA Variable AcousticStudios described in this paper. Now officially re-tired, he has continued in the field of acousticconsulting for RCA as well as for Disney World inFlorida and the John F. Kennedy Center, Wash-ington. D.C. In 1962 he received the RCA Achieve-ment Award for "Advances in the Development ofArchitectural Acoustics"; and, in 1967, the JohnH. Potts Memorial Award from the Audio Engineer-ing Society for "elegant application of acousticprinciples in the development of large-scale loud-speakers and sound systems." Mr. Volkmann is a

Charter Member and Fellow of the Acoustical So-ciety of America, and a Fellow of both the Societyof Motion Picture and Television Engineers and theAudio Engineering Society. He is a registered Pro-fessional Engineer in New York State.

building expansion program for RCA. Mr. Stevensjoined RCA Records in 1957 as general plant engi-neer responsible for Facilities and Plant Engineer-ing He was assigned to prepare an engineeringstudy of recording facilities to update design ofrecording studios and related auxiliaries. He wasjointly responsible for the design of the world'slargest recording studio for RCA, Italy, and wasalso responsible for the design and construction ofnew recording facilities in Chicago, L. A., andNashville and, most recently, in New York, as wellas new studio facilities for Argentina. Canada.Mexico and Spain. In his present position, Mr.Stevens is responsible for plant engineering facil-ities. record engineering, and international manu-facturing and engineering services.

36

T N 1969, RCA Records in New YorkCity relocated to a new studio com-

plex at 1133 Avenue of the Americas(Fig. 1); the complex consists of fourlarge studios and two small studioswith their respective control rooms,nine tape -mastering rooms, seven lac-quer -cutting rooms, associated editingrooms, tape transfer rooms, engineer-ing shops, and other necessary oper-ating facilities. Two overdub studioswith their control rooms were addedto meet the high demand of rerecord-ing, thus relieving the major recordingstudios for commercial and customrecordings.

The reasons for relocating were:1) To improve the acoustic environ-mental conditions since the old stu-

Reprint RE -16-4-16Final manuscript received October 12. 1970.

dios at E. 24th Street were obsolete,too small, and non-competitive;2) To consolidate the RCA Recordshome office into one location insteadof four separate buildings;3) To be closer to music publishers,thus increasing RCA's opportunitiesfor hit products.

Intricate specifications covering thebasic acoustic requirements of the newstudios were developed from extensiveacoustic studies and from experiencegained over several years in the newRCA studios at Hollywood, Nashville,Chicago, Montreal, and Rome. Thesespecifications detailed the size, shape,materials, optimum reverberationtimes, reflection and sound absorptioncoefficients, transmission loss, vibra-tion isolation, and other acoustical cri-teria; they were reviewed at severalstages during the studies with various

members of the engineering, operating,and producing staffs.

Variable acoustics-often the design-ers dream-had in the past been con-sidered an unnecessary luxury, but tocapture the wide range of sounds cur-rently in vogue-ranging from HardRock and Rhythm and Blues to Coun-try and Western and Classical-vari-able acoustics became a real economicnecessity and a key requirement of thenew studios.

Probably the most striking features ofthe studio complex are the fantasticallychangeable dimensions of the twolarge studios-A and B. Movablepanels on walls and ceiling providevariable reverberation times adjustableover a range of approximately 2.5times, from 0.8 to 1.8 seconds for Stu -

2 4-

2 2

2 0

6

.4

2-

020

CEILING -UP

100 1000 10000FREQUENCY ( Hz 1

Fig. 2-Preliminary reverberation characteristics for the maximum andminimum reverberation times in Studio A (taken before final adjust-ment of the ceiling absorption).

Fig. 3-The platform end of Studio A, showing the convex wood panelsof the stage ceiling and walls in a "flared" position to form an orches-tra or choir shell. Note that the ceiling in the studio proper is raisedto full height, approximately 10 ft. above the side -wall horizontal con-vex wood panelling. tinder the wood panelling is the control roomwindow which is convex to match the wall treatment contour.

Fig. 4-Closeup view of the platform shell with wood panels in "flaredout" position. Fig. 5-Convex panels in "flat" position.

37

1111111141111111111111.111111111117._

4, Ito

riirr-* 44*

-

10711101I I

Fig. 6-Looking toward the wall opposite the platform in Studio Ashowing the ceiling sections raised to full height. Each of the threemain ceiling sections has six fixtures distributed over the middle orabsorptive area (0.8 coefficient) and a perimeter consisting of reflec-tive convex wood panelling 4 ft. wide (0.2 coefficient). This illustrationalso gives a better view of the 8 -ft -high horizontal convex plywoodpanelling covering the middle section of the walls. This horizontalpanelling is hinged at the lower edge and may be lowered in individ-ual 8 -ft -wide sections by means of manually operated winches.

Fig. 7-The three types of adjustable acoustical elements in the mainportion of Studio A: the lower hinged vertical wainscot panels forseparating the direct sound sources and for controlling the local en-vironment around them; the middle hinged horizontal wall panels forcontrolling the first or early reflections; and the movable ceiling sec-tions for controlling the later diffuse reverberations.

dio A and 0.56 to 1.4 seconds forStudio B. The provisions for variableacoustics in both studios extends notonly to the adjustability of reverbera-tion time but to the control of the firstor early reflections by adjusting thewainscot and lower wall panels thatform the local acoustic environmentaround the musicians and microphonepickup areas. However, in the future,

variable acoustics offering a 5:1 oreven a 10:1 change in reverberationtime may be required. Probably, suchreverberation enhancement can be

achieved only through the use of activeelectronic or synthetic room acoustics.

The three large studios-A, B, and C-are housed in a separate thirteen -story structure, mechanically isolated

from the main office building, butlinked communication -wise at the 4th,7th, and 10th floors. Extreme care wastaken in the construction of studiosand its related facilities to ensure thatno sound is transmitted from one stu-dio to another and that sound gen-erated by the air-conditioning systemand electrical distribution does not in-terfere with the recordings. A noise

Fig. 10-Sections of the Studio A ceiling at three intermediate heights.

_41

POW -

Fig. 11-One of the many combinations of adjustment possible with thethree types of adjustable acoustical elements in the main portion ofStudio A. These include the ceiling stepped, the middle wall panelsstaggered, and the wainscot panels opened at random.

38

Fig. 8-Studio A ceiling at maximum height. Fig. 9-Studio A ce ling at min mum height.

criterion of not greater than NC 20was specified for the interior of allstudios, control rooms, tape -masteringrooms, and reverberation chambers.[An NC 20 rating corresponds ap-proximately to the equal loudness con-tour of the ear at 20 dB above thethreshold of hearing, or approximately30 dBa on a standard ASA sound levelmeter.]

Studio A

The variable acoustic design featuresof the new Studio A-the largest in thecomplex-are shown in Figs. 2 through11. The design was chosen to fit theall-purpose requirements of this stu-

dio; it can handle the livelier rever-beration requirements of classicalsounds as well as the "dead" echolessrequirements of pop sounds.

The structural shell of Studio A is 100ft x 60 ft x 34 ft while the interiordimensions are 95 ft x 56 ft x 29 ft.The ceiling consists of four huge mov-able sections or panels, each 24 ft x56 ft, that individually can be loweredor raised approximately 10 ft, therebyvarying the reverberation time bychanging the volume of the studioas well as by changing the sound ab-sorption. In other words, the greatflexibility offered by the adjustable ab-sorption, the adjustable shape, and the

adjustable volume provisions permitpractically complete control of the ini-tial direct, the early reflected, andthe later reverberant components thatmake up the complex sound energywaves picked up by the microphones.

Below the horizontal panelling in thewainscot area are the 8 ft x 8 ft con-vex wood panels that are each hingedas a door. The backside of these wain-scot panels are treated with absorptive(0.8 coefficient) glass cloth -faced fiber-glass panels of 2 lb/cu ft density andare convexly contoured, to blend withthe front side appearance. When thewainscot panels are open, the absorp-tive side is exposed; when they are

2.4

22

2.0

0oW e

4

1.2

1 o

.e

6

4

2

0

LL -CLOSED

CEILING -OPEN

WAINSCOT -OPEN

M.L -OPEN

20 100 IWO 10000FREQUENCY (

Fig. 12-Reverberation characteristics for the maximum and minimum rever-beration times in Studio B.

Fig. 13-View of Studio B showing the three types ofadjustable acoustical elements used: the lower hingedverticle wainscot panels, similar to panels used inStudio A for the purpose of separating the direct soundsources; the middle hinged, horizontal wall panels,also similar to panels used in Studio A for controllingthe first or early reflections; and the uppermost hingedwall panels at the ceiling junctures for controlling thelate diffuse reverberations. Also shown is the sus-pended ceiling of glass -cloth -faced fiberglass panels(absorption coefficient is 0.8). 39

Fig. 14-General view of the studio with the uppermost hinged ceilingcorner panels lowered, completely exposing the absorptive backsideof the panels.

closed the reflective side is exposed.In addition to controlling reverbera-tion, these planes function acousticallyas "gobos" to control the local acousticenvironment.

Another feature of interest is that pro-visions also have been incorporated inthe basic studio acoustic design for theaddition of active reverberation en-hancement.

Thus studio A with the other studiosin the complex provides the size andflexibility to meet any type of record-ing from the classical (Opera) to Hard -rock (Psychedelic) . The changes inthe acoustic treatment can be madewithin minutes.

Studio B

Fig. 15-Closeup view of one of the ceiling corners.

The variable acoustic design featuresof Studio B are shown in Figs. 12

through 19. This studio is the secondlargest in the complex and, like StudioA, is of the general-purpose type. Sinceit is smaller and has a shorter rever-beration time than Studio A, it will beused more frequently for semi -classicaland pop recordings. The structuralshell of Studio B is 75 ft x 50 ft x 34ft and has interior dimensions of 72 ftx 47 ft x 27 ft.

Studio C

Studio C has a structural shell of 75ft x 50 ft x 30 ft, and an interior of72 ft x 47 ft x 24 ft. It is similar in

size to the large RCA studios that havebeen so successful in Hollywood, Nash-ville, Chicago, and Montreal. Althoughthe arrangement of convex plywoodpanels differs from the earlier studiodesign, the proportion of reflective

panels versus absorptive panels andthe reverberation time of 0.5 secondsremain the same. Figures 20, 21, and22 show the design features of StudioC. Note that the entire ceiling is ab-sorptive (0.8 coefficient) and that twothirds of the wall area is absorptiveand one third reflective (convex ply-wood) . Note also that the convexpanels are disposed alternately in thevertical and in the horizontal to give

Fig. 18-A setup for recording in Studio B. Fig. 19-Recording console in the studio B control room.

40

Fig. 16-Closeup of two wainscot panels partially openedalong one wall.

Fig. 17-Closeup of two wainscot panels opened in onecorner.

a more diffuse and optimum reflectionenvironment.

Studio D

Studio D has a structural shell of 40 ftx 27 ft x 22 ft and an interior of 39ft x 24 ft x 15 ft (see Fig. 23) . Notethat the general configuration and lo-cation of intermediate convex plywoodwall panelling and ceiling corner pan-elling is similar to that in Studio B.This studio is intended not only forrock and pop recording sessions but forexperimental studies and unexploredareas in reverberation enhancement,multi -channel stereo, and free field re-cordings. The reverberation time forStudio D is approximately 0.35 seconds.

Studio E

Studio E is a small overdub -type ofcontemporary studio used for voiceand overdub recording; see Fig. 24.

Control and tape mastering rooms

It is most important that the controlrooms have

the same acoustic treatment and soundenvironment. This assures that the pro-ducer will have the same listeningconditions and quality in the tape -mastering room as those producedduring the original recording in theControl Room.

Fig. 25 shows the interior outline of atypical wall section for all of the con-

trol rooms and tape mastering rooms.Every effort has been made to makethe acoustics of these rooms similarwith respect to uniform acoustic re-sponse, reverberation characteristics,flat absorption characteristics, and res-onance -free characteristics. The rever-beration has been set at 0.25 second.For uniform control of the distributioncharacteristics of the direct soundenergy radiation, the loudspeakers inthe control room and tape -masteringrooms are set on an arc of 8 ft radiuswith center located at the engineerslistening position.

Conclusions

Provisions in the new studios for the

Fig. 20-General view looking toward a corner adjacent tothe control room in Studio C.

Fig. 21-Closeup view of a recording setup in Studio C withconvex panels in background.

41

Fig. 22-Studio C Control Room with engineer at recording console. Fig. 23-Studio D looking toward the control room.

separation and control of the threebasic room acoustic energy compo-nents: initial direct, early delay, andlater decay components, we feel, is adefinite step toward the goal of goodacoustics in sound recording-true 3dreproduction on multi -channel stereo -acoustic systems. Hopefully, the newRCA studio complex with its variableacoustical environment and its "tri-wave-energy" concept in studio acous-tic design will serve not only to extendthe scope of the pop and rock artist butalso offer the classical musician fresh

opportunities for achieving greaterspatial or room acoustic realism andauditory or directional perspective inthe new multi -channel recording of tra-ditional and modern compositions.

Acknowledgment

The authors wish to acknowledge thehelp and encouragement extendedthem in the early stages of this tremen-dous project by all of their associatesand management. We wish to expressparticular thanks to Messrs. HowardEitelbach and John Pfeiffer for their

comments on basic requirements dur-ing the initial planning stages; to FredWerfel and Alan Ballantine on follow-up and assistance during the construc-tion and shakedown period; to RexIsom, R. C. Moyer, Robert Breed, andA. J. May on Monitoring LoudspeakerSystems and console design; and toMr. W. H. Dearborn for his continu-ous support and executive guidanceduring the project. Also, gratefulacknowledgment is made to the Direc-tors at the RCA Laboratories for use ofthe acoustical measuring facilities.

Fig. 24-Studio E-a typical overdub studio.

- T-2' - 3'

2'

2'

9' 10'_f_

3'

LEGEND

O STRUCTURAL SHELL/63 dB TL

O ACOUSTIC CEILING BOARD/.08 COEF

CI CONVEX PLYWOOD 2 /60. ARC

5 BACKSIDE 2" FO , 2 LB/ CU. FT.

O ACOUSTIC TILE, 12"a 24"/0 B COEF

® ACOUSTIC TILE, 24"1 48°/0.8 COEF

O WAINSCOT/0.65 COEF 8 CHAIR

PARQUET WOOD OR RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

Fig. 25-Inter.or outline of the wall sections for control rooms and tape mas-tering rooms.

42

John F. Pfeiffer, Executive ProducerClassical LabelsRCA RecordsNew York, New Yorkobtained his formal musical education at BethanyCollege, Lindsborg, Kansas, and the University ofArizona in Tuscon. Given preliminary technicaltraining in the U.S. Navy from 1941 to 1945, hereturned to the University of Arizona and ob-tained the B.S. in Electrical Engineering in 1949.During 1955-1957 he took graduate work in elec-trical engineering at Columbia University, NewYork City. Mr. Pfeiffer joined RCA in July, 1949,as an engineer in Camden and New York. Joiningthe Artists and Repertoire Department of RCARecords in 1950, he has been producing RedSeal records up to the present time. Combininghis technical and musical training, he acted asAudio Administrator for Red Seal Recordings be-tween 1962 and 1967. Mr. Pfeiffer has producedthe recordings of such artists as Jascha Heifetz,Vladimir Horowitz, Wanda Landowska, ArturoToscanini, Leopold Stokowski, the Philadelphia,Boston, and Chicago symphony orchestras, andnumerous other instrumentalists, vocalists, andmusical groups. He has published articles on

musicians, music, electronic music, and othertechnical -musical subjects .n various recordingindustry magazines, the New York Times andRCA's Electronic Age. Mr. Pfeiffer is a composerof electronic music with a record released underthe Victrola label of Nine Images, a televisionballet, a film score, and a Master's Thesis ballet.He is a member of IEEE, the Acoustical Societyof America, Audio Engineering Society, MARAS,ASCAP, and various honorary engineering andmusical fraternities.

The case for four channelsJ. Pfeiffer

The home musical event ranges from bathroom baritone to Junior's piano lessons toloudspeaker energy from packa3ed products para:.qing under claims of "realistic"music reproduction. Realism in the former is all too evident. while in the latter it hasbeen sadly absent. Sounding real is not always souiding right, but if it sounds right,it must sound real. The technolcgy and subjective judgment leading to loudspeakermusic have increasingly suggested the right sound not only through refinements inhardware and techniques. but by adding sound irtormation which strengthens thesubjective mpression. Examining these additives Leads to the rationale of creatingan appropriate atmosphere of sound in which the home listener and his musicalchoice car be realistically emeedded. The case for projecting four channels ofcoherent sound possessing the essential sonic clues experienced in the live event isbuilt on this rationale. Recording criteria have been tested and subjective benefitsobserved. -he critical press has favorably received the few commercial examples onfour -channel open -reel tape. But if the breeze is to become an industry tornado, itdepends on the engineers' contibution to system quality. convenience, and pricetag-and on the judgments of the author's side of the fence in planting the sound charac-teristics to bloom subjectively ir to real musical reproduction in the home.

9,1-1E LATEST WIND stirring the re -I cording industry's resources, the

engineer's resourcefulness, and themusic lover's dollar is a kind ofthree-D stereophony variously taggedQuadrasonic, Tetraphonic, Surround -Sound, Wrap-Around-plainly an ef-fect in search of a name. But a valid,psycho -acoustical effect neverthelessand a solid, logical evolution of fidel-ity in phonographic descriptions ofsonic events.

The quest for sonic realism

As the basis for all better mousetraps,the habits or appetites of the mousedictate the lure, while mechanisticsophistication provides a new or bet-ter means to the end. Musically, ourmouse is the human auditory psyche,and its appetite for natural sonic satis-faction has made its human host suscep-tible to the diverse claims of "realism,"starting with the Edison cylinderand continuing relentlessly to thepresent. The technical community hasvariously but consistently recognizedthe appeal of linearity in transducinga live sonic event into the living room,as evidenced by the whopping mis-nomer of the industry's popular title,"high fidelity." Stereo unleashed re -energized claims of "truer truth" inreproducing a real live musical eventin the home.

Reprint RE -16-4-6Final manuscript received July 13, 1970.

But exaggerated claims aside, industryefforts have refined the production ofsound in the listener's environment,using the auditorium (concert hall.opera house, Broadway theater, nightclub, etc.) as the reference point. Thefacsimile has approached realism par-tially by shoring up the linearity ofthe technical components in the trans-mission line between the performanceand the home listener. But it seemscloser to the real thing mostly becausetechnology has added informationwhich more nearly duplicates the livefield of stimulus. It has recognizedthat even though there is a remarkabledifference between a live musical ex-perience and one possible to obtain inthe home, the same auditory mecha-nism must be dealt with and the lis-tener's perception must be the basisfor the illusion of a live event. Theconsumer of recorded products wantsnot only the music of his choice, hewants a vivid illusion of the eventhappening in an optimum live sur-rounding. plus the intimacy whichreveals the detail, separation, theclarity and balance which is virtuallyimpossible in the live encounter. Andmore and more, he is getting it all.

The refinement of recording and play-back components, the development ofimaginative recording techniques andthe vast improvement of disc and tapeprocessing increased consumer satis-faction of monophonic reproduction.

43

LAUDITORIUMPLAN VIEW

L = LISTENER LOCATION

S = SOUND SOURCE

D = DIRECT SOUNDCOMPONENT

E = EARLY REFLECTIONSOUND COMPONENT

R = REVERBERANTSOUND COMPONENT

Fig. 1-Auditorium listening conditions. Each vector rep-resents a multiplicity of sound -wave vectors (for each ofthe three sound components) which create the solid soundfield within the enclosed space.

SPEAKER

D,E AND R

Fig. 2-Monophonic home listening.All sound components emerge fromsame direction creating totally un-realistic sound experience. Acous-tics of the room are a stronginfluence on total sonic impression.

Fig. 3-Standard stereo home lis-tening. Interactions of two channelscan produce virtual or phantomsources of direct, early reflection,and reverberant components, butsources are limited in direction tospace between speakers.

But when all this progress was appliedto two discrete, coordinated channels,the realism quotient increased geo-metrically. And consumer responsequickly turned almost exclusively tostereo.

Stereo is a mighty step toward realism,because it furnishes more sonic infor-mation to help the listener imagine

is experiencing a completesonic event. This follows from thebasics of auditory perception. Thebrain compares information fed to itby two independent sources (the ears)and arrives at some amazing conclu-sions about the sound, its source, andits environment; (it has other sensoryand psychological clues which influ-ence these conclusions, but the pri-mary data is aural) . The directionfrom which a sound is coming can beperceived from interaural phase andintensity differences, and therefore thespatial distribution of the componentsounds in a complex is recognized.The volume magnitude of a normalenclosure which an observer occupiescan be appreciated by the multiplicityof intensity, phase, and frequencyspectrum differences between the sig-nals arriving at the two ears from thedirect and reflected sounds. His prox-imity to the origin of the sound (in-timacy or, in recording parlance,"presence") and his location relativeto a wall or a large obstacle can alsobe judged (Fig. 1) . The quality, bal-ance, dynamic contrast, and otherfeatures of perceived musical soundare vitally influenced by enclosurecharacteristics and the auditor's loca-

tion in it, and they are evaluated bythe brain's two -signal comparison.And he has the remarkable ability con-ditionally to reject unwanted soundsin a complex fabric of sonic activity infavor of some thread of it.

All of this happens normally, uncon-sciously, and vitally in naturally en-countered musical situations; and eachfeature of it has become integral tothe judgment that the listener is ob-serving such an event.

Limitations of mono reproduction

Monophonic reproduction of music,although capable of giving the im-pression of a recognizable musicalperformance, limits realism to the per-ceptual space of the listening room.Its acoustic properties contributestrongly to the total stimulus sinceauditory perception is fed only in -phase and equal intensity informationfrom the single speaker, and all otherconcomitant information is reflectedfrom the surfaces of the listeningroom. Any similarity one finds be-tween monophonic reproduction ofmusic and the sound of a live event isa tribute to his imagination, recollec-tion, and ability to reject sonic infor-mation which conflicts with hismusical enjoyment (see Fig. 2) .

Limitations of standard stereoreproduction

Standard stereophonic reproductioncan enhance the illusion of observinga live event by projecting recordedphase and intensity differences similar

to those one would experience underthose conditions. But even though thecomplete sonic description of the eventcan be recorded, it is reproduced to thehome listener in a kind of two-dimen-sional fashion (Fig. 3). Perception ofthe spatial distribution of originalsound sources is limited by the lateralseparation of the two speakers; instru-mental and vocal textures sound shal-low because they cannot be normallyseparated from their reflections. Theacoustical contribution of the audi-torium appears highly distorted sinceall the reflections and the reverbera-tion envelope emerge from the samedirection as the direct sound: the en-tire sonic body is compressed into asingle plane. In addition, if the listenermoves from the single ideal observa-tion position, the balance, spatialdistribution and sound quality canchange radically. Even head motionscan put wings on presumably fixedsound sources. And the acousticalproperties of the listening room stillcolor and condense directional sounds.This all contradicts a realistic sonicexperience. While the step from monoto stereo moved the listener from anisolation booth with one sonic win-dow to one with an open wall, he isstill isolated perceptually, and he'svividly aware of it.

Theoretically perfect reproductionwould be possible by locating twoideal microphones one head's widthapart at a desirable location in theauditorium, recording the signals withperfect linearity and separation andreproducing them through perfect

44

headphones-a kind of radical stretch-ing of the pinna. But our head -phonedlistener would shortly find himselfconscious of being strapped in thatauditorium seat and his head lockedin the deadly vise of the rigidly un-moving microphones. And anothercontribution to the perception of alive event steps forward-a kind ofauditory focusing obtained throughlateral and vertical head motions. Itcollects familiarly informative phaseand intensity data. Frequent use ofthis motion in a real situationstrengthens, confirms, clarifies, reas-sures in reaching conclusions aboutsonic events-a kind of redundancy inthe communicative link.

Sonic effects and listenerperception

All this suggests that for convincingrealism a field of sound should be pro-vided in a listening room which pos-sesses the essential sonic clues onegets on the scene of a viable soundevent. To determine what they are,the total sound can be divided intothe basic energy components whichinform an observer in any enclosure:1) the direct sound from the source;2) the first or early reflections, and 3)the reverberation envelope which fol-lows; see Fig. 1.1 Their balance andcharacter change with location in anauditorium, but their arrival time, dur-ation, and frequency parameters deter-mine the sonic effects the listenerperceives. His field of stimulus is ap-pealing if the proportion of these com-ponents is pertinent to the sonicexperience he wants or expects. Gener-ally, he wants the direct sound toemerge constantly from the zone of in-terest with the degree of clarity, defini-tion, and balance to allow him todistinguish musical elements withoutexcluding any contribution; he wantsa sense of intimacy with the musicalsource which is obtained if the timedifference between the arrival of thedirect sound and its first major reflec-tion is small (considered to be lessthan 20 milliseconds) ; and he wantsappropriate reverberation arrivingfrom every direction to give a sense ofmagnitude-fullness-to the sound,blend discrete elements of it, enhancedynamic contrast, and avoid a senseof abruptness.

And now consider the tricks playedon our home listener's sonic psyche instandard stereo reproduction to makehim believe that the space betweenhis two speakers contains a continuityof sound. His sensory apparatus tellshim this because the critical compo-nents of sound which he would receivein an auditorium are recorded andblended with critical judgments beingmade under essentially home listen-ing conditions. That is, a translationfrom auditorium to living room listen-ing is made by capturing phase andintensity information of the directsound, the first reflections and thereverberant envelope, and mixing thesignals to create the desired home lis-tening effect.

Recording in a normal auditorium, theeffect is first judged in the recordingmonitor room by engineer and pro-ducer. After editing for the desiredperformance, the transfer from themultiple track original to the two -channel master tape crystallizes theeffect through judgments made undersmall room listening. Balance changesbetween the sound components arepossible at this point-depending onhow exclusively they were recorded-because each microphone collecteddifferent proportions of all the compo-nents. The techniques required toproduce a desired effect are widelydifferent for the variety of recordingenvironments and types of music en-countered. In general, only the directcomponent is recorded under commer-cial studio conditions, and environ-mental contribution is synthesized atthe mix -down stage by artificial rever-berators and delay loops. But the threenormal elements of the total sound arealways present in some proportion toproduce the desired contact with real-ism in home listening. As it has beenpointed out, however, it's a realismdefeated by the single plane of theperceived sound.

Sonic expansion through four -channel reproduction

But if two channels can create a con-vincing plane of sound, consider fourchannels of different stereophonic con-tent recorded from the same perform-ance and fed to diametrically oppositespeakers around the perimeter of alistening area. It follows from stereoanalysis that each possible combina-

tion of two speakers can produce anapparent plane of sound. And everypoint within each plane will have anelement of it in every other plane.Because of our perceptual mechanism,all the elements of an apparent soundwithin each plane will contribute toour final spatial localization of it, andthere can be an infinity of such virtualor perceptual points of sound. Wewill, therefore, experience a solid fieldof sound distributed according to thelocation and relative balance of themicrophones used in recording it. Ifthe recording contains a stereophonicbalance of the basic sound componentsproperly proportioned in their timerelationship and intensities based onthis four -channel small room listening,the reproduced field will have thecharacteristics of the original. Anacoustic environment different fromthat of the listening room will thusbe created (Fig. 4) .

If the evidence of our ears is any crite-rion-and it is really the only one-four channels carrying these signalsare necessary and sufficient to repro-duce a foreign sonic ambience in alistening room. The new ambience canmask the influence of many of theacoustic properties of the listeningroom. One can move about the fieldand experience sound changes hewould expect in a live situation. Heno longer feels pinned to one ideallistening location and head motions

Fig. 4-Four-channel home listen-ing. Speakers arranged left -front(LF), right -front (RF), left -rear (LR)and right -rear (RR), carrying phaseand amplitude information of thethree sound components recordedfrom the auditorium. Stereo chan-nels LF and RF produce virtualsound source S: RF and RR providevirtual source of early reflection E;RR and LR produce virtual reverber-ant sound R. All vectors correspondin direction and amplitude to thoseof Fig. 1. The four channel repro-duction of sound can, therefore,duplicate auditorium listening con-di:ions.

45

DIRECT SOUNDPICKUP

}EARLYREFLECTIONPICKUP

REVERBERANTPICKUP

a) Microphones placed to collect each of the three soundcomponents with separate prominence.

Fig. 5-Recording for four -channel reproduction.

tend to produce appropriate focusingand localizing effects.

For an image of customary listeningexperiences, the direct sound is re-corded to emerge prominently fromthe front of the listening area with thesound of the sources stereophonicallybalanced for clarity, definition, andappropriate spatial distribution. Re-flection and reverberant signals aredisposed throughout all four channelsin appropriate phase and intensity tofurnish the environmental information.Typically, this is done by locatingmicrophones to capture stereophonicinformation in three general zonesof the recording environment: 1) closeto and oriented toward the soundsource, 2) at an appropriate distancefrom the source and oriented toward alarge, principal reflecting area, and 3)at a greater distance with omni-direc-tional orientation where reverberantsound predominates (Fig. 5) .

Greater creative flexibility for therecordist

Choosing proper microphone locationsand the level balance between themcan move the listener into a spatialsetting which complements the sonicmessage being recorded. Although thisis largely a matter of subjective judg-ment, classical music can generally bedivided into 1) music composed forperformance in small auditoriums(chamber music and most orchestralmusic preceding the Romantic period-about 1850) , 2) that written forlarge hall performance (includingmost Romantic and modern music-opera, oratorio, religious music) , and

MICROPHONELINES

MIXINGCONSOLE

b) Effectiveness of microphone placement andbalance of signals is judged under small -roomListening conditions.

3) that written for large or small hallsbut benefiting from a special acousticalcondition. Popular music is associatedwith theater, night club, large audito-rium and, currently, with amplifiedinstrumental and vocal sounds con-verging on cramped areas at violentlevels from several directions. Four -channel recordings of these formsmade in their ideal settings can, ofcourse, show the proper sonic dimen-sions. But by recognizing the percep-tual role each basic component plays,the recordist can, within limits, toolup a single auditorium to produce awide variety of spatial properties.

Synthesis of realistic effects throughtime delay, artificial reverberation,and a versatile mixing console cancreate the desired ambience for delib-erately dry recording studios and com-pensate for unsympathetic recordingenvironments. These same tools cangenerate a plausible and even spec-tacular result from recordings madeoriginally for standard stereo. Butcapturing all the essential informationfrom the natural environment is thebest source of convincing realism inhome listening.

As might be expected, such a systemalso affords the creative talent of re-cording engineer or producer (and,ultimately, composer, arranger, andperformer) a flexible system to pro-duce new home listening experienceswith sonic patterns totally differentfrom any live event. By isolating thedirect sound of instruments or voiceson individual tracks while reservingfour for environment signals, or syn-thesizing them, the mix -down (to four

master tracks) can place featuredmusical elements at any point in thesound field or move them in the courseof the selection in any desired way.Instruments can be disposed aroundthe listener in any manner, movedabout the field, changed in perspective-an unlimited variety of new effectsare at the disposal of creative judg-ment. But the ability to transport thelistener into musically sympatheticspace which enhances the quality ofinstrumental and vocal sounds is theprimary benefit of the system.

Listening room acoustics and playbacksystem efficiency will possibly modifythe frequency and transient responseof the original recording, but criticaltime parameters and the directionalbalances will be largely unaffected.The listener may not be able to iden-tify the sound of a particular audito-rium, but he will certainly know thathis listening room no longer confineshis perceptual space, and that the newacoustic setting finally puts the homemusical event into the proper per-spective.

Present and future of the four -channel mediumEven though four -channel magnetictape offers the most accessible mediumfor these recordings, multiplexing sys-tems are being explored to convertthe existing two -channel disc, tape,and FM broadcast systems to dispensefour discrete channels of information.On a commercial level, the inevitablequestion arises concerning the dollarsign ahead of an improved product-is the consumer going to feel he's get-ting his money's worth? To those who

46

have heard good examples of this sys-tem, there is no doubt that the im-provement over standard stereo is atleast as great as stereo over mono.With that and our tendency to investin improvements of our sensory world,plus the history of the shift from monoto stereo in less than a decade, theanswer would seem quite simplypositive. The proviso is that the costdifference between two and four chan-nels is commensurate with the jumpfrom one to two. Even though stereowas not universally adopted until thedisc system was perfected, the tapestory today has a radically differentprofile from the mid -50's when stereowas first introduced commercially ontape. The eight -track cartridge andfour -track cassette have assumedprominent roles. Open -reel tape sys-tems have improved quality at lowerspeed and cost. Modifying all the tapesystems to accept current stereo andnew four -channel pre-recorded tapesis not a major mechanical or electricalproblem. A compatible multiplex sys-tem of high quality for disc, tape, andbroadcast is much more complex, andthe "when" and "how much" are goodquestions. In any event, technicalsophistication can appease the appe-tite with an acceptable pricetag.

The specs are simply: maximum chan-nel separation with maximum butequal channel quality. It has been sug-gested that the channels projectingsignals from the rear (or normallyback -oriented) speakers can be re-

duced in quality because of the pre-dominance of frequency -and transient -limited reflective components. But allfour channels are confronted withcreating a complex field of sound, eachcarrying all three sound componentsin varying proportions. As in everyphonographic experience, perceivedfidelity increases with channel quality.

Conclusion

Realism draws on the perception ofthe entire person's senses as well ashis psychological state, but a forcefulemphasis on the primary objective ofthe realistic experience can create akind of sensory substitution. For in-stance, the current emphasis on pres-ence, spatial distribution, and othersonic details in a musical recordingcan substitute conditionally for thelack of visual and psychological clues

associated with the real situation.With four -channel environmental re-cording, critical sonic aspects of thereal experience are present along withthe information of current recordings,and other sensory experiences con-nected with the live event are rele-gated to a position of even less

importance.

The development of this sound stimu-lus, which might briefly be describedas a kind of sonic hologram, is con-sistent with the efforts of today's tech-nology to move a discriminating publicto a sensory environment of its ownchoice. It is an experience of wonderand aesthetic rewards to hear musicof your choice when and where youwish and to have sound which movesthe walls of your listening room to thedimensions of Carnegie Hall, a Broad-way theater, La Scala Opera House,Bolshoi Theater, or the Electric Circus-even to domains of imagination.

BibliographyDirectional PerceptionDeatherage, B. H.. and Hirsh, I. 1., f. Acoust.

Soc. Am., Vol. 31 (1959) pp. 486-492.Handbook of Experimental Psychology, Ed.

Stevens. S. S., "Basic correlates of auditorystimulus" (Wiley, N.Y., 1951) pp. 985-1039.

Taylor. C. A.. The Physics of Music Sounds(American Elsevier Publ. Co., N.Y. 1965).

Wallach, H.. Newman, E. B., and Rosenzweig,M. R., "The Precedence Effect in SoundLocalization." Amer. I. Psycho!., Vol. 52,315-336 (1949).

Beardslee, D. C., Wertheimer, M.. Readings inPerception (D. Van Nostrand Co., N.Y.,1958).

Pieron, H., The Sensations (Yale Univ. Press,1952).

Concert Hall AcousticsBeranek, L. L,. Music, Acoustics and Archi-

tecture (Wiley, N.Y., 1962).Schroeder, M. R.. Science, Vol. 151, No. 1355

(18 March, 1966).Backus, I., The Acoustical Foundations of

Music (W. W. Norton, N.Y., 1969).

Stereo AnalysisBauer, B. B., "Phasor Analysis of Some Stereo-

phonic Phenomena", IRE Transactions onAudio, A4-10 (Jan. -Feb., 1962) pp. 18-21.

Four ChannelFeldman, L., "Quadrasonics On -The -Air",

Audio (Ian 1970).Whyte, B., "4 Channel Disc and Broadcast".

Audio (j an., 1970).Fantel, H. H., "Audio Basics-Quadrasonic

Stereo," Stereo Review (Feb., 1970).Berger. 1., "Four Channel Sound is Here, Sort

of", Sat. Rev., (29 Nov., 1969) p. 77.Klein, L., "The Four -Channel Disc", Stereo

Rev. (Ian. 1970).Cunningham, I., "Tetraphonic Sound", db

(Dec., 1969).

Reference

I. Volkmann, john E., "Electronic Room-Acoustic Fundamentals," Journal of the Acous-tical Society of America, Vol. 35 (1963) p. 786.

1101010

47

Alaskacommunicationssystem

J. D. Sellers

RCA GlobalCommunications. Inc. was selected by the U.S. Air Force to be the Pur-

chaser of the AlaskaCommunication System (ACS). The ACS is a n-r.wcyk of long-

haul circuits covering a large portion of the State and is made up of microwaveradio.

open wire,undersea cable and seveal hundred thousand miles of circuits leased

from the military, the Canadian Natiohal Telephone aid American Telephone and

Telegraph Company. RCA AlaskaCoinnunintions, Inc., was formed to own and

operate the ACS as a Commercial Comror Carrier for the State of Alaska. RCA

Alascom will install new microwave 'ad Hies to in:reEse the numbe of long haul

circuits, introduce Direct DistanceDialog capabil ty to the State and bring tele-

phone service to manycommunities ii A Eska not now served. RCA Alascom will

also participatewith COMSAT

Corporation' to bring Alaskaregular satellite communi-

cations for the first time and has proposed a 29°4 reduction in the rates of longdistance calls.

"The President today approved thesale of the Air Force operated AlaskaCommunication System to RCAGlobal Communications .. ."

1HOSE WORDS, contained in a June1969 White House Press release,

launched RCA on one of its mostambitious ventures in recent years.RCA agreed to purchase the AlaskaCommunication System from theUnited States Air Force, and operateit as a Commercial Common Carrierin the State of Alaska.

In its offer, RCA agreed to pay the AirForce $28.4 million for the ACS facil-ities, and to invest an additional $27.6million in new facilities to upgradeoverall service, to provide new ser-vices to the citizens of the State ofAlaska-all this at a substantial re-duction in long-distance telephonerates.

ACS facilities

The Alaska Communication System isa network of long -haul circuits cover -

Reprint RE -16-4-12Final manuscript received June 15, 1970.

John D. tkilkaraChief EngineerRCA Alaska Communications, Inc.Anchorage, Alaskareceived the BSEE from the University of Miamiin 1950. Mr. Sellers joined RCA with the MissileTest Project group in 1954 and later served asManager of Communications Systems Projects. Helater transferred to the RCA International Divisionwhere he served as Area Manager in Iran forCENTO. From 1965 to 1969 he was an EngineeringSupervisor for the RCA Service Company at theWhite Sands Missile Range and is presently ChiefEngineer, RCA Alaska Communications, Inc. in

Anchorage, Alaska. Mr. Sellers is a ProfessionalEngineer.

ing a large portion of the State ofAlaska and is made up of microwaveradio, open wire lines, undersea cableand several hundred thousand milesof circuits leased from the U.S. AirForce and the Canadian National Tele-phone Service. The bulk of the ACSfacilities are contained in Toll Centerslocated in the four major cities ofAlaska: Juneau the State Capital,Ketchikan in Southeastern Alaska,Fairbanks in the center of the State,and the largest in Anchorage, also thelargest city in the State. The majorfacilities are shown in Figs. 1 and 2.

History of ACS

The ACS was formed in 1900 by theU.S. Army Signal Corps to providecommunications between the widely

ARCIIC OCEAN

-Csr-1- ?"" -T-4-2.

Fig. 1-Purchased communications facilities.

--ARCIIC OCEAN

separated military posts located allover the Territory. It was also deemedin the public interest that since thesefacilities were the only ones existing,commercial traffic could also be passedover the network.

By 1904, construction had progressedto a point that in-service facilities in-cluded 2,128 miles of undersea cable,which provided the first "All Ameri-can" communications connection ofAlaska with the lower 48 states; 1,497miles of land lines and what is be-lieved to be the first commercialwireless telegraph system in NorthAmerica (a link 107 miles long bridg-ing an over -water gap in the network).Of the many people participating inthese projects, one of the most well-known was the late Brig. General

PACIP,C OCEAN

Fig. 2-Other interconnecting communications systems.

I

=r'clF 7'7=

49

"Billy" Mitchell, then a Lieutenant inthe Signal Corps.

Over the years, the system was ex-panded to include service to morecommunities and additional circuitswere required to meet the growingcommercial communications needs ofAlaskans and today includes some560,000 circuit miles and four majorToll Centers at Anchorage, Fairbanks,Juneau and Ketchikan.

The ACS was turned over to com-merical use almost entirely with theadvent of the construction of suchmilitary networks as the White AliceCommunications System and BlueGrass.

The system was operated by the U.S.Army Signal Corps until 1962 whenresponsibility for its operation wastransferred to the United States AirForce Communications Service.A special office to negotiate the saleof ACS to RCA and coordinate thetransfer of the system from Govern-ment ownership has been set up inAFCS with headquarters at Richards-Gebaur AFB in Missouri, and othersupport offices in Seattle and An-chorage.

RCA Globcom has established a

wholly owned subsidiary company,RCA Alaska Communications, Inc.,which will become the owner andoperator of ACS at the time the facili-ties are transferred from the U.S.Government to RCA.

RCA Alascom is an Alaskan Companyincorporated in Alaska and staffed byAlaskan citizens.

Improved communication facilitiesfor Alaska

In evaluating the telecommunicationsneeds of the State of Alaska, and howbest to satisfy these requirements.RCA has planned a major serviceimprovement program. These plansinclude not only the facilities neces-sary to increase the capacity of in-stalled systems to meet immediate andfuture demands, but also constructionof new systems to provide service tomany communities totally withoutcommunications at the present time.An overview of this improvement pro-gram is shown in Fig. 3.The problems involved in implement-ing Alascom's improvement planscan best be introduced by posing the

Are- -

se

APCrIc OCCAN

ir--TRook4--

11

,

-nuireaqu-

Seltomim PACIFIC OCEAN

ItOra std.

PACIFIC j °CLAM

Fig. 3-Proposed long -line system improvement.

questions: How can good telecommu-nication services be provided to thecitizens of a state twice the size of theState of Texas with a total populationof less than that of El Paso, and doso at a cost the citizens can afford andstill afford a reasonable profit to theowner?

RCA Alascom's improvement pro-gram for Alaska consists of threemajor phases:

1) Expansion of facilities required toprovide additional service for the 1970"Busy Season" (as might be expected,the peak of traffic occurs during theAlaska's summer months);2) A major construction program toexpand facilities to provide for the traf-fic growth estimated for the late 1970through 1972 period, introduction ofnew services including such features asaccess to the nationwide direct distancedialing network and extension of regu-lar telephone service to many villagestotally without communication servicetoday; and3) Development of a fundamental planfor a total integrated Alaskan commu-nications network for the mid 1970'sand beyond, including satellite earthstations.

Also included in RCA Alascom's over-all development plans are provisionof improved data service.The program for expanding the long -haul facilities to meet the Busy Seasonof 1970 includes the installation ofequipment to provide more than 400new voice channels for use in theinter- and intra-state networks. Ap-proximately 200 of these circuits willbe included in two separate newmicrowave systems, while the re-mainder will be provided by installing

additional multiplex equipment onexisting microwave and tropospheric -scatter radio systems. RCA Alascom isalso installing a new tropo systemsome 300 miles above the Arctic Cir-cle, to bring vitally needed communi-cation circuits to Alaska's NorthCoast. These facilities are required tosupport the tremendous oil explorationactivity presently under way in thePrudhoe Bay area. Provision of thelong -haul facilities also requires thatinterconnection facilities with localtelephone companies be expanded.These expansions are also in theprocess of implementation by RCAAlascom.

RCA Alascom's major constructionprogram covers the time periodthrough 1972, and is designed not onlyto further expand and modernize thelong distance communications net-work, but also to introduce new ser-vices to the residents of the State.One of the largest undertakings in theconstruction program is the installa-tion of equipment to automate theswitching of the long distance circuits.This will allow telephone subscribersin Alaska to dial their own long dis-tance calls for the first time. Thecapability to automatically record in-formation required for subsequentbilling of the toll calls is also beingprovided. This automation facilitywill improve the efficiency of opera-tions and be an important factor per-niitting RCA Alascom to offer a 29%reduction in the cost of long-distancetelephone rates. This system is sched-uled to be fully operational in 1971.

50

Another major part of the construc-tion program is the implementationof the "Bush Phone" system. This sys-tem will extend regular telephone ser-vice to 142 villages remotely locatedfrom major population centers. Trans-mission will be accomplished by acombination of satellite microwave,tropospheric -scatter vHF, and UHFradio links to isolated villages. Mostof these remote villages have no tele-phone service at the present time,while the few that have service canonly be contacted with about 30%reliability. The "Bush Phone" pro-gram will require approximately threeyears to complete in its entirety.

A new microwave system is presentlyunder construction in SoutheasternAlaska by RCA Alascom. This systemwill extend circuits from Juneau toSitka and Angoon and will later beexpanded to extend service to Peters-burg and Ketchikan. At the time ofthe completion of the system to Ketch-ikan, an undersea cable installed in1957 will be abandoned with resultingdecreased maintenance costs.

RCA Alascom is also installing a 36 -channel tropospheric scatter radio sys-tem from Barter Island in Alaska'sBeaufort Sea to Frontier on Alaska'sNorth Slope in the Prudhoe Bay area.This system, installed some 300 miles

north of the Arctic Circle, will providemuch needed service to the oil explora-tion fields on the North Coast ofAlaska by interconnecting the Frontierterminal with U.S. Government facil-ities at Barter Island where they willbe extended southward through themilitary network. While the tropo sys-tem is not large nor technically com-plex, it is located in one of the harshestof environments: temperatures of-70° F with winds up to 100 miles perhour are not uncommon in the wintermonths.

The majority of system expansion tomeet the 1970 Busy Season require-ments will be obtained by addingchanneling equipment to existing mili-tary TD -2 and tropospheric radio sys-tems. While this sounds simple andshould be a straightforward engineer-ing task, the job is complicated by thefact that these systems are owned bythe U.S. Air Force, controlled by theDefense Communications Agency, andoperated by an industrial companyunder contract to the Air Force. Per-mission to install commercial equip-ment on a military communicationsystem for operation by private indus-try at a reasonable profit while reim-bursing the military for a fair shareof the operating costs of the militarysystem has required extensive negotia-tions between RCA and the military.

..

J -

Probably the most exciting communi-cations improvement underway in theState at the moment is the introduc-tion of commercial satellite communi-cations to Alaska. An earth station hasbeen installed in Talkeetna, Alaska,approximately 100 miles north ofAnchorage, jointly by RCA Alascomand Comsat. This station, placed intoservice in July, 1970, makes networktelevision available to Alaska for thefirst time on a regular basis. It alsoprovides as many as 132 voice -gradetelephone channels to interconnectAlaska with the lower 48 states and thePacific area through INTELSAT III andlater INTELSAT IV. The earth station isinterconnected to the Anchorage TollCenter by a three -hop, high -capacitymicrowave system operated by RCAAlascom.

New services

Of the many new services introducedto the State in 1970, the first was Telex.This service permits a subscriber tocontact other subscribers in manyparts of the world for exchange of tele-printer messages and is charged for ona time -used basis. Also, improved dataservice to the many users of data trans-mission facilities will be provided.

RCA Alascom's future

Alaska's motto this year states that"Alaska Looks to the Future," andRCA Alascom intends to provide theefficient and economical communica-tions service required by the State toaccomplish their plans for progress.Toward this end, Alascom has under-taken a program which will result ina totally integrated communicationsystem on a statewide basis.These plans include a network ofmodern, high speed communicationsfacilities including satellite earth sta-tions at the major population centersinterconnected also by high capacityterrestrial links and a number ofsmaller earth stations having a receive -only capability for educational televi-sion. This system will be installedto support the communication needsof Alaska including not only the com-mercial requirements, but those ofthe military as well.

The foregoing just touches lightly onprograms underway in Alaska byRCA. We are just beginning; and likethe State, RCA is also "on the move."

Fig. 4-Oil drilling rig on Alaska's north slope.

51

I

The first color TV reception from outer space wastransmitted to Japan via RCA Globcom facilities.Technician Bruno LaBella checks equipment beforeApollo 10 program reception.

Data, voice, andtelevision servicesL. G. Donato

Data, Voice and Television Services (DVTS)-a section of RCA Global Communica-tions, Inc.-provides some of the most sophisticated services offered by the RCAsubsidiary. These include program service, facsimile service, datel, executive HotLine, interpolated voice data, intercontinental television service, and alternate orsimultaneous voice record services.

IN 1932, a separate section of RCAGlobcom was devoted exclusively

to the handling of international ad-dressed program transmissions for thebroadcasters; this section-nowknown as Data, Voice, and Television

Reprint RE -16-4-10Final manuscript received June 10, 1970

iii

Through the leased -channel control racksshown above, RCA Globcom provides ser-vices for commercial users, the press, andgovernment.

.11.17.6

This control office concentrator at RCAGlobcom in New York provides Hot -Lineservices for 25 subscribers.

Services (DVTS) -today provides ex-tensive services for commercial users,the press, and the government. Thetransmission media has been expandedfrom the high frequency radio linksfirst used to include cable and satellitefacilities. The common denominatorof these services is bandwidth-all use3 kHz or greater. The activities of theDVTS are described, in general, inFig. 1 and, in some detail, in the para-graphs that follow.

Program service

There are three main functions of theprogram service. The first is the recep-tion of addressed commentaries byoverseas network correspondents. Inthis case, RCA Globcom provides atwo-way circuit with the distant end,enabling broadcasters to talk to, cue,and actually use the material fromtheir correspondent covering a news-worthy event.

The second function, the transmissionof news and sporting events to over-seas destinations, includes such broad-casts as may originate from the Voiceof America, the United Nations or thetransmission of baseball and sportingevents to the Caribbean and SouthAmerican areas.

The third function, the reception ofoverseas broadcasts, generally sched-uled at regular intervals, is an ex-tremely important source of networknews. Examples of signals monitoredinclude those from the BBC London,Radio Peking and Radio Moscow. We,incidentally, were one of the first toreceive and monitor the signals fromRussia's first satellite-Sputnik.

It might be interesting to note thatduring space shots, RCA Globcomprovides radio circuits from the re -

52

DATE L SERVICES FOR COMMERCIAL USERS

DATA

VOICE

A N 0

T V

SERVICES

AVR SVR CHANNELS

-I I VD

FOR GOVERNMENT BCOMMERCIAL SERVICES

- FOR SENDING DATA DURING PAUSES IN SPEECH

EXECUTIVE 'HOT-LINE`

FACSIMILE SERVICES

PROGRAM SERVICES

- FOR INSTANT COMMUNICATIONS

- FOR PRESS a COMMERCIAL USERS

- COMMENTARIES

- TRANSMISSIONS - BROADCASTERS - NEWS

- MONITORING

BROADCASTERS - NEWS DISSEMINATION

CLOSED CIRCUIT TV I STOCKHOLDERS MEETINGS,-CONVENTIONS, ETC.

Fig. 1-Activities of Data, Voice, and Television Services.

covery ship involved. These circuitsare used by broadcasters for live com-mentaries and by the press to transmitphotos of recovery operations, minutesafter the event takes place.

Facsimile service

Facsimile service provides the press,or any commercial user, a means oftransmitting or receiving photographs,drawings, sketches, or documents toor from an overseas point. We operateapproximately fifty such circuits on aworldwide basis. Pictures addressedto private individuals are received onfilm, developed, printed, and hand de-livered by messengers. We do, how-ever, have private lines to the largerpress organizations. A picture fromParis, for example, is usually receivedby RCA Globcom and fed electricallyto the Associated Press or UnitedPress International. The agency, inturn, can feed its domestic network,resulting in simultaneous reception atmany locations throughout the UnitedStates-all within a matter of minutes.One of the major advantages of thefacsimile service is its inherent abilityto transmit error -proof documents.Facsimile offers the only method oftransmitting signatures, diagrams, andlanguages (such as Japanese) in ori-ginal form.

Datel

Another interesting form of serviceprovided is called date!. An overseas

circuit is provided, customer to cus-tomer, for the exchange of high-speeddata or facsimile. The service is "ondemand" and is charged for on per -minute basis. In the New York Cityarea, customers are provided with pri-vate tie lines, free of additional charge.Connections to customers anywhere inthe United States are handled viaWestern Union broadband circuits, atno additional charge to the customer.

Basically, a customer calls RCA Glob -corn and asks to be connected to anoverseas party. Once the connection isestablished, the charges begin and thecustomer exchanges data, using voicefor cue and control of his transmis-sion. Using the latest type of facsimileequipment, a customer can transmit afull page document in approximatelyfour minutes. Data can also be trans-mitted at rates varying from 600 to3600 bits per second. If requested,RCA Globcom will lease and alsomaintain the necessary facsimile ordata equipment.

Executive hot line

The two newest additions to the ser-vices offered are Executive Hot Lineand Interpolated Voice Data. HotLine provides business -man with animmediate connection to a designatedoverseas point. By merely lifting thehandset on a specially provided tele.phone, a business -man in New Yorkcan establish immediate contact with

Louis G. Donato, Mgr.Data, Voice and Television ServicesRCA Global Communications, Inc.New York, New Yorkassumed his present position in January 1961. Hiswork at RCA Globcom, for the past 29 years, hascentered around its broadband offerings. He at-tended Brooklyn College, and graduated from RCAInstitutes, where he majored in Communications.While on military leave from the company he wasstationed at the War Department Radio ReceivingStation at Laolata, Maryland, where it was hisresponsibility, as a chief, to maintain worldwidecommunications. Mr. Donato is an active partici-pant in the joint carrier television committee, andassigned to several C.C.I.T.T. study groups.

an associate, eliminating the time con-suming chore of placing calls throughswitchboards or dialing long numeri-cal sequences. In addiiton to voicecommunication, the "Hot Line" canalso accommodate various forms ofhigh-speed data communications.'

Interpolated Voice Data

Interpolated Voice Data (IVD) , uti-lizes a private voice -record channel(3 kHz), for the simultaneous trans-mission and reception of voice anddata or voice and facsimile infor-mation. It is a major milestone incommunications, since it permits cus-tomers to obtain total circuit utiliza-tion. RCA Globcom provides theelectronic units associated with theservice, such as a buffer unit, whichconverts high-speed data; an informa-tion storage and speed conversionunit; specially designed channel multi-plexing equipment; a digital facsimileunit, and a telephone instrument,which is used for voice communica-tion. The customer supplies informa-tion input/output devices, such as dataterminals and facsimile equipment.Basically, the system permits high -

53

speed data transmissions to take placesimultaneously with voice conversa-tions. The data actually becomes inter-polated with the voice information.During pauses in the voice conversa-tion, data is transmitted, in bursts, tothe receiving end. Specially designedRCA Globcom equipment, connectedto the circuit, separates the voice fromthe data or facsimile portion and sendseach form of information to the ap-propriate receiving equipment.

Intercontinental television

As mentioned previously, in 1932RCA Globcom started handling audioinformation from overseas points. In1965, with the development of thecommercial satellite communicationssystem, video was added. Televisionbroadcasters throughout the world usethe service for news, sports, or specialevents. The role of DVTS is to providea complete service for the customerby ordering all circuit facilities fromthe origin to the final destination ofthe TV program, and also to maintaina high technical standard for the audioand video signals. The programs mayrequire complex routings, involvingconnections between the earth stationsand the broadcasters. To make ar-rangements for these connections,extensive use is made of the world-wide telegraph and telex networks ofRCA Globcom. This is an extremelyvaluable asset when dealing withbroadcasters having urgent Tv re-quirements. For example, the Apollomoon walk was handled through theNew York DVTS facilities and pro-vided live coverage of the event tomillions of viewers throughout theworld.

The service is not limited to broadcastapplications. Closed-circuit TV forcommercial use is becoming increas-ingly popular for linking conventions,stockholders' meetings, medical con-ferences, and similar gatherings. Forexample, a special two -and -a -half hourprogram originating at the Houstonand San Antonio, Texas, NASA SpaceCenters was transmitted via DVTSclosed-circuit Tv facilities from NewYork to Davos, Switzerland. There itwas displayed on a theater size screenat the 1970 Convention Hall of the18th International Congress for PostGraduate Medical Instruction of the

West German College of Physicians.In addition to the 2,000 doctors view-ing the program at Davos, another25,000 doctors followed the proceed-ings by simultaneous projections inauditoriums in ten West German,Austrian and Swiss cities. Pictureswere described by the delegates assharp and bright with accompanyingflawless sound.

Alternate voice record (AVR) andSimultaneous voice record (SVR)channels

The greatest expansion in DVTS hasbeen in the area of AVR and SVRleased channels. In both cases, a cus-tomer contracts to lease a 3 -kHz chan-nel on a 24-hour/day basis, and thechannel is designed specifically forhis needs. For example, a customerhas the option of using either voice ordata or facsimile and simultaneouslyoperating several teletypewriter chan-nels.

One of the most important technicalrequirements is of channel equaliza-tion. The transmission of high-speeddata or facsimile will succeed onlywhen channels are fully equalized fordelay and amplitude. Normally, equal-ization is performed at the receiveend; however, in cases where this can-not be done, equalization or ptedistor-tion is performed at DVTS. A typical

configuration is shown in Fig. 2, thechannel leased by Swiss Air.

The primary function of the systempermits computer interrogation ofreservations available on scheduledflights. The controlling computer, lo-cated in Zurich, singularly poles oneof three locations in sequence. Eachlocation containing approximately 26visual display reservation agent units.The data transmission rate is at 2400bits/s, and utilizes the 800- to 2400 -Hzportion of the channel. Operatingsimultaneously are five 74 -baud tele-type channels utilizing the lower andupper portions of the frequencyspectrum. The median frequencies are540 and 660 Hz at the low end [and2700, 2820 and 2940 Hz at the highend]. Several of these channels arefurther extended to Copenhagen. It isinteresting to note that three of thesechannels operate through AIRCON

(Automated Information and Reserva-tions Computer Oriented Network)an RCA Globcom message switchingsystem that permits automatic switch-ing to any one of 45 domestic SwissAir offices. By means of selective poll-ing, these stations are permitted tosend to any other Swiss Air stationon the system.

Reference1. Solomon, S. M., "Hot Line Voice/Data sys-tem," in this issue describes the Executive HotLine Service in some detail.

NEW YORK

SWISS AIR TERMINALS

( JFK NO )

( JFK NO 2)

( 5TH AVE

( JFK

TO 45DOMESTIC

TELETYPECIRCUITS

i____ WAY

_ STATION

ZURICH

3 KHZ

CHANNELDERIVATIONEQUIPMENT

AIR CONCOMPUTER

RCA GLOBCOM60 BROAD ST. N.Y

SALESDEPARTURE

OFFICE

Fig. 2-AIRCON--Automated Information andSwiss Air.

WAY

STATION

CHANNELDERIVATIONEQUIPMENT

COMPUTERIN

ZURICH

TALKER. ZURICH

COPENHAGEN

Reservations Computer Oriented Network-for

54

Hot Line voice/data systemS. M. Solomon

The Hot Line voice/data system, a new service provided by RCA Globcom, is pres-ently in operation between New York City and San Juan, Puerto Rico. The systemprovides subscribers, on demand, the Jse of a conditioned voice -grade overseaschannel for alternate voice/data communication. Neither dialing nor pushbuttons arerequired, and establishment of the connection is almost instantaneous. Once theconnection is made, the parties at either or both ends can talk in complete privacy.If desired, a conference can be set up at either end or a' both. In addition. with theuse of modern transmitting and receiving equipment, the system can be used forhigh-speed data service. RCA Globcom plans to extend this service in the near futureto Europe. South America. and the Far East.

TIRE INTERNATIONAL voice/dataHot Line marks a totally new con-

cept in international, shared voice -record communications. The Hot Linemakes possible, at any time of day,instant voice/data communications be-tween local and overseas subscribers.It differs from previous services inthat the shared voice circuit eliminatesthe need for subscribers to place callsto designated overseas points throughspecial telephone operators, or to diallong numerical sequences: simply bylifting the handset of his telephone, asubscriber can immediately establisha connection with a designated over-seas correspondent.

The system is a combination voice/data facility, and can accommodatevarious forms of record and high-speeddata communications. Information in-put/output devices such as data ter-minals, teleprinters, and equipmentfor transmitting facsimile can be inter-connected with the system.

As part of the service, RCA Globcomprovides the subscriber with up to 10desktop telephones designed especiallyfor internal and external communica-tions. All telephones are equippedwith selector buttons. One telephoneserves as the master station, with thecapability of switching from voice todata mode, or to any or all Hot Lineextensions located in the subscriber'soffice (or elsewhere). Each extensionhas its own operative selector buttonsthat permit their users to participatein conference calls and to notify otherstations when the system is in the datamode. Moreover, the master stationand its extensions are capable of com-municating, either individually or col -Reprint RE -16-4-9Final manuscript received June 8, 1970

lectively, with the master station andall extensions at the overseas end.

Another feature available in the HotLine service is a priority extension for,say, the subscriber's chief executiveofficer. This extension is absolutelyprivate, and enables the user to pre-empt the system for voice conversationwhich cannot be monitored.

Although the system has been de-signed to provide immediate connec-tions between terminals under normaltraffic conditions, there is the possibil-ity that, during peak loads, all over-seas trunks might be busy at the sametime. In this event, another feature,termed camp -on, enables the callingparty to place his handset back on -hook, yet keep his call active.

Still another feature is incorporated inthe Hot Line service. From the mo-ment the called party picks up histelephone and establishes the connec-tion, until the call is terminated, elec-

TO 10

PMOMES

TOW

DATA MIAMI EPEE

DATA

FACSIMILE

COMPUTES

T LETA'UP TO 10C44444 LS

HOT LINETERMINAL

DATAMM SPEED

DATA

FACSIMILE

COMPUTER

TE...E TT PE

UP TO IE

HO LINETERMINAL

-U. S. SUBSCRIBERS U. S.'CENTRAL OFFICE

Stanley M. Solomon, Ldr.Switching and Computer EngineeringRCA Global Communications, Inc.New York, N.Y.received the BEE and MEE from New York Uni-versity in T948 and 1959, respectively. He has doneadditional postgraduate work at Columbia Univer-sity. From 1959 to 1968, Mr. Solomon was with theDefense Advanced Communications Laboratory ofRCA Defense Electronic Products, New York, wherehis area of concentration was digital communica-tions and switching equipment. He joined RCAGlobal Communications, Inc. in 1968, and is pres-ently engaged in the development of the Hot Linevoice/data communications system. Mr. Solomonis a Member of IEEE and Eta Kappa Nu, and is aLicensed Professional Engineer in New York andNew Jersey.

tronic impulse counters record thelength of time the subscriber is usingthat particular circuit.

System description

The Hot Line Voice/Data System isshown in Fig. 1. The system comprisestwo Central Office line concentratorsand Subscriber terminal equipment.Each Central Office line concentrator(Fig. 2) is fully automatic and capableof working with a similar switchingsystem. The concentrators provide themeans for an RCA Globcom sub -

TRUNK

GROUP

OVERSEAS OVERSEASTRAL OFFICE

OI 25

DA

FACSIMILE

COYPU EP

[LET TPE

UP TO IS

CM AN ELS

DATA miGAI SPEED

DATA

FACSIMILE

COMPUTER

TELE TYPEUP TO IS

g.HHOT LINE F.

TERMINAL

P S

OVERSEAS SUBSCRIBERS -opFig. 1-System configuration

55

TOSUISCIFISERTERMINALS

r

POWERSUPPLY

OTEDUMIONT)

Fig. 2-Hot Line concentrator voice data functions.

scriber at one terminal to connect toone, and only one, subscriber at theother terminal. All transmission pathsare on a 4 -wire basis.Each Subscriber terminal equipment(Fig. 3) can accommodate up to 10telephones, in addition to the data ter-minal. Additional, off -premises exten-sions, can be provided, if desired.

Line concentrator equipment

The line concentrator includes the fol-lowing (Fig. 2):

Switching network and associated con-trol

Line and trunk circuits and associatedterminating equipment

Signaling and supervisory equipmentSystem monitoring equipmentMessage -rate metering equipmentTraffic analysis equipment

Each concentrator is designed for con-tinuous operation. Single -component

RENERCV

113{

RiffRCV

XMI

XMIT4.--XM1R SUSSAING BUS

:46{3 RCV

XMIT

4 VIE LIE }COMMUPACATENTo

CHANVEL

TOCOMAUNICATION

CHANNEL

failure in any subsystem or commoncircuit will not cause a completefailure of the Central Office.

Switching network and associated control

The switching network provides thecapability of interconnecting line andtrunk terminations on a 4 -wire, full -duplex basis, and is designed to con-nect any line to any trunk, but notline -to -line, or trunk -to -trunk.

Line and trunk terminations

At each concentrator, all line andtrunk circuits terminate in a 4 -wire,voice -grade communications channel.Line circuits are designed on the basisof a non-metallic path between Sub-scriber terminals and a concentrator,while trunk circuits are non-metallicpaths between concentrators. This de-sign can also function in the event ametallic path exists between Sub-scriber terminals and a concentrator.

o-RCVR SUMMING SIM RCVRAMPLFIER

To

L < 1

w

ANTISEE -TONE I CONTROLAMPLFER TO CIRCUIT

LOGEFOR LAWS

RINGING & DATASWITCH -OVER

OAATAPLI

TRFIER

XMIT

TOW

< A

ro

RC

DATASETRCVR

fl-

-ff-

4WIRE

'MESELINE

One of the two concentrators is the"prime" unit. This feature preventsthe possibility of a "double seizure,"which occurs when Hot Line sub-scribers at either end of the systemattempt to initiate simultaneous calls.The feature is optional, and is accom-plished by strapping.

Signaling and supervision

Signaling between concentrators is

on an AC basis as shown in Fig. 4Digital codes (see Fig. 5) are trans-mitted via frequency -shift keyers toprovide correct transmittal of informa-tion, and to insure against wrong -number transmittal, wrong connec-tions, or double connections. Signalingbetween the Subscriber terminal equip-ment and the concentrator is based onon/off AC.

Supervision between Subscriber Ter-minal Equipment and the Concentra-tor, and between Concentrators, is alsoon an AC basis.

Signals directed to the subscriberare incorporated in each concentrator.Ring -back, ring -forward, and camp -onsignals are integrated in the line cir-cuits or common equipments.

The proposed Standard of AudibleTones, specified in CCITT DocumentAPI I 1-84, is used as a guide for thefrequencies, power levels, and repeti-tion rates of the tones sent by the con-centrator to the Subscriber terminalequipment, except for the cadences ofring -back and ring -forward: these are2 -second -on and 2 -second -off signals.The camp -on signal is the equivalentof an all -circuits -busy (reorder) tone.

Camp -on

Camp -on is provided in each concen-trator, and is used to permit the call-ing party to reserve a trunk in theevent that all trunks are busy when hetries to initiate a call. During thecamp -on sequence the call cannot becompleted if the calling party eitherremains off -hook or goes on -hook thenback off -hook.

Whenever all trunks are busy, thecamp -on equipment sends the callingparty a camp -on signal (all -circuits -busy tone). This alerts the callingparty of the "busy" condition, and ofthe fact that he can go back on -hook

Fig. 3-Hot Line subscriber terminal func-tional diagram.

56

CALLING CALLED

without "losing his place in line."Once back on -hook, he is kept awareof his camp -on status by visual illumi-nation of a VOICE lamp.

When the first trunk circuit becomesavailable, the camp -on equipmentseizes the trunk, and enables the con-centrator to ring the calling party.

Once the calling line has been located,the control logic within the concentra-tor applies ring -forward to the callingline for a specific timed interval (ad-justable for each subscriber from 30seconds to 1 minute). If the callingparty does not answer within this timeframe, the call is timed -out, and thestored camp -on request is erased. Ifthe calling party does answer withinthe time frame, the call is then proc-essed normally by the concentrator.

Message and traffic metering

Message metering is used to extractbilling information, and is accom-plished by the use of impulse -typecounters incorporated in the line -circuit terminations. These countersshow usage rate, and advance at6 -second intervals. Metering startswhenever a connection is established(both terminals connected and bothhandsets off -hook) ; it terminates whenthe connection is terminated. Messagemetering shows only those calls origi-nated by a subscriber connected tothat particular line circuit.

The traffic -metering equipment assem-bles data for traffic flow, line andtrunk usage, and trouble recording.Traffic recording equipment is also in-corporated. This equipment providesinformation indicating the number oftimes that the equipment and alltrunks are busy, the duration of callsas well as camp -on mode, and the timeof day that the calls take place.

Call descriptionCall initiation

To initiate a call, the calling partylifts his handset, thereby generating aservice request to his associated con-centrator. If a trunk is available, theLocal Central Office (calling office)selects the trunk and signals the Re-mote Central Office (called office),identifying both the calling and calledparties. Each Central Office thenmakes the proper connection betweenthe associated line and trunk circuits.A ring -forward signal is then sent to

IDLE

OFF HOOK,

THEN

SERVICE

REQUEST,

THEN

CONNECTIONAUDIBLE RING

SEQUENCE 4- BACK TONE

SUBSCRIBER - TO- CONCENTRATOR

-111. 1000/20 MI

4- 1000 Hz

CONCENTRATOR TO-CONCEKIRATOR

- DISCONNECT COOS

4- DISCONNECT CODE

- ABSENCE CF TONE -0 STEADY MARK

4- ABSENCE OF TONE 4- DISCONNECT CODE

-4 ABSENCE OF TONE

4- ABSENCE CF TONE

WHEN CALLED

SUBSCRIBER

ANSWERS

THEN

-10- ABSENCE OF TONE

-1 VOICE/ DATA

4- VOICE/ DATA

Fig. 4-Call-sequence diagram.

-* STEADY MARK

4- STEADY MARK

-II. SEND ADDRESSDIGITAL

4- RING BACK COX

-0 VOICE/DATA

4- VOICE/DATA

the called party; ring -back is sent tothe calling party from the RemoteCentral office.

Trunk busy

This situation has already been cov-ered under :he topic of camp -on.

Called party doss not answer

If the called party does not answerwithin the timed interval, the RemoteCentral Office times out the call andterminates both the switched connec-tion to the called party and the trunk -circuit connection; the trunk is thusidle again, and available for anothercall. The calling party is then signaledby a steady tone, and he reverts tothe on -hook condition.

If the calling party goes back on -hookduring the timed interval before thecalled party answers, the call is termi-nated and the ringing signal ceases.

EXAMPLE OFSUBSCRIBER ADDRESS

SUBSCRIBER *01

TENSAUNITSDIGIT DIGIT

CONCENTRATOR - TO- SUBSCRIBER

--111. 1000 Hz

4- 1000/20 Ha

- 1000 Ma

4-- 1000/20 Hz

1000 Hz

4- 1000/20 Hz

-IP 1000/20 HzRING PHONE

4- 1000 Hz

-4 VOICE/DATA

4- VOICE/DATA

Called party answers

If the called party answers within thetimed interval, the ringing signal istripped, and the voice connection isestablished.

Call termination

Either the calling or called party canterminate the call by going back on -hook.

Future plansEach Central Office line concentrator,in the initial configuration, comprises25 subscriber lines connecting to anyone of six trunks, on a 4 -wire trans-mission basis. In the expanded con-figuration, 12 -trunk capacity will beavailable. The expansion can beaccomplished by means of insertingadditional plug-in boards in the con-centrator: the proper wiring alreadyexists. In the initial configuration,vacant trunk circuits are "busy."

44 BITSr---- 22 BITS + II BITS + 11 BITS + 'MEN REPEAT

22 BITS -ALL MARKS -1 I S MSSS MSSS MM I S SS SS SSSS MM I__..-/ t__,,,_/ ---Y-d '---Y-IBINARY BINARY BINARY 0 BINARY 0

UNITS DIGIT TENS DIGIT

22 BITS

SUBSCRIBER *25 I 22

TENSilk UNITSDIGIT DIGIT

DISCONNECT CODE

BITS -ALL MARKS 1

I

I 1 BITS

S NLI_S,L,AS MM

BINARY 5 BINARY 5UNITS DIGIT

-40 BITS-- --22 BITS II BITS

II BITS + THEN REPEAT1 1

S Skt.4S.1, SAL4SS, MM I

BINARY 2 BINARY 2TENS DIGIT

II BITS

22 BITS -ALL MARKS 1 I S SSMM SSMAI MM

BINARY 12 BINARY 12

" S &SUM SSMM MM 1 THEN REPEAT

BINARY 12 BINARY 12

RING BACK COOT F-22 BITS -ALL MARKS I I S JMSMM MIA S ,MSMATL,MSAAM MM I THEN REPEAT

BINARY 13 BINARY 13 BINARY 13 BINARY 13

CKT OUT I 22 BITS -ALL MARKS I S ,SNMN S SAWN SAYAN MM I THEN REPEAT

BINARY 14 BINARY 14 BINARY 14 BINARY 14

Fig. 5-Trunk signaling and supervision codes: digital codes frequency -shift keyed at150 -baud rate. Mark frequency -2580 Hz; space frequency -2700 Hz.

57

Tin Win, Manager

Satellite Engineering

RCA Global Communications, Inc.

New York, N.Y.

received the BEE from Rensellaer Polytechnic In-

stitute in 1958. From 1959 to 1966, he worked in

Wireless Division, Burma Post and Telecommuni-

cations Department. In July 1966, he joined the

Engineering Department of RCA Global Commu-

nications, Inc. as a Design Engineer where he

worked on various HF, VHF and microwave proj-

ects. He was promoted to Group Leader in 1968

and directed the engineering design activities for

the Guam Earth Station project from its inception

to its completion. Mr. Win became Manager, Satel-

lite Engineering, in 1970 and is now responsible

for satellite communications engineering. He is a

member of the IEEE, Radio Communications Com-

mittee.

James M. Walsh, DirectorSatellite, Radio and Facilities EngineeringRCA Global Communcations, Inc.New York, N.Y.received the BEE from Manhattan College in 1943.After military service, Mr. Walsh joined RCA Com-munications, Inc. as a Jr. Design Engineer. From1946 to 1956, he was involved with plant designof radio stations and antenna installations; from1956 to 1957 he was Administrative Assistant tothe Vice President & Chief Engineer; from 1957 to1960 he was Manager, Terminal Facilities -Installa-tion Design; from 1960 to 1967 he was Manager.Terminal Plant Engineering; and from 1967 to 1970he was Manager, Satellite & Radio Engineering.Mr. Walsh recently was promoted to his currentposition in which he has engineering responsibilityfor installation and construction of satellite earthstations, radio, and building facilities throughoutthe RCA Globcom system. Mr. Walsh directed theengineering efforts for the installation of the tem-porary Thailand transportable satellite earth sta-tion as well as for the Guam earth station project.He is a licensed Professional Engineer of NewYork State, a member of the Space Communica-tions Committee of the IEEE, and a member ofCCIR and AFCEA.

Pulantatearth stationJ. M. Walsh Tin Win

The satellite communications earth sta-tion at Pulantat on the island of Guamprovides vital communications circuitsfor the Department of Defense and ex-pands public -message telephone servicein the Pacific. The 98.4 -ft. diameter Cas-segrain antenna has a power output of5000 Watts. It is designed to withstandwinds up to 210 mi/h. The station trans-mits 60 FDM-FM voice channels over the5925 -MHz to 6425 -MHz band. and re-

ceives 60 voice channels from five sep-arate earth stations over the 3700 -MHzto 4200 -MHz band. It is being expandedto 132 channel capacity. This paperdescribes the technical planning. engi-neering design. and construction of a

spaceage earth station on an island inthe South Pacific.

SINCE THE EARLY DAYS OF ECHO,

TELSTAR, RELAY AND SYNCOM,RCA engineers have devoted muchtime and effort to translating thesepioneer experiments in satellite com-munications into the reality of ser-vices for the public, industry, andgovernment. In April of 1965. whenEARLY BIRD ushered in the era ofcommercial satellite communications,RCA was already fully committed tothis new mode of global communica-tions. In October of 1963, RCAVictor, Ltd. began the design for theconstruction of Canada's experimentalcommunications satellite earth stationat Mill Village, Nova Scotia; thus,Canada became an important memberof the community of nations con-tributing to the advancement of thetechnology of commercial satellitecommunications. During 1966, RCA

Global Communications, Inc. filedwith the FCC a joint application withother common carriers for authorityto construct and operate a satelliteearth station at Woodland Georgia.This further established the firm posi-tion of RCA Globcom in the businessof satellite communications.

In October of 1966, the ThailandDepartment of Post & Telegraph

58

Reprint RE -16-4-11Final manuscript received June 23. 1970.

TEST SWFROM TT

NOITTEilSOUK

awarded a contract to RCA Globcomto provide, install, and operate atransportable earth station and asso-ciated two -hop microwave link atSriracha, approximately 50 milessoutheast of Bangkok. The station wasplaced in commercial operation inApril, 1967, for approximately a one-year period. Thailand became the firstcountry in Southeast Asia to inaugu-rate commercial service via satellite.RCA Globcom thus gained valuablefirst-hand experience in operating andmanaging a satellite earth station.

Guam

Guam, the largest and southernmostof the Mariana Islands, is located atlatitude 13° 28' North, and longitude144° 45' East. It is 30 miles long, 4 to111/2 miles wide, and 212 square milesin area. It has been subjected to manytyphoons with velocities as high as210 miles per hour. Guam and theadjoining islands are rapidly beingdeveloped by private and industrialinterests. In addition, Guam is a keymilitary base for the Southwest Pacificarea. As a result, substantial additionalcircuits are required for public mes-sage, Telex, telephone, and leased -channel services. Thus, Guam is animportant hub for transpacific com-munications, with submarine cablesextending as follows:

142 voice circuits to Hawaii (3,842 n.miles)138 voice circuits to Japan (1,403 n.miles)128 voice circuits to Philippines (1,470n. miles)

eo

PROM COLD

160 voice circuits to Australia (2,999n. miles)80 voice circuits to Hong Kong (2,060n. miles)

The cables to Australia and HongKong are owned by the British Com-monwealth partners. The former cablecan be interconnected at Australia toan 80 -voice circuit cable (5,537 n.miles) to Hawaii via New Zealand.The latter cable can be extended 1,975n. miles to Singapore via Borneo.

RCA position

RCA Global Communications, Inc.was in a unique position on Guam,having operated telephone and tele-graph communications facilities thereduring the past two decades via radioand cable systems. The Guam -HawaiiTranspacific Cable is a most importantcable link, since both terminationpoints are capable of being intercon-nected to several other cables going toother parts of the world. RCA Glob-com predicted early saturation ofthese communication facilities. Whilethere is an alternate cable route avail-able to Guam via the British Common-wealth cables, extending betweenHawaii and Guam via Australia andNew Zealand, costs would be greaterthan for satellite operation, resultingin higher rates to the public. Thesefactors established the urgent require-ment for an earth station on Guam.Accordingly, RCA Globcom filed anapplication with the FCC on March4, 1968 for authorization to constructthe Guam Earth Station by relocatingthe Thailand transportable earth sta-

ME LIM-FROM COOP -I

TESTMON TT.

SIR

MOTO TRAY COP*Ma KOS IMO

AZImUTN EQUIPMENT ROOM

COSA TOIII TRANS

g

3

MolelloaITS,

10c[omNAP m./

ROOM

L girelcm -t PROTOTY.c

-ELEVATION PLAN

CONVERTi

WAY T°M TARN[

RUNAZ MOOEL ERROR

I AECITTJOINT

AZCARLEWRY

MIT AZROTARY

AT

TWITOuT( 4 Roil

tion and providing a new 98 -to -100 -ft -diameter antenna system. Thisapplication received support from theDepartment of Defense. Shortly there-after, ITT World Communications,Inc. and Western Union International,Inc. agreed to participate with RCAGlobcom in this undertaking. TheRCA Globcom application wasamended to add ITT Worldcom andWUI as parties, to reflect expandedchannel requirements, and a decisionto provide all new equipment for theearth station.

Planning phase

On August 5, 1968, RCA Globcomissued a request for proposals tofourteen technically qualified and ex-perienced contractors-domestic andforeign-to design, engineer, supply,construct, install, and test on a turn-key basis, a complete satellite earthstation facility on Guam. The stationwas to be capable of transmitting 60FDM-FM voice channels and receivinga total of 60 voice channels from threeseparate earth stations. The stationwould also be capable of expansionto 132 channels. Options for color/monochrome TV receiving and trans-mitting facilities, for the fourth andfifth receive carriers, for commercialpower, and for a no -break power sys-tem, were also obtained.

Meetings were held with each of thecontractors who responded to the re-quest, to discuss in detail the technicalcontents of their proposals. At thesemeetings, the contractors were en -

PEDESTAL CONTROL / EQUIPMENT ROOM

__.[coup

®SPECTRUMNIALT)LII

TWIT

TRACK

MOOR TOASTONO Ma

KY

Ell EMI

a

nn

CONYarm

CONTROLCONSOLEmor-aORS/ALARMS

11114 CARRIERS

MOUOANT)I TV INO/VID

CARRIER

COW LEV.ADJUSTS

-19TP +K2CA

(REDUNDANTRR )PI ITV ONO/

VIDEOCANINES

-r

1 ORDERNun/ITT

IICROWAVELINE

L INNAMT

Fig. 1-System block diagram.

59

WATER TANK

PUMP HOUSE

EMBERWELL

BURIEDFUEL TANK

,c...:PEPTC TANK- - -

NW TOWER(140 H1

Fig. 2-Earth station site plan.

couraged to revise, improve, and stan-dardize their technical specificationsand reduce costs. The revisions werere-examined and the evaluation con-tinued.

On April 8, 1969, the contractors wereinvited again to review the technicalspecifications for the Guam earth sta-tion prepared by RCA Globcom, andalso to resubmit and revalidate theirproposals.On May 15, 1969, the Defense Com-munications Agency (DCA) awardedRCA Globcom a contract to supply a48 -kHz channel between Hawaii andGuam by November 1, 1969, for alter-nate use for voice and wideband appli-cations. To furnish these facilities,and to meet the critical operation date,RCA Globcom proposed the construc-tion of an earth station on Guam to beaccomplished in two phases:

Phase / would provide for a 48 -kHzwideband satellite channel, expandableto 24 channels, utilizing on an interimbasis major portions of the electronicequipment in the RCA transportableearth station available from the Thai-land installation; and the procurementand erection of a new 98.4 -ft -diameterantenna system and low -noise receiversystem.Phase ll would provide for completionof the permanent earth station and re-moval of transportable earth stationfacilities.

Performance characteristicsThe general performance characteris-tics of the permanent earth station are

PREVAILING

SITEACCESS RD.

ACCESS ROADS 46 23-04E

SATE ROUSE

NORMAL ANTENNALOOK ANGLE004' EAST OF NORTH I

contained in Table I. A simplifieddiagram of the earth station system isshown in Fig. 1; the site plan is shownin Fig. 2. The earth station is capableof transmitting 60 voice channels onone carrier, and receiving a total of60 channels distributed among fivecarriers. It is being expanded to 132voice -channel capacity. The station isalso capable of transmitting and re-ceiving both color and monochromeTV programs. The operating control inthe antenna pedestal, with equipmentand facilities, and a contiguous ad-ministration building are shown in Fig.3. The total combined floor area is ap-proximately 3600 sq. ft. Road, fence,

ais

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING

R CABLE DUCTAIR GOND PAD

site development, landscaping, andother station facilities are provided.

Since time was of the essence, the FCCauthorized RCA Globcom, Comsat,ITT Worldcom, and WUI to issue alimited letter of intent to ITT SpaceCommunications, Inc., the RCA Glob-com recommended contractor, to pro-ceed with portions of the Phase I

program. At the same time, the carrierswere advised to come to an agreementon engineering approach and technicaldesign prior to the FCC issuance of aconstruction permit. Ownership, man-agement, and operation of the stationalso had to be resolved, as did siteselection, RFI problems, location ofmicrowave systems and roads, andpower and construction problems. In-tensive negotiations produced agree-ment among the carriers, and pavedthe way for full effort on the construc-tion program.

The Pulantat Earth Station is jointlyowned by RCA Globcom (34%) , ITTWorldcom (8%) , WUI (8%) , andComsat (50%) . RCA Globcom is theOperations Manager; Comsat is theSystems Manager. As Operations Man-ager, RCA Globcom directed the con-struction and operates and maintainsthe earth station.

Construction

The construction portion of Phase Iproceeded rapidly, in accordance witha tight but coordinated schedule. Thefoundation for the 98.4 -ft -diameterLTV antenna system was the most

PORN ANT LOOK ANGLE(104 EAST OF NORTH

26'-6 R SV ELEV

MT PEDESTAL

POWERPANEL

FfANTENNA

60 Fig. 3-Equipment facilities layout.

critical item, as antenna erection de-pended on timely completion of thebase. The steel for the antenna wasfabricated while this was under way,and was shipped by air and sea to beavailable on -site as needed.

The Power building was constructedto meet the beneficial occupancy dateof August 29, 1969 and, as promisedby RCA Globcom, on -site power wasavailable on September 8. The Thai-land transportable earth station anddiesel generators arrived on schedule,and were located at the Pulantat site.A training program for the operationaland maintenance staff was initiatedimmediately, and, as a result of all

Table I-General performancecharacteristics.

Type of antenna Cassegrain fed,elevation -over -azimuthmount, with wheel andtrack

Diameter of shapedmain reflector 98.4 ftFocal length 34 ftPointing accuracy:

Normal (0.03)

Degraded (0.06)

30 mph steady wind to45 mph gusts (3 sigma)45 mph steady wind to70 mph gusts (3 sigma)

Tracking accuracy:Normal (0.01)

Degraded (0.02)

Operate in any positionDrive to stow positionAxis drive for bothelevation & azimuth:

SlewVelocityAcceleration

TrackingVelocityAcceleration

30 mph steady wind to45 mph gusts (3 sigma)45 mph steady wind to70 mph gusts (3 sigma)75 mph steady wind80 mph steady wind

0.3°/sec.0.3°/sec.,

0.002 to 0.3°/sec.0.01°/sec2

Azimuth angular limits:Operational ±170°Maximum ±172°

Elevation angular limits:Operational 0°-90°Maximum -2°-9r

Survival in stow 210 mph windsOperational frequencyBands:

TransmitReceive

5925 to 6425 MHz3700 to 4200 MHz

Antenna gain:TransmitReceive

Receiving system G/TPower output atantenna feedEmission:

InterimPermanent

63.0+20log (//6) dB60.3+201og (//4) dB(/ is frequency in GHz)41.3+20logio (//4) dB

5000 Watts

5.000 F940,000 F5/F9 maximumper carrier

Maximum deviation:InterimPermanent

±2.28 MHz±15 MHz

Minimum deviation:InterimPermanent

±300 kHz±300 kHz

Equivalent isotropicallyradiated power 100 dBWEquivalent isotropicallyradiated power inhorizontal plane 45 dBW/4 kHzPolarization capability Linear with any orienta-

tion and circular

this, the operational target date forPhase I of November 1, 1969 was met.

During construction, authority to pro-ceed with Phase II work to completethe permanent Pulantat Earth Stationwas granted by the Federal Communi-cations Commission on August 1,

1969. The work was subsequently re-leased to the general contractor. ThePulantat Earth Station became fullyoperational in May, 1970.

Microwave links

In addition to the responsibility forconstruction of the earth station, RCAGlobcom has sole responsibility forthe design, procurement, installation,operation, and maintenance of the twomicrowave terrestrial links (Fig. 4)from the originating/terminatingpoints of the signals to the earth sta-tion, as follows:

1) A one -hop microwave link betweenthe earth station and the Naval Com-munication Station (NCS) at Fine-gayan (12.4 miles). The microwaveantenna system at the earth station sitecomprises a periscope configurationutilizing a combination of a 4 -ft -diam-eter parabolic antenna and a flat, 8x12 -ft rectangular reflector. The parabolicantenna dish is situated on the perim-eter of the Operating Control Buildingapproximately 12 ft above ground, andis aligned with the 8x12 -ft reflector in-stalled on a 140 -ft tower. The electricalseparation between the antenna and re-flector, as well as the physical dimen-

lo HAWAII, JAPAN, PHILIPPINES

to AUSTRALIA, HONG KONG, -.aS E ASIA

304Co,

Ar,

'AGANA /

RCA GLOBCOM CTOit; /nitnrsi2,/ei

PUl ANTAT EARTH STATION

Sy 0 N A

sions of these radiators, have beenchosen to enhance the system gain andreliability. The periscope antenna sys-tem works in conjunction with a 6 -ft -diameter parabolic antenna installed onthe terminal building of the NCS.2) A line -of -sight microwave link be-tween the earth station and the RCAGlobcom Central Operating Office(CTO) in Agana. This system incor-porates a passive repeater to circum-vent high -elevation terrain. The passiverepeater is a flat, 8x12 -ft, rectangularreflector used in a far -field electricalconfiguration. The reflector is mountedon a 100 -ft tower located approxi-mately 0.4 miles from the CTO; 3.8miles from the earth station. A peri-scope antenna system is installed at theearth station similar to that describedabove for the microwave link to theNCS. On the CTO building, a 6 ft.parabolic antenna is installed to com-plete this system.

Competitive bids were requested fromvarious manufacturers for the micro-wave equipment, with an in-serviceoperational date to satisfy the criticaltest and operational schedules estab-lished for the earth station (Phase I).The microwave equipment is an RCAType CW-60, with hot -standby facili-ties. The microwave system operatesin the band 6575 to 6875 MHz, and isdesigned to handle long-term pro-jected traffic loads. Cable restorationplans were developed to incorporatesubmarine cable backup facilities viathe Guam microwave and earth sta-tion systems.

FINESAYANNeve CIPOIMONICOONI

/ Stela

Paapc Ocean

I 0 I 2 3 4 5 MILESIII !till

Fig. 4-RCA Type CW-60 microwave terrestrial links on Guam.61

International and satellitetransmissionW. C. Phillips

With the advent of syncronous (or fixed orbit) satellites to receive and re -transmittelevision signals. International Television system standards (such as SECAM. PAL,and NTSC) have been brought together to be, at times, transmitted in both directionssimultaneously. The transmission, technical evaluation, and standards conversion ofthese signals from an operational viewpoint, will be discussed in this article.

Warren C. Phillips, Mgr.TV Network Transmission OperationsNational Broadcasting CompanyNew York, N.Y.studied Electronic Engineering at RCA Institutes.New York and joined NBC in March, 1945 where hehas worked in all phases of Television TechnicalOperations. He was assigned to RCA Color de-velopment group in 1951 and he operated in allphases of color TV development-Field and Studiogroups. In 1968, Mr. Phillips was appointed Mana-

ger of Studio Master Control and Network Transmis-sion. He presently represents NBC on the Network.Transmission Committee and this Satellite Tech-nical Operation Committee.

rrlIE MODERN GEO-STATIONARY SAT-

ELLITE, such as the multi -channelINTELSAT 3-F2 shown above, is a farcry from the 1962 TELSTAR variety. Be-ing in a syncronous orbit, it orbits theearth in a stationary position relativeto a given receiving location on theEarth. However, small variations ofthe gravitational field of the Earth,Sun, and the Moon create slight longi-tudinal and latitudinal drifts of thesatellite. The technique used to com-pensate for these slight variations isreferred to a "station keeping." Pro-pulsion jets located on the satellite,controlled by RF signals from an Earthstation, correct this drift. It is interest-ing to note here that the East-West(longitudinal) station keeping is rela-tively large and rapid. The North -South (latitudinal) station keeping.maintaining the orbit close to theplane of the Equator, becomes moreimportant as the satellite ages. Tentimes the amount of station -keepingpropelant is used for latitudinal

Reprint RE -16-4-7Final manuscript received May 28, 1970.

changes than is used for longitudinalmovements. This station -keeping re-quirement [using fuel store aboard thesatellite] plus the progressive deterio-ration of solar panels [the cell struc-ture used to convert sunlight to electricenergy] limits, to a large extent, theusable life expectancy of the satelliteto about five years. Further advancesin design and operation could extendthis life expectancy in future satellitesto seven to ten years.

Operational problems

The satellite, as used in the broad-caster's daily operations, can presentspecial technical operation considera-tions. For example, film news storiesare often transmitted from London toNew York via the 3-F6 Satellite, withthe transmitting station at GoonhillyDowns, West country of England andthe receiving station at Etam, WestVirginia. This type of transmission isusually pre -taped at NBC -New Yorkduring the open Network time be-tween 5:30-6:30 PM EAST, and usedas part of the Huntley -Brinkley Newsshow. Fig. 1 shows a typical routingof the signal. This film is transmittedto NBC in 525/60 NTSC Color Stan-dards. Due to monetary considerations,the satellite is ordered up to NBC -NYapproximately ten minutes beforeusage. A two-way Production Co-ordi-nation Circuit is provided betweenBBC in London and Broadcast Opera-tion Control at NBC -NY to coordinatethe start and stop time of the satelliteservice, plus any program coordina-tion of the incoming film or multi -filmpackages. The TV master control, atthe same time, is using that ten min-utes prior to program time for techni-cal evaluation of the incoming signal.Their main concern is monochromevs chromanance level, phase shift, andthe signal-to-noise ratio.

Signal to noise and phase shiftimprovements

'Hie latest satellites have improvedimmensely over the earlier 1967/1968variety. Signal-to-noise ratio is themost dramatic improvement to thegeneral viewer. For example, it oftenis difficult to determine, on a colormonitor, the difference in a color -barsignal being generated in London andour own "in house" color -bar presen-tation. Phase shift has also improved.

62

No longer do we have the severeburst-to-chroma phase errors of theearly days.

Signal location identification

The problem of identification of theexact origination of a satellite test sig-nal is still with us. For instance, we atNBC master control would assumethat the color bars were coming fromthe BBC studios in London. It may bethat they are, in fact, originating inParis, Rome, or Cologne and that BBCin London was only the transmissiongateway for this test signal. Precisesignal location identification must beaccomplished by the use of some formof internationally agreed upon verticalinternal test signal that will differ insome form from country to country.This would allow technicians to pin-point technical problems with greateraccuracy and conserve expensive sat-ellite usage.

Audio considerations

At this point, let us assume that thevideo quality has been checked tech-nically and found to be acceptable.We now must check the accompany-ing audio for level and distortion. Asthe audio that is transmitted with thepicture, via satellite, is diplexed onpicture carrier, the syncronization of

picture to sound is not a problem.They both travel the same electricalpath -80,000 km. However, when aback-up or emergency audio signal viaterrestial facilities is required, a defi-nite lip -sync problem exists due to theshorter (4500 km) electrical path(underseas cable) facility. This terres-tial signal now must be delayed tomatch the satellite audio signal. Avariable -delay audio tape (continuousloop) device is used for this require-ment. This means that all terrestialaudio circuits that carry the sameaudio content as the satellite-diplexedaudio must be delayed approximately1/3 to 1/2 second.

Sync problems

Our next technical consideration isthe horizontal and vertical phase rela-tionship of the syncronizing pulses.Here, a very interesting phenomenaoccurs. The satellite itself, although ina geo-stationary condition, is notstanding still with relation to theEarth. As discussed earlier in this arti-cle, there are certain longitudinal andlatitudinal movements of the satellite.This condition creates a definite dop-pler effect which is very evident in thesubcarrier frequency (3.579.545 MHzNTSC specification). As this effect ispresent in all geo-stationary satellites,it is impossible to phase the horizontal

AT ST

SATELLITEGEO-STATIONARY ORBIT

TERRESTRIAL FACILITIES

AT BT

NEW YORK

,..--;: cliELPHOESNE COIT

NBC-TVMASTER

CONTROL

YORK

TERRESTRIAL FACILITIES

VIA BPO

BOUNDEARTH STATIO

GOONNILLY

VIDEO

BBC

t ONDONNTSC

DOWNS,

ENGLANDC R NTSC

1I I

VIDEO/ SOUNDLSACK -UP SOUND CABLE

TWO-WAY ENG/PROO

/ COORDINATION CIRCUIT

Ni CSTUDIO

BO,

POSSIBLE REMOTE 'EEDSFROM ROME, PAM!, ETCTO BBC VIDEO S'ANDARDSCONVERTER - PAL SECAMTO NTSC

BROADCAST OPERATIONS

CONTROL

CABLE 1

DELAY _J

NBC

MASTER

CONTROL

TO NBC NETWORK

Fig. 1-Signal routing between NBC Master Control in New York and the BBC studios inLondon.

and vertical sync of our TV plant pulsesystem to the satellite sync componentdue to the constant frequency changeof the incoming satellite subcarrier.

This means that all live incoming sat-ellite pickups, unless used as a gen-locsource, will cause a picture roll duringvideo switching time. This, of course,is aggravated when fed to video tape,due to a 4 to 7 second machine synclock -up time requirement. Gen-loc isnot always possible. Why? Most ofthe time, satellite inserts are of shortduration, 5 to 10 minutes. If NBC inNY is in a gen-loc mode at that time,loc will be lost as the satellite feed isdropped, causing severe sync prob-lems to the entire plant. Remember,satellite pickups are bought on aminute -by -minute basis, and cannot beheld just to supply sync pulses for theentire program period.

Solutions to the sync problem

Two solutions to this problem can beconsidered. First, NBC pretapes asmuch satellite material as possible.This allows the video tape machine tobe synchronized and phased on play-back into the show, eliminating rollsand break-up. This system, of course,loses the live feeling and is not themost desirable. The second solution isto use an all -electronic translator. Thisdevice could receive a 525/60 NTSCcolor signal from a satellite and elec-tronically convert the incoming syncto coincide with plant sync. The satel-lite video feed could then be handledas any other plant sync. Dissolves, in-serts, and switches would no longer bea problem. A step further would be tohave this video translater be a stan-dards converter as well. We now couldreceive PAL, SECAM, or NTSC colorfrom any area of the world and handlethis as a standard NTSC plant sync -locked signal.

This translator/standards converterconcept is being considered at NBC.Several methods and types of equip-ment are being studied by our Engi-neering Department. I feel confidentthat before too long, this device willbe available for our daily operations.The AT&T Company has already beenalerted via the STOC and NTC Com-mittees and are studying the problemsthat will exist in the transmission ofthe PAL-SECAM color system overexisting terrestial facilities.

63

The evolution anddevelopment of RCAInstitutesH. Fezer

From its original concept as a school to train wireless operators, RCA Institutes hasevolved during the past 60 years into a many -faceted organization. Training and educa-tion is provided across a wide spectrum, from artisan to graduate engineering level.The number of students has risen from a handful in 1909 to 20,000 in 1969.

WHEN Guglielmo Marconi's wire-less telegraph burst upon the

scene at the beginning of this century,a new method of communication, capa-ble of spanning the oceans, was born.But the practical application of thisrevolutionary invention required train-ing for a skill never before needed.Hence, in 1909, the Marconi Institutewas established to train the new breedof wireless operator. David Sarnoff-among the first in this novel occupation-became a member of the faculty inthe early days of this school.

The instruction was devoted to thetraining of shipboard and shore -stationmarine telegraphy operators to meetthe rapidly growing need for this newskill. Great drama was a part of thisoccupation in many instances. Possiblythe best -remembered event is the lossof the "unsinkable" Titanic in 1912,when David Sarnoff spent many hoursat his station on top of the WanamakerBuilding, receiving and relaying newsof the gigantic disaster.

In the aftermath of World War I, theU.S. government, concerned that wire-less communication had been under thecontrol of a foreign power (Great Brit-ain) , sought the formation of an Amer-ican company to provide the desiredcontrol in the event of a future emer-gency. This resulted in the formationof the Radio Corporation of Americain 1919; the Marconi Institute becamea part of RCA and was renamed RadioInstitute of America. In 1929 theschool was incorporated as a whollyowned subsidiary of RCA, under thename "RCA Institutes". Presently, in-struction is offered by seven operating

Reprint RE -16-4-17Final manuscript received June 24, 1970.

divisions, each serving specific needs ofindustry, the government, and the pub-lic at large. The seven divisions thatmake up RCA Institutes are:

Resident SchoolHome Study SchoolTV Studio SchoolInstitute for Professional DevelopmentRCA Technical InstituteInternational OperationsInstitute for Custom Education

Board of Technical Advisors

All of the educational and training pro-grams of RCA Institutes require theapproval of the Board of Technical Ad-visers. The Board not only functions inan "advise and consent" capacity, butalso keeps the school abreast of newtechnological developments. Membersof the Board are distinguished scien-tists, engineers, and managers repre-senting various technical research andeducational activities of RCA. TheBoard meets quarterly to consult oncurrent and proposed educational pro-grams of RCA Institutes. Dr. Alfred N.Goldsmith, Honorary Vice Presidentand Senior Technical Consultant ofRCA, serves as Chairman of the Boardof Technical Advisers.

Resident School

The Resident School is situated at 320West 31st Street in New York City. Itoccupies a four-story building with113,000 square feet of air-conditionedclassrooms, laboratories, offices, a tech-nical library, a cafeteria, and lounges.This facility provides classroom in-struction to approximately 4,000 stu-dents in day and evening classes.

The Resident School offers severaleducational programs to the public onboth the college and occupational

RCA Institute headquarters in New York City,providing classroom instruction to approximately4,000 students in day and evening classes.

levels. The most advanced program atthe Resident School is the college -levelElectronics Technology T-3 Program.This two-year engineering technologycurriculum, which stresses communi-cation and computer technology, is ac-credited by the Engineers' Council forProfessional Development. Graduatesof the T-3 Program are principallyemployed as "engineering technicians"-a title encompassing a wide varietyof industrial occupation categoriessuch as research aide, technical aide,engineering aide, and associate engi-neer. Many graduates of the T-3 Pro-gram elect to continue their educationtowards a baccalaureate degree. Ad-vanced Standing credit is given atmany colleges and universities, includ-ing the Massachusetts Institute ofTechnology, Polytechnic Institute ofBrooklyn, Yale, Columbia, and NewYork University.

On the occupational level, the ResidentSchool offers an 18 -month programtitled "Electronics Circuits and Sys-tems (V-7) " and a 9 -month program inTV Servicing. These shorter curriculaare designed to prepare the student foroccupational specialities as an elec-tronic technician or TV serviceman.

The school also offers many specialprograms ranging from industrial elec-tronics to computer programming. Inaddition, bilingual teachers provide in-struction in Spanish to assist Hispano-American students. Graduates of RCAInstitutes are in great demand by in-dustry for all types of specializedpositions. In the last five years, theResident School has supplied industrywith over 3,000 trained personnel. Ofa recent graduating class, over 90% ofthe students were offered jobs throughthe school's Placement Office even be-fore graduation. The Placement Officemaintains strong ties with industry andhas over 100 different companies re -

64

cruiting at the school, including suchbluechip giants as Bell Labs, GeneralElectric, IBM, RCA, Western Electric,and Zerox.

The role of the technician in industryhas become increasingly important.The nation's need for broader utiliza-tion of engineering manpower, coupledwith the "technological explosion,"provides technicians with greater op-portunities for more responsible work.Graduates of the school are employedaround the globe installing, operating,and maintaining electronics equipmentranging from computers and missile in-strumentation to radio and TV broad-casting and receiving units. Many workin laboratories assisting scientists orengineers with vital research and de-velopment activities. Much of the tech-nician's work is concerned with testingnew devices, taking electrical measure-ments, monitoring data, recording data,and analyzing the results. Some jobsmay be more specialized, involving de-sign, breadboarding, and testing ofexperimental circuits.

Although the school's administrationrecognizes the value of a broad educa-tion, the Resident School's educationalprograms necessarily focus on special-ized technical subjects. The curriculaare, therefore, devoted mainly to tech-nical courses, enabling the student togain the degree of competency anddepth of understanding required byindustry.

The explosion of new scientific knowl-edge makes it imperative to maintainall curricula up to date. The programsare revised frequently according to in-dustry's needs. Major revisions in cur-riculum are made at intervals of aboutfive years, and in some cases soonerwhen technological developments de-mand a faster change. Minor revisionsof course, are made continually. In-struction is given in both classroomand laboratory sessions. Each labora-tory is equipped with a variety of testequipment, components, specially con-structed chassis for instructional pur-poses, and commercial equipment. Forsome classes, more than $75.000 worthof electronic apparatus is needed toequip a single laboratory. Laboratorymanuals are prepared by the ResidentSchool's instructional staff. Textbooksused in classrooms are standard texts,ranging in level from occupational to

collegiate, and, in some cases, authoredby Resident School instructors. Exten-sive use is made of audio-visual aidsand demonstrators.The programs are carefully planned sothat the student progresses in logicalstages from simple concepts to compli-cated circuitry. In the T-3 Program,extensive use is made of mathematicson the calculus level. Coordination ofclassroom and laboratory work en-ables the student to apply his newlyacquired theoretical knowledge topractical problems related to design.development, and operation of elec-tronic apparatus.All of the Resident School's educa-tional programs of study are approvedby both the Board of Technical Ad-visers and the New York State Depart-ment of Education. In addition, theschool and all of its instructors arelicensed by the New York State De-partment of Education.

Composition of the student body

The Resident School student bodyrepresents a great diversity of socio-economic and geographic backgrounds.Students come from a majority of thestates in America and from countriesthroughout the world. The present en-rollment includes 760 students from77 foreign nations. The proportion offoreign students at Institutes (about20%) is one of the highest in an Amer-ican technical institute, college, or uni-versity.In addition to the self -sponsored do-mestic and foreign students, the Resi-dent School has students sponsored byvarious federal, state, municipal, andprivate agencies, including students ofvarious age groups, who are sponsoredunder the Federal Manpower Develop-ment Retraining Act. Commissionedand non-commissioned officers spon-sored by the U.S. Coast Guard enrollin the T-3 Program to obtain the highlytechnical background required by theincreasing use of complex and sophis-ticated ship and shore electronicsequipment. Handicapped students at-tend under sponsorship of the Divi-sions of Vocational Rehabilitation ofseveral neighboring states. The UnitedStates Agency for International Devel-opment sponsors foreign students in itscontinuing program of providing tech-nical assistance for developing coun-tries.

The intermixing of ages, cultures andnationalities, which is characteristic ofthe school, deeply influences the lifeof each student. Through association,students are exposed to a wide varietyof cultural values that broaden theirinterests concurrently with their tech-nical development. The result is anacademic environment, unusual for itsdiversity, that acts to inculcate in thestudent the principles of successfulhuman relationships and enriches hiseducational experience.

Composition of the faculty

In the more than a half -century of itsexistence, the Resident School has de-veloped a philosophy growing out ofthe experience of its faculty and ad-ministration, and one to which its en-tire operation is attuned. The core ofthis philosophy is the conviction that,given certain prerequisites, humanbeings of diverse ages and backgroundscan and will work together effectively,thereby growing in knowledge, skill,and maturity far beyond normal expec-tations.

The first prerequisite is a faculty ofmature individuals possessing superiortechnical knowledge, enthusiasm fortheir subject, skill in the art of teach-

Harold Fezer, DirectorEducational ServicesRCA Institutes. Inc.New York, New Yorkreceived the EE in 1933 from the Ingenieur Schule.Konstanz, Germany. Mr. Fezer held various posi-tions in industry before becoming an instructor atRCA Institutes in 1945. In 1950. he became Seniorinstructor in charge of the Evening School. In1954, Mr. Fezer was appointed Director of Trainingin the Resident School and advanced to tne posi-tion of Director in 1958. He was appointed to hispresent position in September 1970. Mr. Fezer isa Member of ASEE n^d IEEE.

65

ing, sensitivity to the problems of thestudents, and conscientious concernfor their progress. Such a faculty func-tions best with the guidance of an ad-ministration of similar qualities andexperience. The faculty of RCA In-stitutes consists of highly qualifiedpersonnel with extensive practicalbackground. The majority of the fac-ulty members have earned baccalau-reate or higher degrees. Every instructoris required to have industrial experi-ence to be licensed. Teaching assign-ments are made on the basis of theindividual faculty member's specialtraining and talents.

Faculty morale, enthusiasm, and effec-tiveness are incident to the adminis-trative climate. The administration'scontinuing search for more effectivemethods of teaching, rapid assimila-tion of new knowledge into the cur-ricula, and emphasis on self -appraisal,are evidence of a policy stressing ex-cellence.

The second prerequisite is an atmo-sphere that brings out the best effort ofeach student. It is well recognized thatstudents learn in proportion to theeffort that they can be stimulated toexert. The faculty, therefore, makesheavy demands on the time, the mentalresources, and the character of ourstudents.

A Third essential is a curriculum de-voted almost exclusively to technicalsubjects, enabling the student to focuson his major interest. The school rec-ognizes that many technically orientedstudents have yet to be convinced ofthe value of cultural studies, and,therefore, lack the motivation to pur-sue them with profit. By directing thestudent's efforts along paths on whichhe can make the most rapid progress,he is equipped in the shortest possibletime with the superior technical knowl-edge that will gain him both respectand the means of rewarding self-sup-port.

These three criteria are, therefore, re-garded as prerequisites to a morecomplete self -development. We haveobserved that our students mature andbroaden their interests concurrentlywith their technical development. Inpart, this results from association withmature instructors and fellow students;in part, it results from the student'sgrowing sense of competence in his

66

chosen field, which sharpens his aware-ness of his place in our society. By thetotality of their experience, RCA In-stitute graduates have acquired farmore than technical knowledge. Theyhave acquired confidence in them-selves, confidence in the future, and adetermination to continue their self-improvement.

Home Study School

The Home Study School was organizedin 1948 and became the second majordivision of RCA Institutes. Its originalobjective was to help industry obtain agreater number of TV servicemen re-quired in a rapidly expanding field. Inresponse to the need of the RCA Ser-vice Company, a TV servicing coursewas prepared by staff members ofRCA Institutes. Soon thereafter, thiscourse was offered to the general pub-lic. It was discovered, however, thatmany who wished to work in TVservicing did not have adequate train-ing in electronics fundamentals. Abasic electronics course was intro-duced to meet this need for the manythroughout the country who could notavail themselves of Resident Schoolinstruction. In a few years, thousandsof students were engaged in thesestudies with the Home Study School.

The growth of the Home Study Schoolparalleled the growth of the electronicsindustries. By 1963, its curriculum hadexpanded to include courses in colorTV, communications, transistors, au-tomation and industrial electronics,automatic controls, digital techniquesin industry, nuclear instrumentation,drafting, and computer programming.Some tens of thousands of students areengaged in pursuing study in theseareas and thousands are graduatingeach year.

The reputation of RCA Institutes'home study curriculum spread through -

Home -study student using an oscilloscope totest the transistorized AM receiver he hasassembled.

out the world, and thousands of stu-dents from many foreign countrieshave enrolled during the past decade.In addition, industry and governmen-tal agencies seeking trained, skilledtechnicians, have turned to HomeStudy to help meet this need.

The rapid growth of knowledge, skills,and understanding in electronics hasmotivated the school to review itscourse material periodically. As aresult, almost no course now offeredcompletely resembles in content thatwhich was offered in the early andmiddle 1960's. New and revisedcourses in color TV, semiconductors,digital electronics, solid state technol-ogy, communications, and computerprogramming have recently been intro-duced. The courses have been writtenby experts and, in many cases, teachersin electronics. As an example of mod-ern presentation of material, program-med instruction techniques are used inthe basic electronics and computerprogramming courses to facilitatelearning.

In some of the courses, the theorylessons are accompanied by experi-ment lessons and kit construction. Inthis way, the student has his under-standing of the theory strengthenedand reinforced by laboratory work athome. In addition, he develops manip-ulative skills as he experiments andconstructs several pieces of practicalequipment, such as a multimeter, sig-nal generator, oscilloscope, and abreadboard, transistorized, super -het-erodyne, AM radio receiver. In the TVcourses, he can also construct a black -and -white or a color TV receiver.

In the basic courses. Industrial Prac-tices Lessons enable the beginning stu-dent to put the theory he learns intopractice quickly, at home and on thejob. For those students already work-ing in electricity or electronics, ad-vanced courses are offered by theHome Study School to help them keepup-to-date with new technology. Inthis way they gain security in theirpresent work and gain additionalknowledge and competency to movetoward better paying positions.

In addition to its location in NewYork City, the Home Study School hasoffices in Mexico City where coursesare offered in Spanish. Spanish-speak-ing students in the United States, Mex-

ico, Central, and South America andelsewhere may study electronics intheir native tongue. The Mexico Cityschool supplies them with study ma-terials and technical services. Meetinglocal demand, classroom instructionhas been added recently to serve thosestudents who desire to be instructedin this manner. For the convenience ofour Canadian Students and to elimi-nate costs and delays due to customduties, the Home Study School coursesare offered by RCA Ltd., Montreal.The success of home study is depend-ent on the acceptance of the philoso-phy by individuals and industry leadersthat there are many ways to obtain aneducation or training in any subject.Studying at home, guided by well -prepared material and instructors, atone's own pace, is one of the moreeffective ways of accomplishing thatobjective.

TV Studio School

The RCA Institutes TV Studio Schoolwas opened to the general public inJanuary of 1961 and became the thirdmajor division of RCA Institutes. Itsfunction is to provide training in tele-vision production, directing and studiooperations. Originally created to servethe needs of radio and TV networkmanagement, which it still does, itsmajor concern is to serve the generalpublic. In a fully equipped TV studio,located at 1600 Broadway, New YorkCity, students gain practical experi-ence on broadcast equipment. Everystudent, upon completion, has han-dled all studio facilities, such ascameras, sound booms, audio con-sole, turntables, tape machines, videoswitcher, and telecine projection. Stu-dents also gain experience in the set-ting up of lights and scenery for avariety of shows. Another requirementis that each student direct formats forsimple and complex dramatic showsemploying professional actors. Class-room lectures, given by instructorswho are professionals in their respec-tive fields, prepare the student in otherareas as well. For example, make-up,costuming, sales, and graphic arts aretopics given by guest instructors.

The total length of the course is 375hours. Approximately 150 hours arespent in the studio; 150 hours are inclassroom lectures; and the remaining75 hours stress film -editing techniques.

Staging of a television program at the TVStudio School.

Since film plays an important role inthe broadcasting industry, students ob-tain practical experience in editing16mm film for broadcasting. Although16mm film news editing is their majoreffort, features and documentaries arealso included in their training. Thecourse is conducted in both day andevening sessions. The student com-pletes the day program in 15 weeks,attending 25 hours each week. Theevening student attends on an averageof 81/3 hours a week, attending twonights one week, and three nights onthe alternate week for 45 weeks. Theeducational requirement for admit-tance is a high school diploma.

Students come from all parts of theworld. In addition, many organiza-tions have used the TV Studio Schoolfacilities. Management people fromthe three major networks as well asmany local stations in New York andthroughout the country have sent theirpersonnel for special programs. Col-leges have also sent those studentstaking communication arts courses fora highly intensified, practical program.

The graduate is fully qualified toseek employment in the commercialbroadcasting field and in educationalTV. Advertising agencies, productionhouses, CATV and other closed circuitinstallations employ the TV StudioSchool graduate.

Institute for ProfessionalDevelopment

In 1964, the Institute for ProfessionalDevelopment, (IPD) located at Clark,N.J., became the fourth division ofRCA Institutes. Initially a departmentin the Resident School, it began byoffering educational programs to threedifferent groups of engineering per-sonnel: the engineering graduate witha firm background in fundamentals but

lacking experience in applied engineer-ing; the engineer transferred to a newjob and needing more specific designinformation in the new field; and theexperience engineer who is interestedin keeping up with the state-of-the-art.The typical educational background ofthe participants encompasses the fol-lowing: 68% have as their highestdegree a bachelor's; 21% a master's;8% a doctorate.

The educational programs currentlybeing offered are:

Logic design (5 days)-provides thenumerical and matrix tools requiredto select the most straightforward,practical approach to digital circuitdesign. The Mahoney Map and desig-nation numbers are thoroughly cov-ered.

Digital systems engineering (5 days)-provides an overview of contem-porary engineering techniques forsystems design. Control circuits, me-mory system types, and interfacing ofhardware are examined.

Digital communications (5 days)-develops the practical design criteriaof digital communication hardware.Various modulation techniques andoptimum coding schemes are pre-sented. The practical applications ofinformation theory in the field of digi-tal communications are also explained.

Integrated circuits, bipolar and MOS(3 days)-emphasizes the selectionand specification of circuit types. Thestandards and specifications used inindustry are examined. The design lim-itations in both linear and digital typesare discussed.

Optical systems engineering (5 days)-offers new and practical approachesto optical systems design for both engi-

Engineers examining Integrated -circuit sam-ples at the Institute for Professional Devel-opment.

l i7

neers and physicists. First and thirdorder of geometrical optics are han-dled via the direct method. The mod-em, matrix approach to polarized lightis thoroughly developed.

The characteristics of these programsdiffer markedly from those offered byuniversities. Where the university pro-grams are theoretical, IPD emphasizespractical applications. University pro-grams stress principles where IPDstresses techniques. IPD programs aremore specialized; consequently, thismay be viewed as a vertical -type edu-cational program as compared to thetraditional horizontal -type program.The objective of these programs is toincrease the productivity of the engi-neer when he returns to his job. Con-sequently, the school's goals are short -

ranged in comparison to that of theuniversity.

These programs require a highly struc-tured, fast presentation. This is ac-complished by utilizing a dual lectureapproach. The principal instructor sitsat a projectum and presents the sub-ject matter systematically. During thepresentation, a second instructorserves as a monitor. He carefully ob-serves the reaction of the class to theconcepts being taught. If he noticesany perplexity or lack of comprehen-sion, he politely interjects, at an ap-propriate moment, another approachto the idea or principle being devel-oped. His support must be carefullytimed to reinforce the efforts of theprincipal instructor without destroyingthe continuity of the presentation.Comment is offered only when it willenhance the presentation and improvethe understanding of the subject beingtaught. The role of each teacher isinterchanged periodically to providea change of style and pace while main-taining the continuity of the presenta-tion.Lecture notes are uniquely designed torelieve the student of much of the bur-den of note -taking. The right-handpage of the note book is reserved forstudent comments in conjunction withthe material as it is presented in out-line form on the left-hand page. Alldrawings and visuals shown on theoverhead screen are also reproduced inthe lecture notes. This permits a rapidbut methodical presentation of the ma-terial with the student modifying thenotes to his personal understanding.

Computer training at RCA Technical In-stitute.

Each course is developed in consulta-tion with the RCA Institutes' Board ofTechnical Advisers. In addition, nu-merous contacts are made with engi-neers in many companies to determinethe course content. After all the pre-liminary research has been completed,the material is assembled by the samepeople who will present the program.The seminars are offered at 24 loca-tions throughout the U.S. on a regularschedule. Banquet and convention fa-cilities of hotels and motels are usedfor the presentation. The programsare also offered to various customersat their own facilities.

Industrial organizations sending par-ticipants to IPD seminars number over1,000. Universities also send a numberof professors, department heads, andresearch people. Over 100 governmentagencies have sent participants, in-cluding a large number from the U.S.Navy and the National Aeronauticsand Space Administration. In short,the programs offered by IPD centeron the new and expanding technolo-gies. They are prepared to increasethe productivity of the engineer in sev-eral highly specialized areas within arelatively short period of time. Over3,000 engineers are expected to at-tend the courses offered by IPD dur-ing 1970.

RCA Technical Institute

In 1960, the Electronic Data Process-ing Service Division (EDPS) of RCAformed the EDPS Adult EducationSchool in Cherry Hill, N.J. The pur-pose of the school was training inthe repair and maintenance of elec-tronic data processing machinery. In1961, the name of this training organi-zation was changed to RCA TechnicalInstitute. In 1966, the school becamethe fifth division of RCA Institutes.In September of 1969, the TechnicalInstitute opened an extension schoolin Upper Darby, Pa.

The curriculum of RCA TechnicalInstitutes emphasizes computer tech-nology. Most students are enrolled inthe one-year Electronic Computer Sys-tems Program. The objective of thisprogram is to train high school gradu-ates for careers as electronics techni-cians in the computer industry. Thecourse material includes basic elec-tronics, logic circuitry, an introductionto compter machine language, and ex-tensive laboratory training in com-puter circuits, with experience inwiring computer logic projects in theschool's computer laboratory.

Another of the programs offered isBasic Electronics, which is 400 hoursin length and covers basic electronicstheory and the fundamentals of trigo-nometry and algebra. Both the Elec-tronic Computer Systems and the BasicElectronics programs are offered inthe day school.

In addition to the electronics -orientedday school courses, evening andSaturday courses in computer pro-gramming are offered. Fundamentalsof Digital Computer ProgrammingCourse provides an introduction toprogramming language using the RCA301 Assembly Language as a Model.This program is taught 6 hours a weekfor 16 weeks. After finishing thiscourse, the student may go on to theAdvanced Programming (COBOL)or the Spectra 70 -IBM 360 Basic As-sembly Language Programs. Theseprograms run 60 and 120 hours, re-spectively, and qualify the student asa junior programmer or trainee.

The programs offered by RCA Tech-nical Institute are approved by theVeterans Administration, the Man-power Development and TrainingAuthority, and the New JerseyState Rehabilitation Commission. Theschool is licensed as both a TechnicalSchool and Business School by theNew Jersey State Department of Edu-cation, and the Department of Educa-tion, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.

The total enrollment of the school isapproximately 750 students, 70% ofwhom are enrolled in the ElectronicComputer Systems Program. The in-structors, who have many years ofexperience in their respective fields,attend regular cross -training sessionsin the courses offered to insure thataccurate and standard course materi-

68

als are covered. Cross -training pro-vides an excellent opportunity forinstructors to review and discusscourse material continually and tomake changes whenever necessary.Students are prepared for job place-ment by review tests, lectures onproper dress and conduct for inter-views, and practice interviews withteachers sitting in as interviewers.After counseling on weak points, thestudents are ready for actual inter-views with industrial recruiters. Vari-ous companies are invited to talk toclasses which are about to graduate.Each class, before graduation, has theopportunity of talking with representa-tives of several companies, such asIBM, RCA, General Electric, SperryRand, and Honeywell. The studentsare tested and interviewed by the com-panies for jobs as computer techni-cians and for other related jobs. TheTechnical Institute prides itself in itsexcellent placement record: 95% ofgraduating students were successfullyplaced in jobs in 1969. The placementservices are offered to graduates of theschool, regardless of how long ago theygraduated.

The 11 classrooms, 3 laboratories, andadministrative offices occupy 12,700square feet of RCA's Cherry Hillbuilding complex. The Upper DarbySchool has 5 classrooms, 2 laborato-ries, and cover a total area of 4,600square feet.

International Operations

International Operations was estab-lished in 1970 and became the sixthoperating division of RCA Institutes.It was created primarily to fill twoimportant needs of foreign govern-ments, industries, and organizations:

1) Develop technical education andschool management programs.2) Act as consultants in modernizingexisting technical educational systems.

Representing RCA Institutes' world-wide educational resources, the divi-sion has undertaken a number ofspecific educational and business ac-tivities. Focusing on all levels of sci-entific and technical fields of speciali-zation. International Operations ispresently involved in:

1) Consultation and educational projectplanning.2) Educational program and systems de-sign.

3) Educational project development andmanagement.4) Designing, procuring, and installingschool laboratory and shop equipment,ETV Systems, and audio-visual aids.5) Training instructors in modern teach-ing techniques.6) Establishing and licensing foreign -based home study operations.

Active in most every part of the world,including Europe, Africa, Central andLatin America, and the Far East, thedivision recently provided effectiveguidance in the development of a newand modern telecommunication train-ing and research institute in the Mid-dle East.

A study completed for a private organi-zation for the establishment of a Poly-technic Institute in Europe has beenaccepted, and RCA Institutes is nownegotiating with the organization anda foreign government for its imple-mentation. It provides for RCA In-stitutes to act as managing consultantsin the establishment of the PolytechnicInstitute, which will specialize in eightdisciplines: electrical; mechanical;chemical; metallurgical; naval; agri-cultural; business administration; andindustrial arts. The Polytechnic Insti-tute will concern itself primarily withthree levels of achievements; highschool diplomas; technical certificates;and college degrees.

It is expected that RCA Institutes'International Operations will gaingreater recognition as foreign coun-tries come to realize the importance ofhigh -quality technical education fortheir people.

Institute for Custom Education

The Institute for Custom Education,located in New York City, becamethe seventh operating division of RCAInstitutes in 1970. Originally knownas the School of Special Programs, itwas established in 1967 as a depart-ment of the Resident School. It pro-vides specialized education and train-ing to government, industry, and othergroups interested in upgrading theirtechnical, sales, or management per-sonnel. Each training program isdesigned specifically to satisfy the op-erational requirements of the sponsor-ing agency; and its technical level andmethod of presentation are adjusted soas to be consistent with the prior expe-rience and training of the participants.

Instruction may be conducted at theschool's facility or at a location desig-nated by the customer.

Past clients have included such organi-zations as Admiral Corp., WesternUnion International, Hoffman La-Roche Corp., the U.S. Army SignalCorps, Westinghouse Corp., the Fed-eral Government under the ManpowerDevelopment Training Act, the Na-tional Alliance of Businessmen, andthe National Broadcasting Company.

Past training programs have includedall areas of electronics, ranging frombasic electronics and radio and TVservicing for economically underpriv-ileged individuals to semiconductordevices, advanced theory and designprocedures of communications equip-ment, and computers. Specializedaudio-visual programs have been de-veloped in various areas of electronics,including basic electronics, semicon-ductor devices, and motor and gener-ator trouble -shooting, wiring, andrepair.

The outstanding staff of training spe-cialists is capable of devoting its ex-perience and know-how to providetraining in various modes and on vari-ous levels from the most basic materialto highly complex areas in circuitryand equipment. The mode can be inthe programmed format, accompaniedby slides and workbook; it can be inthe format of lectures and demonstra-tions; it can be hands-on in a speciallydesigned laboratory; or, in consulta-tion with the client, in a form mostsuited to the needs of his personnelrequiring indoctrination, upgrading,or updating. Considered one of themost versatile and flexible operationsof RCA Institutes, the Institute forCustom Education now includes train-ing programs for clerk -typists, stenog-raphers, and teletype operators.

Students at an Institute for Custom Educationclassroom being trained as radio -TV re-pairmen.

69

New schlieren light valve fortelevision projectionDr. J. A. van Raalte

A new television projection system is described. The heart of this system is a deform -able reflective target (light valve) consisting of a thin metal film suppor ed in closeproximity to a glass substrate. In operation a video -modulated electron oeam scansthe target and deforms the metal film analogously to the intensity of the '.ideo signal.These deformations control the amount of light from a schlieren projector that falls onthe screen. The mechanical and electrical performance of the deformable target andoperation of a specially designed off -axis, reflective schlieren projector are discussed.Display results for the total system are presented.

LARGE-AREA, PROJECTION TELEVI-

SION DISPLAYS have not yet foundwide useage in the consumer marketdue to unattractive compromises ofcomplexity, performance and cost ofavailable systems. Standard kinescopesare practically limited to sizes below-0.2 m' (25 in. dia.)Commercially available projectionsystems fall into two categories:light -generating and light -controlling(light -valve) systems. Light -generat-ing systems such as projection kine-scopes are generally dim; they requirehigh voltage operation and complexoptics due to the isotropic emission ofthe phosphor; and they are costly. Thebest projection display is produced bya light valve, such as the eidophor:'here an external light source is spa-tially modulated by an oil film whichis rippled inside a cathode ray tube.However, this system has beenplagued by complexity, high cost, andcathode deterioration due to the pres-ence of the oil film in vacuum. Re-cently an improved version of theeidophor system' was announced thatis said to have extended life in a

sealed -off tube but it is still costly.

This paper describes a new light valveaimed at producing a bright, large -area television display. This systemuses an electron -beam -addressed de -formable target similar to onedescribed earlier by Auphan' that con-tains no organic materials and there-fore promises long life in a simplesealed -off tube.

TargetThe light -valve target consists of athin metal film stretched over a sup -Reprint RE -16-4-14Final manuscript received April 29, 1970

port grid in close proximity to a glasssubstrate as shown in Fig. 1. The sizeof the target (5x 5 cm') and the sup-port -grid -spacing (50 to 100 /./,) arechosen to produce standard televisionresolution or better using commer-cially available electron guns (RCA5TP4). The use of an electron gunwith better resolution and a finer tar-get structure would provide betterresolution or similar resolution insmaller targets. A larger target, on theother hand, would require larger op-tics in the projector, thereby makingit more expensive.

TRANSVERSESLOTS

("CHANNELS")

GRIDSUPPORTS

-OEFORMABLEALLOY FILM

-GLASSSUBSTRATESan C Son

Fig. la-Light valve target construction.

SUPPORTING GRID

ETCHED yCHANNELS

Fig. lb-Electron micrograph (500 X)of actual target.

In operation, an electron beam whoseintensity is modulated by the videosignal scans the target as it would the

Dr. John A. van Roans, MeadDisplays and Device Concepts ResearchConsumer Electronics LaboratoryRCA LaboratoriesPrinceton, N.J.received the SB and SM from the MassachusettsInstitute of Technology in 1960. Subsequently hebegan his doctoral research under Professor A. R.von Hippel in the Laboratory for Insulation Re-search at M.I.T. He was awarded the Engineer'sDegree in 1962 and received the PhD in 1964; hisdoctoral thesis was entitled: "Conduction Phe-nomena in Rutile Single Crystals." Dr. van Raaltejoined the David Sarnoff Research Center in July,1964, as a Member of the Technical Staff. Sincethen he has conducted research in the areas ofelectro-optic materials, plastics, glasses, liquidcrystals and their applications to display and re-cording functions. He was appointed to his presentposition in September of this year. He is a memberof Tau Beta Pi, Eta Kappa Nu, Sigma Xi, theAmerican Physical Society, the IEEE, and theAAAS. He was awarded a 1969 RCA LaboratoriesAchievement Award for the development of theN projection system described in this paper.

phosphor screen in a kinescope. Theelectron beam penetrates the metalfilm and deposits charge on the glasssubstrate in proportion to the intensityof the video information at each loca-tion. This charge electrostatically at-tracts and deforms the metal film asshown in Fig. 2. The schlieren projec-tor converts the amplitude of the re-sulting deformation into an analogousbrightness on the screen. As in anylight valve, the highest screen bright-ness and contrast is achieved by main-taining the light -valve condition untilit is updated by the beam: for stan-dard television the deformation of themetal film must decay in 1/30 sec. Afaster decay results in loss of contrastand brightness; a longer decay pro-duces a stored image.

Schlieren projectorIn the absence of modulation, thetarget appears as a specular mirrorsurface. Consequently a reflectiveschlieren projector was designed as

70

AI GRID SUPPORT

DEFORMABLEALLOY FILM

ELECTRONBEAM

111

DEPOSITED CHARGE

Fig. 2-Deformable target operation

shown in Fig. 3. Light from a 500 -wattxenon -arc source is collected efficientlyand concentrated at the second focusof an integral ellipsoidal collectionmirror. The light is subsequentlycollimated to illuminate the targetuniformly at an angle; the target is

fabricated on the inside of the glassfaceplate of the cathode ray tube.In the absence of target deformation,the reflected light is again focussedby the projection lens onto an opaquestop-no light reaches the screen.Whenever a part of the deformablefilm is rippled by the electron beam,the light incident on the film is de-flected past the stop and imaged bythe projection lens as a bright spoton the screen. The prism placed closeto the target is used to transform thetarget -plane into an image -plane per-pendicular to the optic axis; thisarrangement produces depth -of -focuscorrection for the off -axis system andremoves distortions as well as coloraberrations.

The operation of the projector can beexplained as follows. Whenever thetarget is undeformed and mirror-like,the light source is imaged onto thestop; as long as the stop is as large orslightly larger than the image of thesource, all the light is blocked. As thetarget surface is tilted, the light is de-flected and part of the imaged sourcemisses the stop. Increasing the tilt ofthe target causes more light to miss

the stop, thereby increasing the screenbrightness until all the light reachesthe screen. At this point, the screenbrightness saturates with continueddeflection until finally the deflectedlight misses the projection lens alto-gether. This is illustrated in Fig. 4a.

In actual operation, each target ele-ment deforms parabollically as willbe discussed in greater detail laterand does not simply tilt (see Fig. 2).Thus, the light incident on a singlemetal picture element is deflected overa range of angles determined by thecurvature of the element. Light inci-dent on the central portion of eachelement is not deflected and remainsblocked by the stop. However, as thedeformation is increased, the sides ofeach element are tilted further pro-ducing a gradual increase in thebrightness of the corresponding spoton the screen. Thus, as shown in Fig.4b, the screen brightness is a mono-tonic function of the target deforma-tion producing a gray -scale display.The maximum in screen brightness isreached just before the light deflectedby the most tilted sides of each targetelement (near the grid support) be-gins to miss the projection lens.

Simple geometrical arguments can beused to show that the fraction of thelight incident on each target elementin this system is proportional to thearea under the curve of Fig. 4a. In aproperly designed projector incorpo-rating a low f-number projection lens(e.g., 1/1.7) 50 to 80% of the incidentlight, depending on the degree of col-limation, can be modulated to fall onthe screen thus making the displaybrightness primarily dependent on theluminosity and collection efficiency ofthe light source. We have achieved

NEGATIVE COLLIMATING LENS

OFF -AXISCORRECTION PRISM

DEFLECTION YOKE

SIA TARGETSTOP

SCRUM

PROJECTION LENS

SCREENBRIGHTNESS

B'MAX

..41/a a MAX

Fig. 4a-Screen brightness versus tilt of tar-get plane: a = amount by which stop size ex-ceeds source size; /3 = collimatior argle ofincident light; and r)... z acceptance angleof projection lens.

SCREENBRIGHTNESS

MIRROR TILTANGLE

8 MAX FILM DEFORMATION(CENTRAL DEFLECTION)

Fig. 4b-Screen brightness versus target de-formation: An... - central deflection of targetelement required to produce maximumscreen brightness.

200 to 300 lumens output from a 500watt xenon -arc without using criticallydesigned optics.

Target dimensionsThe target dimensions have beenchosen largely for convenience. Thespacing between adjacent grid supportlines defines a resolution element inone direction and must be smallenough to allow standard televisionresolution; 50 to 100 p spacings havebeen used on 5x 5 cm' targets.The height of the grid supports mustbe sufficient to keep the deformablemetal film away from the substratesurface under the most severe defor-mation. For parabolical deformation-a very good approximation to theactual situation-the central film de-flection is

8 'Ras Ontar1/4 (1)

where to.., is the acceptance angle ofthe projection lens (-18° for our111.7 lens) and 1 is the grid spacing.Thus, 8 varies between 3 and 6 p. for50 to 100 ft elements and the gridsupport is usually made 1 to 2 p.

higher.

The deformable metal film must bethin enough to be readily penetratedby the electron beam. The penetrationdepth depends on the film density:' a20 kV beam can penetrate at most0.8 mg/cm' corresponding to 3 ,u ofAl or 9000A of Ni or Cu. In practice,we make the film thinner (e.g., 2000to 4000A of Ni) to allow the beam to

Fig. 3-Off-axis, reflective schlieren projector 71

Ea

E max"'

VA

117-E mazi

X

W(5)ATTRACTIVE

FORCE

(0E2mal tZ

ed2

a 2

Fig. 5-Electric field, voltage and electro-static load distributions along substrate sur-face for optimum deformation.

penetrate more efficiently; in fact, theoptimum film thickness is determinedby its mechanical properties, as dis-cussed later in the paper.It is possible to segment the film inthe direction perpendicular to thesupport grid, as shown in Fig. 1. Thisuniquely defines a resolution elementin the other direction but is not neces-sary; 50 to 100 p. dimensions havebeen used here as well.

Electrical performanceThe metal film is deformed electro-statically by the electron -beam chargethat is deposited on the glass substratebelow. The attractive force due to auniform charge Q is equal to the deriv-ative of the stored energy:

aw a[Cr/2C] a orYd/2E0A1=ad ad ad

where C is the capacitance of the ele-ment; e is the dielectric constant ofvacuum; A is the area of the element;and d is the spacing between the filmand the substrate (grid height).Thus, the load is proportional to thesquare of the deposited electroncharge (a) and independent of gridheight (d), making the operation in-sensitive to small variations in gridheight.

As shown in Fig. 2, the electron beamdeposits a uniform charge under eachelement. The induced voltage betweendeformable metal film and substratetends to be uniform as in a parallel-

plate capacitor. However, the inducedvoltage also appears along the sub-strate surface between the center of

(2)

the element and the metallic grid sup-ports where it must go to zero. Inoperation, there is a maximum surfacefield intensity (E,...) that the sub-strate surface can support which limitsthe maximum induced voltage to avalue (as shown in Fig. 5) :

Vona...ER..1/2

This potential distribution does notcorrespond to a uniform charge distri-bution because some of the depositedcharge has been discharged towardsthe grid supports. In fact, this dis-charge mechanism is a nondestructivevoltage regulator that prevents over -voltage (i.e., overmodulation and pos-sible destruction of the metal film).Consequently, the load on the filmis also not quite uniform (Fig. 5), butis concentrated at the center of theelement where it will do most good.The resulting deformation can be de-termined from principles of statics' bybalancing the electrostatic load andelastic restoring forces in the film:

Y=Pi-. - +

Ix' x'0)2Td'L 8 6 12 64

(3)

(4)

where T. is the tension in the metalfilm at its center; y is the film deflec-tion from its original position; x is thedistance from the film center towardsthe grid support; and En, d, 1, E,, areas defined previously.

For small deformations, as is the casehere, the deformation is essentiallyparabolic and the third and fourthpower terms in x may be neglected.This calculation assumes a thin elasticmembrane with no appreciable bend-ing moments; a similar calculation canbe made including bending moments',but these are found to be unimportantfor film thicknesses less than 1 to1.5

The maximum tension in the film-also quite uniform for these smalldeformations-can be expressed interms of the limiting field intensityalong the substrate and the maximumtilt of the film at its supported edges(equal to half the acceptance angleof the projection lens= 0,..,/2=9° fora /11.7 lens):

dydx

and from Eq.im a4:

ma,(5)

2=90

T.- cP (6)The strain in the film (e.-cr/E), deter-mined by the stress' (o -Tat) can

also be determined from the geometri-cal shape of the deformation (relativeelongation of the film: A///). Equatingthese two quantities we find that:

at 7.54crt

-E 0.008E (7)where a is the tensile stress in thefilm; e is the strain in the film; E isthe modulus of elasticity of the metalfilm; t is the thickness of the metalfilm; and Al is the total elongation inthe film.

This means that the maximum elasticdeformation of the metal film is:

e-Al/1=0.008-0.8% (8)The maximum film thickness that canbe deformed optimally is thus deter-mined by the limiting field intensityat the substrate (Eq. 7):

16.6 E.Es.P..t= (9)Ed'

This value is typically lower than thelimit set by the requirement that thefilm be easily penetrated by 20 -kVelectrons.

Metal film propertiesIt may be interesting to bring theseformulae into perspective by puttingin some typical numbers. This willpoint out another very interesting ap-plication for this system, namely tomeasure the mechanical properties(stress, strain, modulus, and yieldstrength) of films that are not easilyhandled otherwise. Furthermore, thegreat number of elements (> 10') oneach target provides some statisticalinformation about the spread and uni-formity in these parameters.Using Eqs. 3 and 8, we find

V....- [0.015 Etcl']'''-5000 volts

Ed

(10)

where we have used actual values fora target whose film thickness was ex-perimentally found to be optimumaccording to Eq. 9:t = 2000A film thickness of Nid = 5 µ grid height/ = 70 p. grid spacing

F 8.85 x 10-" f/mE -30x10' psi -2x 10 N/m2 typicalfor Ni.

This corresponds to a maximum fieldintensity along the substrate surface:

1.4X Hi V/m (11)

which indeed must be near the dielec-tric strength of the surface.

72

Since the induced voltage also appearsacross the much shorter distance be-tween the substrate surface and de -formable film, one might wonderwhether the maximum induced volt-age is limited by field emission. Theelectric field intensity perpendicularto the substrate surface

E5000

volts/md 5 X 10'

(12)

must be close to that required to ripelectrons out of the substrate, but thelogical consequence that optimum filmthickness should be proportional togrid spacing is not borne out experi-mentally. Thus, while we cannot ex-clude the possibility of field emission,we have no conclusive evidence thatit occurs.

The response time of the metal film tothe induced voltage is very fast (< 1,us) due to its small inertia. The re-quirement that the deformation relaxin a frame time therefore requires thatthe charge leak off towards the con-ducting support grid in -1/30 sec.This dielectric relaxation time (r) isdetermined by the substrate resistivity(p) and some geometrical factors ofthe target: )

,T=RC-zpeolld (13)

Therefore, the resistivity must be

p = Td/E./- 3 x 10° stin = 3X 101° Slcm(14)

for standard television. This corres-ponds closely to the resistivity of com-mercial soda -lime glass; in operation,we normally heat these substrates to-50°C to achieve the desired chargedecay time constant.

The electron -beam current require-ments for "off -the -air" operation canbe found assuming that about half thecharge leaks off in one frame time:the beam must then charge the wholearea to V.../2 (in practice the sub-strate area is -4)(4 cm') . The beammust supply this charge thirty timesper second:

QT 1 mCTI ax210 µA (15)

2T

where Q, is the charge deposited bythe beam in a frame time; T is 1/30sec; and Cr is the capacitance of theprocessed target area.This value agrees well with the ex-perimentally determined peak -currentrequirement to produce a uniform

white field; a different choice of filmparameters or dimensions can bechosen to alter this value.The maximum load required to de-form the metal to its optimum value:co.,=EV,,,,12d2=4.5x 10° Nit&

=44 atm.(16)

This value is not the average (due tothe variations in the load) , but it at-tests to the great strength of the metalfilm and explains why mechanical vi-brations cause no problems for thefilm.

In effect, then, a simple calibration orcalculation can be used to relate thescreen brightness to the deformationor film strain for any given projector.By noting the value of brightnesswhere a sufficiently thin film fails, theyield strength is determined. A suffi-ciently thick film, on the other hand,will not fail since the load is limitedby the maximum allowable fieldstrength in the substrate (Eq. 9) ; thismaximum field strength or maximuminduced voltage is determined bymeasuring the electron beam currentand charge decay time. Knowledge ofthe deformation, maximum voltageand film thickness then define thestress, strain, and modulus of elasticityof the film. This technique can beused to evaluate mechanical and elas-tic properties of extremely thin films,as well as their fatigue properties, andto relate these to fabrication tech-niques, grain size, impurities, compo-sition, etc.

ResultsMany deformable light -valve targetshave been tested to prove these con-cepts and to optimize the variousparameters and elastic properties ofthe deformable metal film. Many evap-orated alloy films (Al -Cu, Cu -Al, Cu-Zn, Al-Zn, ) have been evaluated,as well as several electroplated Nifilms. The electroplated films have theadvantage that the structural proper-ties can be varied and compressive ortensile stresses built in by adjustingthe temperature, pH, plating rate, orgeometry, or by adding suitable hard-eners, wetting agents, or brightenersto the plating bath.'A typical projected image from thislight valve is shown in Fig. 6. Severalsmall defects are visible-these arecaused by dirt or dust in the variousprocessing steps. Since each inopera-

tive target element produces a point -defect in the projected display a highdegree of target perfection is needed.This is likely to require clean -roomfacilities for target processing, similarto those now commonly used in theintegrated -circuit industry. We haveachieved "off -the -air" displays for sev-eral hours at output levels of 200 to300 lumens with contrast ratios of15:1 to 25:1. Additional work is beingdone to further optimize the processesand to evaluate the trade-offs avail-able between projector design (sensi-tivity to deformation) , life of thetarget, and display contrast which ispresently limited by the supportinggrid structure.

AcknowledgmentThe author is indebted to V. Chris-tiano, W. Gorkiewicz, J. Harrison andC. Dobin for their contributions tothis project. The support of Dr. J. J.Brandinger throughout the project isalso gratefully acknowledged.

ReferencesI. Baumann. E., "The Fischer Large -Screen Pro-

jection System." /. of the British Inst. ofRadio Engrs., Vol. XII, No. 69 (1952).

2. Good, W. E.. "A New Approach to ColorTelevision Display and Color Selection Usinga Sealed Light Valve," Proc. of the NationalElectronics Conference, Vol. XXIV, No. 771(1968).

3. Auphan, M., "Proprietes des Feuilles TresMinces de Glucinium, Leurs Applications a laModulation de la Lumiere & a la Television,"L'Onde Electrique, Vol. 36, No. 1040 (1956).

4. Whiddington, R., "The Transmission of Cath-ode Rays Through Matter," Proc. Roy. Soc.(Al, Vol 86. No. 360 (1912); Whiddington,R., "The Transmission of Cathode RaysThrough Matter," Proc. Roy. Soc. (A), Vol.89. No. 559 (1914); Gentner, K., Uber dieEnergieabsorption von Schnellen Kathoden-strahlen," Annalen der Physik, 5. Folge, Band31. 407 (1938).

5. Timoshenko, S. and MacCullough, G., Ele-ments of Strength of Materials, (Van NostrandCo., N.Y.).

6. Ibid, pp 122, 171, 172.7. Sodeberg. K. G.. and Graham, A. K.. "Stress

in Electrodeposits-Its Significance." 34thAnnual Proceedings, Amer. ElectroplatingSoc.. (1947) pp. 74-95; Phillips, W. M., andClifton, F. L., "Stress in ElectrodepositedNickel," 34th Annual Proceedings, Amer.Electroplating Soc., (1947) pp. 97-110.

Fig. 6-Light-valve display.

High-performance FMreceivers using high -gainintegrated -circuit IF amplifiersT. J. Robe L. Kaplan

This paper describes the advantages of the IC approach to FM receiver design anddiscusses two areas requiring careful attention. One of these areas involves theprovision of sufficient selectivity in a single component; the other deals with stabiliza-tion of the gain stage when the gain is concentrated in a small area. The performanceof a breadboard FM receiver using the IC approach and composed of a commercialFM tuner, a filter, and a single integrated -circuit IF amplifier is described.

MOST MODERN FM receivers consistof a series of separate stages of

gain and selectivity, cascaded one afteranother. This design remains the mostpractical in tube and transistor re-ceivers.

The selectivity stages are double -tunedtransformers carefully designed to pro-vide proper termination for the gainstages. Gain is usually limited bythe stability of the tube or transistorused. A practical finished system ofthe design shown in Fig. 1 repre-sents a considerable effort in partsspecification and parameter testing.Performance can vary from poor tooutstanding-depending on the skill,integrity, quality of components, andquality control used in manufacturingthe circuit.

Significant improvements in the per-formance of the system in Fig. 1 arerealized by replacing each active de-vice (gain block) with an integratedcircuit ((c) in which gain is obtainedthrough the use of a differentialamplifier. The differential -amplifierconfiguration offers better limitingcharacteristics than the single -endedtube and transistor stages.

Fig. 2 illustrates a new concept in thedesign of FM IF amplifiers in whichthe selectivity and gain functions areprovided in single lumped elements.For example, where the system in Fig.1 utilizes four discrete stages, eachstage providing 20 dB of gain, the newsystem would have to provide 80 dB ofgain with one stage for equivalent

Reprint RE -16-4-19This paper appeared previously in the IEEETransactions on Broadcast and TV Receivers,(Sept 1968).

performance. Similarly, where the sys-tem in Fig. 1 utilizes four stages witha total of eight tuned circuits to obtainthe required selectivity, the improvedsystem would have to provide equalselectivity with one lumped selectivecomponent.

In AM/FM receivers, in which the ap-plication of automatic gain control(AGc) to the AM portion is a basicrequirement, the single high -gain stagespecifically designed as a limiter is re-placed by a sub -system such as thatshown in Fig. 3. For the system in Fig.3 to perform similarly to those in Figs.1 and 2, some redistribution of gainand selectivity is required. In addition,because the AM signal bypasses thelimiting gain stage, the overall gain ofthe AM portion will probably be lessthan that of the FM portion; however,AM gain should still be sufficient toprovide satisfactory performance.

Cost advantagesof the lumped approach

The lower parts count in a lumpedsystem results in cost reduction inthree major areas, as follows:

1) Lower assembly and inventory costs;

2) Less component interaction and,therefore, little (if any) alignmentcosts and fewer line rejects; and

3) Fewer parts to specify and test atincoming inspection.

Performance advantagesof the lumped approach

The lumped approach also offers sig-nificant performance advantages overthe distributed -gain approach of Fig.

1. The use of differential amplifiers inthe integrated circuit provides supe-rior limiting characteristics as com-pared to the distributed approach. Anexample of a monolithic integrated -circuit design intended for FM IF -limiter applications is shown in Fig.4. The IF portion of this circuit, theRCA-CA3043, consists of four differ-ential amplifiers in cascade. Each dif-ferential pair is isolated from thesucceeding pair by a common -collectorstage used as a buffer. The final differ-ential pair is powered by a constant -current transistor.

The input side of each differential am-plifier operates as a common -collectorstage; the output side operates in thecommon -base mode. Both sides aresupplied by a constant -current source.The magnitude of the load impedanceon the output side is adjusted so that,with the available current, saturationis never reached. The input side cannever be saturated because there is nocollector load. Limiting is always sym-metrical; the limiting level is dictatedonly by the available current. Becausesaturation is avoided, the effectivejunction capacitance varies very littlewith signal level, and incidental phasemodulation due to amplitude changesis negligible.

Integrated monolithic constructionalso makes practical the inclusion ofinternal regulation and decoupling inthe IF stages. Thus with integrated -circuit systems, the equipment manu-facturer is assured that, regardless ofline -voltage variations, the active de-vices within the integrated circuit arealways operating at optimum voltage

74

T. J. Robe

Linear Integrated Circuit Design

Solid State Division

Somerville, New Jersey

received the BSEE in 1957 and the MSEE in 1964,

both from Newark College of Engineering. From

1957 to 1960, Mr. Robe was a Radar Maintenance

Officer in the U.S. Air Force. In 1960 and 1961,

he was a design engineer with ITT Laboratories

where he contributed to the design of the DRONE

control console and airborne power supplies. Mr.

Robe joined RCA in 1962 and worked on thedevelopment, specification, test, and application

VHF -UHF transistors Recently, he

has been assigned to the development, specifica-

tion, test, and application of linear integrated

circuits for consumer applications.

and current. Other features that can bebuilt into the lc include FM detectordiodes and some audio amplification.In tube and transistor receivers, suchfeatures as decoupling, regulation, de-tector diodes, and audio amplificationmust be designed and fabricated separ-ately by the equipment manufacturer.Integrated circuit systems are alsomore reliable because there are fewerinterconnections on the printed -circuitboard.

In spite of the advantages realizedwith the use of high -gain integratedcircuits, there are two areas thatrequire careful design: stability andproviding selectivity in a single com-ponent.

Selectivity

One problem in the lumped approachis that of constructing a filter that hasa 3 -dB bandwidth wide enough forstereo and skirt selectivity sharpenough for alternate -station rejection.

The degradation of the signal-to-noiseratio in FM stereo reception may makeit advantageous in some cases to de-sign for a somewhat narrower band-width than that normally required forstereo reception, particularly if therate of attenuation is low and the band-width widens appreciably as the signallevel is increased. Because the stereosignal-to-noise ratio is seldom adequateat signals below 25 µV, the 3 -dB band-width can be less than the theoreticalminimum of 270 kHz at such signallevels. If the rate of attenuation is high,the bandwidth widening is less, andlittle advantage can be gained by de-signing to a narrower bandwidth.

Receiver passband requirements aredictated by the audio modulatingfrequency and the deviation of thetransmitted carrier from the center fre-quency. In standard FM broadcast, themonaural bandwidth at the 3 -dB pointsshould be 220 kHz; however, stereoreception requires a bandwidth ofabout 270 kHz. For lowest distortionin the detected audio, the phase re-sponse should be as linear as possibleover the passband. In addition, theskirt selectivity should be as sharp aspossible beyond the desired cutoff fre-quency. Because transmission frequen-cies in a given locality are normallynot closer than 400 kHz, the attenua-tion at a frequency 400 kHz away fromthe intermediate frequency of 10.7MHz is used as a measure of the qual-ity (quality factor) of the selectivityof the system.

Bandwidth and selectivity in a systemare largely determined by the filterused. The passive filters available tothe designer can be separated intothree broad categories: crystal, cer-amic, and inductance -capacitance (Lc) .

Crystal filters

Crystal filters are those that use one ormore crystals in conjunction with oneor more inductance -capacitance tunedcircuits. The bandwidth requirementin FM is considered to be wide for acrystal filter, but some circuit designsemploying crystal filters have been suc-cessfully produced. A typical crystal -filter response curve is shown in Fig.5. Even with the extraneous responseon the high side, this filter is veryattractive from a performance stand-point because its phase response is

L. KaplanLinear Integrated Circuit DesignSolid State DivisionSomerville, New Jerseyreceived the BS in Physics (with Honors) fromRutgers University in 1955. He received the MSin Engineering from Newark College of Engineer-ing in 1969. After completing the RCA trainingprogram in 1955, Mr. Kaplan was assigned to theRCA Tube Division in Harrison, N.J. as an appli-cations eng reer. His primary work was in thedevelopment of tubes for audio, power output, andTV deflection applications. In 1960, he joinedRaytheon Co. to work on storage tube applica-tions. From t961 to 1963, Mr. Kaplan worked onthe design of high -volume consumer sound equip-ment for Westinghouse. From 1963 to 1965, heworked on display systems at Lockheed Electron-ics Co. where he advanced to project engineer.Mr. Kaplan returned to RCA in 1966, where he hasbeen doing applications work on integrated cir-cuits and MOS transistors.

linear, its bandwidth is adequate, andit has sharp skirt selectivity and lowinsertion loss. However, crystal filtersare expensive and even at quantityprices their cost usually rules them outfor most home -entertainment appli-cations.

Ceramic fillers

Ceramic filters (trapped -energy filters)now being manufactured in Japanshow promise of good performance inFM systems. Filters of this type areessentially electromechanical devicesin which a piezoelectric effect is ob-tained in a manmade material: leadzirconate titanate. Ceramic filters arepresently available in several formsand can be purchased complete andpackaged in a case which typicallymeasures 20 x 12 x 11 mm. The fre-quency tolerance of these filters is ± 80kHz. Thus, in a production situation,the mixer output transformer and dis-criminator transformer would requiresome slight alignment. Matching to the

75

RFSECTION

SELECTIVITYBLOCK No.1

FMDOUBLE -

TUNBB-

E 10R -A- TUNED8MHz!

RFSECTION- --

GAINBLOCK

No.1

IFSECTION

ELECTIVITY SELECTIVITYBLOCK No 2 BLOCK N

DOUBLE -TUNED -

COUPLING

AUDIOSECTIONJ

I It:.1

BLOCKNo .2

BLOCKGAINGAIN

Fig. 1-Block diagram of FM receiver usingseparate stages of gain and selectivity.

SECTION

FM

IBBT-IUOVIIHz) SELBELCOTVKITY

GAINBLOCK

AUDIOSECTION

DETECTOR AUDIO

L _ _ _---JFig. 2-Block diagram of FM receiver usinglumped gain and selectivity elements.

mixer output transformer requiressome form of resistive loading at theinput to the filter to avoid excessivebandwidth narrowing effects.

Like the conventional crystal filter, theceramic filter has an inherent spuriousresponse problem; however, by carefulattention in the design, the extraneousresponse may be effectively sup-pressed, and response curves similar tothat shown in Fig. 6 may be obtained.

Single -section ceramic filters may beobtained in a package of very smallvolume. Typical dimensions are lessthan 14 x x 1/2 in., plus leads. Eachsection has a typical 3 -dB bandwidthof 200 kHz, with a 20 -dB bandwidth of500 kHz. There is no rejection beyondabout the 25 -dB point; at this point,the response degenerates into a seriesof peaks and valleys of varying ampli-tude depending on the individual unit.When two sections are cascaded, thebackground response is suppressed toabout 50 dB, but the bandpass shapedepends on the center frequency ofthe units chosen. The insertion loss ofeach section is about 5 dB and is cu-mulative.

A standard production distributionyields units with center frequenciesfrom 10.6 to 10.8 MHz. These unitsare color -coded into groups with centerfrequencies 50 kHz apart ±35 kHz.By cascading two units, one from eachof two adjacent groupings, it is possi-ble to obtain reasonable bandwidthand suppression. All attempts thus

far to cascade three or more units havebeen unsuccessful because of multiplepeaks appearing in the response andhigh insertion loss.

The packaged ceramic filters availablenow appear to be capable of providing,with the help of the mixer outputtransformer, the desired selectivity foran FM receiver. However, the insertionloss of 10 to 12 dB detracts fromoverall receiver gain. Single -section ce-ramic filters have less tractable prob-lems, and, in spite of their apparentlow cost, may precipitate productiondifficulties which could have beenavoided by another approach.

LC Filters

With the aid of modern networktheory and computers, a complete se-ries of design charts has been devel-oped to describe LC filters capable ofalmost any physically realizable trans-fer function.' It is possible to select,in the passband, from maximally flat(Butterworth) , Equiripple (Tcheby-cheff) , or minimum -time -delay (Bes-se)) designs. Bandwidth and rate ofattenuation outside the passband de-termine the number of poles required.The Tchebycheff configurations offerthe best rate of attenuation outside thepassband, but are poorest in phaselinearity. The opposite is true of theBesse! filters, while the Butterworthtypes (maximally flat) yield compro-mise values.

It is one thing to calculate a set ofparameters for a given bandpass filter,but quite another to fabricate the fil-ter given a handful of practical com-ponents and a size limitation. Thepractical unloaded Q's attainable in

rF

SECRTION

FMTUNER

188-108 MHz)

AMTUNER

II540-1650 KHz)

L

FIRSTFM

SELECTIVITYBLOCK

r

the inductors place at least two con-straints on the design. If the Q's arelow and the desired overall band-width narrow, it may be impossible toachieve the desired response withina given number of poles. Alternatively,the losses may build up to such anextent that the insertion loss is intoler-able. The most favorable unloadedQ's are generally obtained on toroidalcores of high -Q ferrites. Many turnsare required to obtain the optimumquality factor, with the result that theoperating impedance is of the order ofseveral thousand ohms. Therefore,matching networks are required at in-put and output ends to satisfy stabilityrequirements of both the tuner and theIF amplifier.

The high operating impedance levelmakes the effects of stray capacitancecoupling more apparent and compli-cates the control of the mutual cou-pling elements. Because toroidal coresoffer the highest possible unloadedvalues, a logical configuration for thefilter is one in which all the inductorsare identical and grounded at one end.Each inductor would be resonated byan appropriate shunt capacitance, andthe mutual coupling would be capaci-tive and inductive and would controlthe bandpass shape.

As the above discussion shows, the de-sign, fabrication, and alignment of LCfilters are best left to the filter special-ists if economy and success are to beachieved. Results measured with twotypes of LC filters are shown in Fig. 7.The broken curve was obtained with afive -pole laboratory design which in-cluded inductors with unloaded Q'sof 120. The solid curve was obtainedwith a four -pole filter incorporating

IF AUDIOSECTION SECTION

GAIN --A-

LIMITINGGAIN AUDIO

SECONDFMCONTROL LED

STAGESELECTIVITY

BLOCK BLOCK DE T.

ADI

AMSELECTIVITY

BLOCK

Fig. 3-Block diagram of AM/FM receiver.

76

inductors with unloaded Q's in excessof 300. The differences in bandpass,skirt selectivity, and insertion loss areapparent. In general, it is possible toadd sections (when the unloaded Q'sare greater than 300) to obtain im-proved selectivity at the expense ofapproximately 1.5 dB of insertion lossper section. When high -Q high impe-dances are used, it is also possible toobtain the desired coupling betweensections without discrete capacitors.

The general practice in the construc-tion of RF units for FM tuners is to in-clude a double -tuned transformer inthe output circuit of the mixer transis-tor. This transformer, when coupledto the filter, enhances the selectivityof the system beyond the values shownin the curves of Figs. 5, 6 and 7. Sam-ple selectivity data are given later,with the description of an experimen-tal receiver. Of the three types of fil-ters presently available, the LC typesshow most promise from the view-point of cost and control within thecircuit.

Designing for stability

The high -gain integrated -circuit IF am-plifiers used in the experimental re-ceiver described later are designed tooperate without external feedback.Negative feedback can be used as again -control mechanism; however, itseffectiveness has not yet been estab-lished. Positive feedback must beavoided if the amplifier is to remainfree of spurious oscillations. The con-centration of a high dynamic gainacross a small input-output separationmagnifies the problem of isolating thehigh-level output signals from the low-level input. In addition, direct cou-pling of several cascaded stages on thelc chip requires the use of a largeamount of internal negative DC feed-back. Careful bypassing of the feed-back point must be provided extern-ally to eliminate the effects of thisfeedback at the intermediate fre-quency. Accordingly, the design of IFamplifiers using high -gain integratedcircuits consists mainly of optimizingthe printed -circuit (PC) board layoutand component connections to reduceexternal feedback, determining thesource and load terminations for sta-bility, and assuring effective bypassingof the internal negative feedback.

10

0

0R23

02

0424MhION

Noes

T....1141 3 c..44 lite csT.nal Na 10 ononel .00e throtih No sobers.Tormonals M. 3 a. N. 10 th.ld the

tloo

S . SulsltereDales D, and D. act es co.c,..$ and se pod

elnroc...bst.. cinclensesAll .sie..

CA3043

External Feedback

The principal sources of external feed-back on the Pc board are mutual im-pedance and capacitance coupling ofthe input and output circuits. Mutualimpedance coupling occurs when theinput return current and the output, orhigher -level return currents, flowthrough a common impedance, as il-lustrated in Fig. 8. The loop gain A/3for this circuit is given by

APEf 1Z. gweEtZe- - -E. E. E.

For negligible feedback, the loop gainmust be much less than 1; thereforethe tolerable common impedance is ofthe order of one -tenth the transcon-ductance (g.) of the device. Thetransconductance to the point ofgreatest ground return current (i.e.,to the last emitter follower of the in-tegrated circuit) is of the order of0.03 mho for the RCA-CA3041 andCA3042 integrated circuits and 0.25mho for the CA3043. The total trans -conductance for each of these typesis higher, but the output currents cir-culate in the differential amplifier andtherefore do not have a ground re-turn path. For this reason, the allow-able common impedance should not bemore than 0.4 to 3 ohms, depending onthe lc type. Fortunately, the low- andhigh-level return currents in the inte-

Fig. 7-Typicalresponse curves for two

types of LC filters.

600

Fig. 4-Schematic diagram of RCA-CA3043integrated -circuit IF amplifier and limiter.

O

10

E' 40

CRYVAL FILTER

FREOUENCY10 7 MHz3-016 BW240 1013INSERTION LOSS3 5 dBRs RL 500 OHMS

60-500 -400 -300 -200 -100 0 100 200

DEVIATION FROM 107 MHz -6343

Fig. 5-Typical response curve for a crystalfilter.

INSERTION 106S40d5Rs RL 33C OHMS

-10 -,---2-CERAMIC FLTER

20

I II 140 MN 1

LI10.1 102 1113 10.4 10.5 106 107 las 10.9 II II

FREQUENCY-MN.

Fig. 6-Typical response curve for a ceramicfilter.

7

6

IS0

40

t3j 30

20

10

092 96

LC FILTER

500LE,09120

X /1-

\ I1

I i 411.01.1 HIGH 0

%0.17300

ii

I

X

10 *4 ION 11 .2 116

FREW ENCY -WM12

300 400 500

77

Fig. 8-Return current paths.

grated circuit do not emerge from acommon terminal as in a single transis-tor stage; however, care must still betaken in returning the separate termi-nals to the Pc board ground plane toassure that a common impedance isnot produced on the board.

In general, the best way to avoid pro-ducing common impedance is to re-turn a particular terminal to a point onthe board closest to its source of signalcurrent. For example, the input return(terminal 2 on the CA3043; terminal3 on the CA3041 and CA3042) shouldbe bypassed to a location on the boardwhich is physically near the input sig-nal source (terminal 1, as shown inFig. 9). The high -signal -level returncurrent (Is), on the other hand, mustbe returned to the positive terminalof the power supply (terminal 11 onthe CA3043; terminal 14 on the CA -3041 and CA3042) . This higher -levelcurrent can return to the power supplythrough one or a combination of sev-eral paths: internally through the volt-age regulator, externally through apower -supply bypass capacitor, or ex-ternally through the power supply byway of the power leads. It is the por-tion of I,, which returns to the powersupply externally which can causefeedback problems. Capacitor C,,, inFig. 9 bypasses the power -supply ter-minal directly to the high -current re-turn and represents the proper way tobypass the supply. With the arrange-

VCCn INTEGRATES CIRCUIT

Fig. 9-Connections for input and outputcurrent returns.

ment shown, the return current canflow directly from terminal 3 to ter-minal 11 without passing through asection of the ground plane common tothe low-level return current (termi-nal 2) . The power -supply bypassingarrangement including Cu, in Fig. 9 isparticularly poor because currentsflowing through Ca, to the power sup-ply must pass around the board andcould, depending on layout, passthrough a path common to the terminal2 return current. It would be better touse no bypass at all than to use the onepositioned as C,,:.The second source of external feed-back, and possibly the most trouble-some, is stray capacitance from thehigh-level collector terminal to theinput, terminal 1. This capacitanceconsists of the sum of the capacitanceof the integrated circuit and straycapacitance from the printed -circuitboard. Typical device feedback capac-itance is 0.0005 pF for the CA3043and 0.02 pF for the CA3041 and CA -3042. If reasonable care is taken inlayout design, Pc -board stray feedbackcapacitances of the order of 0.001 pFshould be obtainable. Thus, the totalcircuit feedback capacitance for theCA3043 in a TO -5 package is approx-imately 0.0015 pF, and for the CA3041and CA3042 in a dual -in -line packageis approximately 0.02 pF.The circuit feedback capacitance incombination with the forward trans -admittance y of the integrated circuitand the terminating conductance de-termine the stability of the amplifier.The stability criterion for an activetwo -port amplifier is given by'

gig_ >V2 I Yr2YI (1 + cos 61) (1)where g, and gi are the total node con-ductances at the input and outputnodes respectively, y, is the integrated -circuit forward transmittance, y,, is thetotal circuit reverse transadmittance(assumed to be composed entirely ofthe feedback capacitance describedabove) , and 0 is the sum of the y12 and

phase angles. Eq. 1 indicates theminimum g,g, product required forstable operation of high -gain ic's.

The RCA-CA3043 in a TO -5 packageoperating at 10.7 MHz has the follow-ing values:

y = 6/ +80° mhos= wC, /-90° = (67x 101)

(1.5 X 10-") /-90°10-' / - 90°

8 = + 80° - 90° -10°

The minimum gig, product at 10.7MHz is then given by

8,82(6) (10-') (1.98).=

0.6 x10' (mhos)'2

Because this conductance product ismuch greater than the product of thelc input and output conductances, itcan be assumed that gig, is the productof the source and load conductances giand g,.. If the load resistance were2000 ohms (g,, = 0.5 millimho), themaximum allowable source resistancewould be 830 ohms (g, milli -mhos) . A practical, well -designed cir-cuit incorporating the CA3043 wouldemploy a conductance product higherthan 0.6x 10' to reduce bandpassskewing and to provide for device in-terchangeability.

For stable operation of the RCA-CA3041 and CA3042 in a dual -in -linepackage at 10.7 MHz, calculations areas follows:y 1.2 /+80° mhosya, = (67 x IV) (2 X 10'4) / -90°

1.34x / - 90° mhos= -10°

(1.2) (1.34x 10") (1.98)2

1.6X 10' (mhos)2

PC board layoutThe computations shown above illus-trate the careful printed -circuit -boardlayout design required (particularlywith the CA3043) if stray feedbackcapacitance is to be minimized so thatfull advantage can be taken of the highgain of the integrated circuit; Fig. 10illustrates several techniques for min-imizing this capacitance. The methodsillustrated include the following:

1) Maximum separation of input andoutput terminal metallization;2) Division of the lc pin circle by astrip of ground metal that connectsthe normally grounded terminals 3and 10;3) Isolation of the input and outputterminals by surrounding them withground metal shields.

In addition to minimization of strayfeedback capacitance, it is importantthat lead protrusions of componentsconnected to the input and outputmetal lands be kept as short as possi-ble to avoid the introduction of straycapacitance above the surface of theboard. The 0.0015-pF capacitance dis-cussed above was made possible byuse of all the layout techniques dis-

g.gL (min)

78

SHADED REGIONS ARE PC -BOARDMETAL AREAS

Fig. 10-Techniques for minimizing strayfeedback capacitance.

cussed. The capacitance could be re-duced further, possibly by a factorof two, by locating a bottom shieldapproximately one -quarter inch fromthe printed circuit and directly overthe lc pin circle.

Fig. 11 shows a photograph of a PC

board layout for the CA3043. The posi-tioning of the bypass capacitors onterminals 2 and 11 reduce commonimpedance coupling. The board shownwas operated with a load impedanceR,, of 3000 ohms and a source impe-dance RR of 400 ohms and was freefrom oscillation.

Bypassing chip negative feedback

The DC stabilizing feedback on the in-tegrated -circuit chip must be carefullybypassed externally to avoid gain re-duction at the intermediate frequency.The largest amount of DC feedbackexists at terminal 2 of the CA3043; asdiscussed above, terminal 2 should bebypassed close to the input signalsource. Every effort should be made toreduce the impedance of the bypass toless than 1 ohm as experimentationhas shown that a 1 -ohm resistor placedin series with the bypass can reducethe IF gain by approximately 3 dB.The value of the bypass capacitor de-pends somewhat on the lead length ofthe bypass; for bypass lengths of ap-proximately I/2 inch, a value of 0.01 to0.02 ,ELF seems best.

Experimental receiver

An experimental receiver was con-structed using only a commercial FMtuner, an LC filter, and an RCA CA -3043 with a discriminator transformer,as shown in Fig. 12. The 11/2 x 7/8 x

5/s -inch LC filter was designed to oper-ate with source and load impedanceof 500 ohms. The output of the filterwas terminated in a 470 -ohm resistorconnected between terminals 1 and 12of the CA3043. Terminal 12 was by-passed to ground; and, because theoutput of the filter is Pc -isolated, it wasconnected directly to terminal 1. At thetuner end, matching was accomplishedby use of a capacitive tap on the trans-former secondary winding to reducethe impedance to the 500 -ohm level.

Performance data for the experimen-tal receiver are given in Table I.The AM rejection is not included,but has been measured as approxi-mately 58 dB. The 20 -dB quieting sen-sitivity was measured at 2µV at theantenna; 30 -dB quieting sensitivitywas measured at 3 µV. The 3 -dB limit-ing sensitivity was reached at 7µV.The selectivity curve for the receivershows that the 60 -dB rejection pointsare reached at 304 kHz from the de-sired frequency; the 3 -dB bandwidthat small -signal levels is better than 220kHz.

Table I-Performance data for experimentalreceiver shown in Fig. 12.

Performance data

20 -dB quieting sensitivity -2µV

30 -dB quieting sensitivity -3 oV

3 -dB limiting sensitivity -7 AV

Total harmonic distortion

225 -AV input -0.35%

10-µV input -1.3%

Selectivity (Tuner + Filter)3 -dB bandwidth - 223 kHz6 -dB bandwidth - 305 kHz20 -dB bandwidth - 399 kHz40 -dB bandwidth - 486 kHz60 -dB bandwidth = 608 kHz

Conclusions

Integrated -circuit IF amplifiers areavailable with sufficient gain at 10.7MHz to perform the entire IF ampli-fier -limiter function required in agood -quality FM receiver. The designermust, however, exercise care in thelayout of the printed -circuit board andin the location of certain componentson the board so that maximum gain isachieved.

The breadboard receiver describeddemonstrates that acceptable commer-cial performance can be obtained withreceivers constructed according to

INPUTPIN No. I

LOW-LEVEL RETURNPIN No 2

NIGI. EVEL BYPASSTO 20WER SUPPLY

Fig. 11-Printed-circuit-board layout forCA3043.

the lumped -gain, lumped -selectivityapproach. The performance demon-strated, while not equal to thatobtained in the most expensive dis-crete -component FM receivers, is morethan adequate. Of the three types offilters (crystal, ceramic, and LC) thatare presently available, the LC typeshows most promise from the view-point of cost, insertion loss, and accu-rate prealignment.

MIXER OUTPUT IF AMPLIFIER- - -TRANSFORMER -1

I

TOMISER

FILTER(TRW008357No.

OR ECON.)OHMS

s (TRW No. 24403 OR EQUIV.)

RS

aa1FF

470iO

AUDIOOUT

-r(.:1);

0$.0F I I IC'PF

0.01

IPF

Fig. 12-Schematic diagram of experimentalFM receiver using a commercial FM tuner,an LC filter, and a CA3043 with a discrimina-tor transformer.

Acknowledgment

The authors thank S. Harris and F.Radler of TRW Components Divisionfor their valuable assistance in thefabrication of the LC filter describedin this paper, and C. F. Wheatley, V.Zuccharo, and T. Griffin of RCA fortheir valuable aid in acquiring theinformation presented.

ReferencesI. "Electrical Filters", White Electromagnetics,

Inc., Rockville, Md.2. Santilli, R. A., "RF and IF Amplifier Design

Considerations", IEEE Transactions on Broad-cast and TV Receivers (Nov 1967).

79

051

Integrated circuits for RF andIF serviceH. M. Kleinman

This paper discusses linear integrated circuits for IF and RF service: what they are,why they are used, and how they perform. Included also is a description of thegeneral characteristics of these circuits and some of the prospects for futuredevelopments.

RI AND IF LINEAR INTEGRATED CIR-CUITS (LIC'S) represent a major

part of the linear integrated -circuitmarket. Twenty percent of all tic'ssold are classified as RF/IF amplifiers.By the end of 1969, twenty-eight do-mestic manufacturers of lc's had an-nounced integrated circuits specificallydesigned and characterized for RF orIF service. A total of 87 types repre-senting versions of 32 circuits areavailable in this category; another 86types representing different circuit con-figurations are available in the cate-gory of wideband amplifiers.'

These circuits range in complexityfrom basic differential amplifiers (withor without biasing elements) , such asthe RCA CA3028, to highly complexsubsystems of 50 to 100 components.Fig. 1 shows the more complex RCA-CA3065, which includes a three -stageamplifier -limiter, detector, audio pre -

Reprint RE -16-4-20 (ST -4327)Final manuscript received July 18, 1970.

41

254

012 015

425 426 427154 474 Ilk

13A

30

463 419 033

03210 754 754 *1

0.590

Fig. 1-RCA-CA3065 integrated subsystem (all resistances are in ohms).

a

159

5r

amplifier, electronic attenuator, andregulated power supply. The simplesttypes are represented by the "703" typeic's shown in Fig. 2. Circuits of thesimpler type occupy little chip areaand have a minimum number of leads.These circuits, therefore, are economi-cal to produce and relatively inexpen-sive; however, they are relativelyinflexible. The "703" series is intendedonly for non -automatic -controlled am-plifier -limiter service within its fre-quency range. The highly complex IC'salso tend to be single -purpose devices.The CA3065, for example, is designedas a TV sound IF system and is alsosuitable for any FM service below 20MHz; however, its use to provideother functions is limited.

Between these extremes in circuit com-plexity there are a great many lc'swhich can perform many functions.For example, the RCA-CA3005 shownin Fig. 3 can be used as a differentialRF amplifier, a cascode RF amplifier

De

437200

270 270

4511200

439

457

2

Piz101(

80

(with or without agcy, an autodyneconverter or self -oscillating mixer, abalanced mixer, or a limiter amplifier,and is also useful in many areas out-side of the RF/IF area. The RCA-CA3028A and CA3053 provide similarperformance capabilities at a lowerprice.

What are IF and RF IC's?

With such a wide variety of structuresand complexities, it is difficult to defineIF and RF IC'S. For the three circuitsshown in Figs. 1 through 3, the onlyobvious common feature is the high -frequency communication service forwhich they are intended.

Examination of the "703" andCA3005 schematic diagrams in Figs.2 and 3 reveals that no load resistorsare used. Load resistors of any kind,and diffused resistors in particular, aredeliberately omitted because they aremajor limiters of bandwidth. Fig. 4shows interstage network of a direct -coupled amplifier which might be usedin an integrated circuit, along with itsequivalent circuit. The voltage gainG, from the base of transistor Q, tothe base of transistor Q. is given by

(1)

where g.,, is the transconductance andR,' equals the parallel combination ofR,,,,, R,., and R,. Because R., is usu-ally much greater than either Re, orR1,, Re' may be expressed as follows:

OUTPUT

GROUND

Fig. 2-The "703" basic inte-grated -circuit IF amplifier.

Ri

0Fig. 3-RCA-CA3005 flexible buildingblock.

K. M. KleinmanLinear Integrated Circuit ApplicationsSolid State DivisionSomerville, New Jerseyreceived the BSEE and MSEE from MIT. He joinedRCA in 1957. He is presently responsible for evalu-ating devices, developing test equipment, estab-lishing test specifications, and preparing tech -lice'data for commercial data sheets and applicationnotes for both consumer and non -consumer I nearintegrated circuits. Mr. Kleinman has been grantedthree U.S. patents and has published several arti-cles. He has received two RCA Eng neeringawards. The first was a divisional team award in1963 for the development of devices and circuitswhich introduced the era of commercially practicalsolid-state and o amplifiers. The second was the1966 David Sarioff Team Award in Engineering forthe developmert of the first commercial high volt-age silicon power transistor.

R,,R,Re'-

For maximum voltage gain, R, ismade much larger than R,, and R,' isapproximately equal to R,.. Becausethe load resistor is in parallel withsome capacitance, a low-pass filter isformed at the output. The cut-off fre-quency f,, of this filter is given by

fe.[2R,(Ce+C,,,)]-' (2)

By use of typical values for integratedcircuit transistors, cut-off frequency f,.is estimated between 5 and 10 MHz,which is satisfactory for IF service.However, the resistors in the circuitare not ideal resistors. The diffusedresistor is an integral part of thegrounded silicon wafer from which itis isolated by back -biased diodes, asshown in Fig. 5a. Because the back -biased diodes act as capacitors, theresistor functions, in effect, as shownin Fig. 5c and adds considerable high -frequency loss to the circuit. If Re,has a high value to provide high volt-age gain, the resistor occupies a largearea and its effective capacitance toground can be as high as 20 pF. Thus,high load -resistance values can reduce

lal

2TV52

ID)

Fig. 4-a) Transistor interstagenetwork and b) its equivalentcircuit.

circuit response to 1.5 to 2 MHz and,consequently, limit performance.

In RF circuits, therefore, load resistorsare omitted and, where high gain isrequired, a multistage amplifier withlow -gain stages is used. This approachis demonstrated in the CA3065 shownin Fig. 1, which uses three voltage -gain stages to provide 70 dB of low -frequency gain.

Why use IC's in RF or IF service?

Performance, size, cost, and reliabilityare the primary reasons for use of ic's.In some systems, particularly in mili-tary or aerospace environments, per-formance must be maintained over atemperature range of -55 to + 125°C.The designer of a system using dis-crete devices can provide any degreeof performance in this range by selec-tion of components and by use of com-pensating devices such as diodes andpositive- or negative -temperature -coefficient resistors in the circuit. Theuser of integrated circuits, however,can select a single device, such as theRCA-CA3002 IF amplifier which in-cludes all the compensation requiredto provide constant gain over the de -

la I

T TIT T

jai

Fig. 5-Integrated-circLit resistor and its equivalents.

81

01

3

0

2-M -35 -15 5 25 45 55 85 105 125

TEMPERATURE

Fig. 8-Gain as a function of temperaturefor an Integrated IF amplifier.

Fig. 7-The IC building block: the differen-tial amplifier with a constant -current tran-sistor.

sired temperature range. Fig. 6 showsthe variation in gain with temperatureof a CA3002 operated to provide again of 27 dB at 1 MHz at 25°C. Thechange in gain is less than 0.5 dB ateither extreme of the temperaturerange.

For true equipment reliability, repairshould also be simple and rapid. Theconcentration of functions in a fewintegrated circuits, instead of in a largenumber of discrete components, makesdiagnosis and replacement of a defec-tive component much easier.

The differential amplifier-universalIC building blockCircuit designers have always favored

b

Fig. 8-Tuner-amplifier config-urations of the basic differen-tial amplifier.

1200

1000

w 800

'gr3vE. 600

-0 400

$zoo

0

differential amplifiers for manyapplications. In tic's, these amplifiershave become an almost universalcomponent. Fig. 7 shows the basicdifferential -amplifier configuration.Transistors 0, and Q, form the differ-ential pair. Transistor 0, is usuallyreferred to as the constant -currentsource. The total current in the circuitis established by adjusting the basevoltage V,,, and establishing the collec-tor current 1,,. The voltages on thebases of transistors 0, and Q2 can thenbe used to adjust the proportion ofcollector current 1,, flowing in eitherof the upper transistors. If transistors0, and 0, are well matched, I,., willequal 1,, when base voltage equalsV,.

Because collector current 1,, is propor-tional to 1,, and to the difference be-tween base voltages Va, and V5, it canbe assumed that this circuit can per-form subtraction and multiplication,in addition to straight amplification.The circuit can, in fact, perform awide variety of functions, includingoperation as an automatic -gain -controlled amplifier, a limiter, a bal-anced mixer, an autodyne converter, amodulator, and a product detector.

Amplifier characteristics

If a single signal voltage is applied tothe base of transistor 0, with the

ijO 200

100

tv. 0 1.11 I .111 I 1111 1 1 t 2 4 44 2 1111010 10 q 00 400

FREQUENCY -4112

Fig. 9-Reduction in feedbackcapacitance by use of a differ-ential amplifier.

.200 I 1 1 1 I till t I 1 1 I 1

01 " 10 2 "10 " 100 2

FREQUENCY - 4,12

i

,000

Fig. 10-Reduction in feedback capacitance by use of acascode amplifier.

bases of the other two transistors Ac -

grounded and the load placed in thecollector of 0,, the result is the circuiton Fig. 8a. Because the output im-pedance of the grounded -base transis-tor Q. is high, all of the emitter currentin 0, flows into the emitter of 0 andthe result is a common -collector ampli-fier driving a common -base amplifier.At fairly low frequencies, the voltagegain G, is given by

G, (3)104

where the collector current J,, is thetotal current drawn by the stage.

Although this gain is only one -quarterof that available from a single transis-tor drawing the same current, thelimitation is not as it appears. In thefirst place, the value of R, is limitedby the output impedance of the ampli-fier stage. Because the outpiit imped-ance of the common -base transistor Qzis several times larger than that of asingle common -emitter stage, highervalues of R, are practical.

More important, however, is the re-duction in feedback that accompaniesthis configuration. The maximumstable gain of a tuned amplifier islimited by the capacitive or inductivefeedback between input and output.

An approximate formula for the maxi-mum usuable power gain (MUG) is

given by

MUG=( 2g.

27r1C4)K(4)

where K is a skew, usually assumed tobe between 0.2 and 0.4. If the g, is

about 60,000 micromhos, a feedbackcapacitance of 1-pF will limit MUG to16 dB at 100 MHz.

The differential configuration can pro-vide a reduction in feedback capaci-tance C,,, of 150 times at low frequen-cies and thus nearly eliminate thissource of gain limitation. Fig. 9 showsthe feedback capacitance reductionratio as a function of frequency for atypical amplifier.

Fig. 8b shows another configuration inwhich the signal is inserted at the baseof transistor 0, with the load in thecollector of Oz. If the bias on transistor0, and Q: is set so that 0, is OFF

(11.,=0), the result is a common -emitter amplifier driving a common -base amplifier, or a "cascode" config-

82

(a)

(b)

70

60

50

g 40

3

30

20

0

FREQUENCY OF DESIREDCARRIER 1231148

FREQUENCY OF UNDESIREDCARRIER 16 MN,

- OPERATING MODE D

I I I

3 6 10 30 60 100

70

60

OPERATING rPZEE D50 FREQUENCY 0' DESIRED

CARRIER 2 MK,FREQUENCY 0, UNDESIRED

CARRIER 610040 NEGATIVE ACC DIAS APPLIED2

TO TERMINAL 40.12 OF THECA3005 CM CA3006 AND TOTERMINAL NC ! OF THE CA3004

; 30

5CA3005 OR CA3006

20

Io

I 0 1 1I I 1 I I

3 6 IC 30 60 100 300 600UNDESIRED INPUT VOLTAGE -MILL VOLTS PIS (c) UNDESIRED CARPER INPUT VOLTAGE -MILLIVOLTS MS

70

6060

FREQUENCY 0, DESIREDCARRIER I2 MHz

50 FREQUENCY CF

7

60 CARRIER I6mHzOPERATING MODE D

0 40 FREQUENCY OF DESIREDCARRIER 1261* 40

FREQUENCY OF UNDESIREDCARRIER WWI,

OPERATING MODE D30 30

20 3 20

10 O

°

I 03 6 10 30 60 100UNDESIRED INPUT VOLTAGE-MIL_IVOLTY. RMS

300 (d)

\

NEGATIVENEGATIVE GAIN - ;.)NTROL vOLTAGE,VB8(AT TERMINAL I)

POSITIVE GAIN- CCNITROL VOLTAGE. V80(AT TERMINAL I)

6 10 30 ;) 100uNDESIREC INPUT v)LTAGE-P LLIVOLTS RMS

300 600

Fig. 11-AGC characteristics of the basic IC amplifiers using CA 3005: a) cascode mode with negative AGC applied to the base of transistor03; b) cascode mode with AGC applied to turn on transistor 0,; c) differential amplifer operation with AGC applied to base of Q3; d) forwardand reverse AGC.

uration. This configuration provideseven better isolation between inputand output than the differential mode.As a result, feedback capacitance canbe reduced more than 1000 times, asshown in Fig. 10.

Gain and noise figure are importantparameters in RF and IF amplifiers. Onthe other hand, signal -handling capa-bility is also of major significance inall systems. Signal -handling capabilitymay be evaluated from the distortionof a modulated signal or by investiga-tion of the crossmodulation or inter -modulation produced when a strongundesired signal and a weak desiredsignal are present at the amplifierinput. Because all of these effects arerelated, a study of one produces agood picture of the way an amplifiercan handle large signals.

The AGC capability is also importantin amplifier performance. This capa-bility is related to dynamic rangebecause signal -handling capability isaffected by the operating point of theamplifier. The curves shown in Fig.11 relate the AGC capability andcrossmodulation performance of theCA3005 (shown in Fig. 3) at 12 MHz.

Fig. 11 shows the AGC characteristicsfor both the differential and cascodemodes of operation for different meth-ods of AGC. Fig. I la shows a cascodemode with negative AGC applied to thebase of transistor Transistor 0., iscut off to reduce the g,, and therebyreducing gain. This curve is similar tothat obtained with a single transistorexcept that more AGC is available be-cause of the reduction in feedbackwhich provides a feed -forward pathwhen AGC is applied.In Fig. 1lb, the amplifier is operated inthe cascode mode and AGC is appliedto turn on transistor Q, (i.e., positive -going voltage is applied to the base ofQ, or negative -going voltage to thebase of 03). At maximum gain, all thecollector current from transistor 0,flows in 02 and into the load. Astransistor 0, turns on, some of thecollector current / is diverted into1:1 and the AC current in the load isreduced. Eventually, all of the currentflows in transistor 0, and any outputsignal is the result of stray coupling.Signal handling is not affected muchby this type of AGC, because the oper-ating point of transistor Q, does notchange.

Fig. I lc shows a differential amplifieroperation in which AGC is applied tothe base of transistor Q,. Because Eq. 3shows that the gain is proportional tocollector current I, AGC is expected.The shape of the g., curve with differ-ential input voltage does not changeappreciably as transistor 0, is cut off;therefore, the signal -handling capabil-ity is very uniform until cutoff isreached. This curve applies only whenthe collector currents 1 and 1, arebalanced.

In the differential mode, the cross -modulation characteristics are quitedifferent depending on whether theinput transistor 0, is turned furtherON (forward AGC) or cut off (reverseAGO . Fig. 1 Id shows forward and re-verse AGC, respectively.

Limiter performance

A differential amplifier driven by aconstant -current transistor is probablythe optimum circuit configuration forbipolar transistor limiters. The advan-tage of such circuits is that collectorsaturation of either differential -pairtransistor 0, or can be avoided be -

83

5.0

0

I

182

i

LINEARREGION

lc,

.......-(6

is

4

)1 8 4II,. 05115ot(,V,2

T

2

150 -200 -150 -100 -50 50 100 150 200 2!

DIFFERENTIAL INPUT VOLTAGE -MW0

Fig. 12 -Limiting characteristic of a differential am-plifier.

v+

Fig. 13 -Typical balanceddifferential amplifier.

10

FREOUENCY III 204111:CONSTANT RF SIGNALCONSTANT LOAD 18000 OHMS)

S

o.

2

IF

mixer using an

I

J

03

RE

integrated

011

1 I I

001 2 6 S 2 6

OSCILLATOR VOLTAGE - VOLTS RMS

Fig. 14 -Conversion gain as a function of oscillatorvoltage.

L.. IF

cause the peak -to -peak current swingin the output is controlled by thecurrent set by Q,. Fig. 12 shows thischaracteristic. When the peak -to -peakcurrent swing is known, the load re-sistance can be selected to assure thatthe collector voltage of transistor Q.,never swings below the base voltage.With this restricted voltage swing, theoutput resistance and capacitance ofthe limiter are reasonably constant,and the tuning characteristics of theload are not degraded.

Mixer capabilities

The differential amplifier is extremelydesirable as a mixer as well as anamplifier. In addition, the differentialamplifier easily converts to autodyneconverter, modulator, or product -detector service.

Fig. 13 illustrates a typical mixer con-figuration. The oscillator is applied tothe base of transistor 0 while the RF

signal is applied to the differential pair(either single -ended or balanced drivemay be used). The use of a center -tapped load allows the common -modeoscillator signal to be cancelled in thesecondary of the load transformer.The DC bias between the bases oftransistor 0, and Q, may be adjustedto cancel the oscillator voltage com-pletely. If this adjustment is made, thecircuit may be used as a balancedmodulator in which the differentialsignal is the modulating signal and thesignal on transistor Q, is the carrier.In the circuit shown, an emitter re-sistor is included in the emitter of 0,to improve the circuit linearity with

respect to the oscillator signal. Themore nearly sinusoidal the oscillatorcurrent in transistor Q the better therejection of spurious responses in themixer. The balanced nature of the RF

portion also helps to reduce the gen-eration of these responses by provid-ing cancellation of even harmonics ofthe RF signal.

Table I shows the spurious responseperformance for various incomingfrequencies. As the injection level isreduced, the improvement in thespurious -response performance is ac-companied by a corresponding reduc-tion in conversion gain which isdirectly proportional to injection volt-age over the range shown in Fig. 14.This circuit will also perform verywell in the autodyne converter con-figuration, as shown in Fig. 15. In thiscircuit, the current flowing in the oscil-lator tank circuit is independent of theRF signal because all of the current inthe collector of 0, must flow to the V..supply. The circuit, therefore, is notsusceptible to the oscillator pullingand blocking which occur in single -transistor autodyne converters.

The universal IC?

The preceding discussion has shownthat an tc which encompasses a basicdifferential amplifier can perform mostof the RF and IF functions in a commu-nications receiver. The inclusion ofbias components, such as those con-tained in the CA3005 shown earlier,provides a building block to whichthe equipment manufacturer need onlyadd tuned circuits and some RF bypass

Table I -Response of CA3005 mixer to spurious harmonics.

Frequency

Signal Vo.cfreq.. at term. 3(MHz) (rms volts)

Diff.-freq.output (dBrelative tofo-b)

V..,at term. 3(rms volts)

Dip.-/req.output (dBrelative to10-14

V..,at term. 3(rms volts)

Diff. /req.output (dBrelative to1.-14

1.0 0 0.7 0 0.3 0

2/,-f. 1.159 -53.1 0.7 -53.1 0.3 -54.9

2/0-2f, 1.329 -76.1 0.7 0.3

2b -2f. 1.988 -75.5 0.7 0.3

2/.-/, 2.659 -31.7 0.7 -35 0.3 -39.7

2/,-3f. 2.813 -79.6 0.7 0.3

3.977 -31.7 0.7 - 35 0.3 -39.7

3/.-1, 4.309 -35.8 0.7 -59.3 0.3 -74.7

1.-3/0 5.627 -38.5 0.7 -57 0.3 -745.977 -38.9 0.7 -63 0.3

f. -I.659 MHz; V.., ..oscillator injection voltage.All blank spaces indicate difference -frequency output more than 80 dB below the fo-f, output.

84 Fig. 15-A self -oscillating mixer (autodyneconverter) derived from the mixer of Fig. 13.

D2

®

Fig. 16-The RCA-CA3023: a higher level of inte-gration that does not use the differential -amplifierstructure.

capacitors to complete a stage. Thistype of circuit, however, does not rep-resent a very high level of integrationand, therefore, is not as economical asmore complex structures.

The RCA-CA3076 shown in Fig. 16represents a higher level of integrationand illustrates the building-block na-ture of the differential amplifier. Thiswideband limiter amplifier features avoltage gain of 80 dB at 10.7 MHz in atypical circuit. Four differential ampli-fiers comprise the amplifier. The laststage uses a constant -current transistorO,, to provide optimum limiting, whilethe other stages require only resistor -current sinks. These stages are coupledby the emitter followers 0.. 0., and0,, which provide level shifting andimpedance matching. The remainingcircuitry supplies proper operatingvoltages for the amplifier and providesneeded decoupling to prevent insta-bility which might be caused by cou-pling in the power supply.

The greatest economic advantage isachieved by integration of a system.One example is the RCA-CA3065shown in Fig. 17. Designed to operatefrom the sound take -off at the videodetector in a TV receiver, this circuitprovides full limiting for input signalsabove 200 µV RMS, and can drive ahigh -voltage output transistor directly.The photograph shown in Fig. 18 illus-trates the completeness of the integra-tion. This board contains the entiresound system except for the volumecontrol, output transistor, outputtransformer, and loudspeaker.

004KF

P

SOUNDTAKE -OFF

TRANSFORMER

005,F

NOMINAL

D(UNLOADEDI 50

ALL RESTS-ANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS

Vcc 040 VOLTS)

Rs

39KSW

REGULATEDPOWERSUPPLY

SUBSTRATE

68 FF I12pF

84

COLT MCONTROL

03Kr

K

0 CH 08 -EMPHASISpF

0047pF

I

B*MO VOLTS

2535125

Fig. 17-Schematic of an integrated sound system for a hybrid TV receiver.

What's coming?

I he techniques which will provideorders of magnitude of performanceimprovement in RF and IF lc's arealready known. Techniques such asdielectric isolation to replace the P -N

junctions that isolate components inconventional monolithic ic's withsilicon -oxide layers have been madecommercially but are in very limiteduse. Beam -lead technology promisesimprovements by use of heavy leadstructures so that substrates can beetched away and circuit elements iso-lated by air. In this case, techniques ofhandling and supporting these struc-tures must be found. The answer tothis problem may be a techniquewhich uses a plastic film as a base onwhich lc chips are mounted. This filmsupports the chips during etching andalso provides external connections.

However, most RF/1F functions willcontinue to be provided by conven-tional monolithic techniques, and new

270 V

circuit designs will push performanceto much higher levels. A three -stage,all -transistor lc has been designedwhich provides gain of 43 dB with a3 -dB bandwidth of nearly 400 MI-Izand a gain stability of ±0.3 dB overthe entire military temperature range.

The mos field-effect transistors havemuch better overload and crossmodu-lation characteristics than bipolar de-vices. Compatible processes existtoday that allow the fabrication offield-effect and bipolar transistors onthe same chip. Although these tech-niques have been used primarily in theoperational -amplifier field, where thehigh input impedance of mos devicesmakes them attractive, application ofthese transistors in RF circuits willfollow rapidly.

Reference

I. From D.A.T.A. BOOK LINEAR INTE-GRATED CIRCUITS. Spring 1970, D.A.T.A.,Orange, N.I.

Fig. 18-A complete TV sound system (tube and integratedcircuit removed for clarity). 85

Engineering andResearch zNotesBrief Technical Papersof Current Interest

Estimating failure rates forMSI and LSI integrated circuits

M. S. PlesherReliability EngineeringAstro-Electronics DivisionPrinceton, New Jersey

Reprint RE -16-4-18 I Final manuscript received June 18, 1970.

At present, lc manufacturers calculate failures rates on thebasis of total unit -hours of testing and on the total number offailures. Differentiation as to complexity (i.e. chip size, circuitcomplexity, or number of bonds) is not made. Often becausethe data generated on a specific device is not sufficient to dem-onstrate the true failure rate [data limited failure rate], an icmanufacturer or user will often combine data from manydifferent device types. Justification for the combining of datais made on the basis of "structurally similar devices manu-factured using identical processes." The failure rate derivedfrom this combined data is then applied to all device typeswithin the family. For example, the same failure rate has pre-viously been used for a dual gate unit, as well as a triple gateand a quad gate within the same family. When a new deviceis obviously more complex than a previously manufactureddevice and insufficient reliability testing has been performed onthat new device to generate a realistic failure rate, there is noknown accepted method for estimating the inherent failurerate, except by performing additional testing and generatingmore unit -hours of test data on the device itself.

If the data taken on less complex devices is maintained on thebasis of specific failure mechanisms and expressed in terms ofa time -weighted -base, normalized failure rates can be generatedand used to estimate a failure rate for a more complex device.The failure mechanism categories proposed are as follows:

1) Bonds-Failures involving bonds or bond wires (such asopen bonds due to mechanical separation, open bonds dueto chemical corrosion, and broken bond wires) shall be con-sidered in this category. The time -weighted -base for this cate-gory shall be bond hours; e.g., a 14 -lead monolithic lc tested for1,000 hrs would generate 28,000 bond -hours of data and a22 -lead monolithic c tested for 1,000 hrs would generate44,000 bond -hours of data. The normalized failure rate forthis category would be expressed as bond failures per bond -hour.2) Chip size-Failures related to chip sizes (such as oxidedefects, cracks, and chip -mount failures) shall be consid-ered in this category. The time -weighted -base for this cate-gory would be miP-hours; e.g., a 50 -by -50 -mil chip tested for1000 hrs would generate 2.5 million mir-hours of data, whilea 100 -by -100 -mil chip tested for 1000 hrs would generate 10million mil' -hours of data. The normalized failure rate forthis category would be expressed as chip defects per miP-hour.3) Circuit complexity-Failures related to circuit complexity(such as open metalization, opens at an oxide cut out oroxide step, and photolithographic and diffusion defects) shall

be considered in this category. The time -weighted -base for thecategory should ultimately be either active -junctions -hours oroxide cut-out hours. However, for this paper, gate -hours isused. The calculation is straightforward: (number of gates)x (number of test hours) = gate -hours. The normalized fail-ure rate for this category would be expressed in failures pergate -hour and eventually in failures per active -junction -houror failures per oxide -cut -out -hour.4) Constant-There will naturally be some failures (suchas contamination, hermetic seals, and scratches) that willnot fall into one of the preceding three categories. This datawill not be weighted or normalized and the failure rate willbe expressed as failures per unit -hour. If the failure rate forthis category proves too high, a new category may be indi-cated.

Sample problem

To demonstrate how this technique might be applied, the fol-lowing problem is proposed and a solution based on the tech-nique described is offered: a 100 -gate equivalent circuit with8 inputs and 12 out -puts is constructed by the following twomethods:

Method 1-The 100 -gate equivalent circuit is constructed from25, quad, two -input, cos/mos gates' (4 gates in a single pack-age) and a glass -epoxy printed -circuit board. The quad gate isa standard circuit with a demonstrated failure rate of X4 fail-ures per hour, is built on a 50 -by -50 mil chip and is packaged ina 14 lead package. For this analysis, the failure rate of the PCboard and external solder joints are assumed to be much lowerthan the failure rate of the quad gates and therefore will beneglected.

Method 11-The 100 -gate equivalent circuit is constructed of asingle, custom -designed, 100 -gate, msi, cos/mos ic. This 100 -gate circuit is new, is built on a 100 -by -100 -mil chip, and ismounted in a 22 -lead package (8 inputs, 12 outputs, Vnn, andground). No failure rate for this circuit has been established.

What is the inherent reliability for the 100 -gate equivalentcircuit constructed by each of the above methods? What isthe relative ratio of failure rates, the greater failure rate ascompared to the lesser failure rate?

Obviously, the failure rate for the circuit using 25 quad gateswould be just 25 times the failure rate of a single quad gatecircuit; i.e., 25X, failures per hour. The failure rate for the100 -gate oast device, however, is not as obvious. The lowerlimit would be the failure rate of a single quad gate, X4. Theupper limit is much more difficult to estimate, and may evenexceed 25 times the failure rate of a single quad gate; i.e., ifthe failure rate for each failure category is non-linear! For thisexample, and until such time as actual data can be analyzed,the failure rate for each category will assume to be either linearor constant.

Using data from RADC,' which "is a listing of those predomi-nant integrated circuit failure mechanisms with the percentcontribution being an average of what is representative for theindustry as a whole" the failure rate for the quad gate (XA)was weighted, normalized, and used to estimate the failure ratefor the 100 -gate oast circuit. These calculations are shown inTable I.

Failure rate calculations

The solutions to the above problems are as follows:

1) The failure rate for construction method I is 25 X. failuresper hour.2) The failure rate for method II is rounded to 8 X., failuresper hour.3) The ratio of failure rates I: II is approximately 3:1.

Conclusions

The intention of this paper is only to illustrate the principlesof weighting and normalizing lc reliability data; it is recog-

86

nized that the assumptions made will have to be verified bythe review and reduction of existing reliability data. Only asexisting data is analyzed and reliability data on MSI and Lsidata is generated, will the open questions be answered; andonly then will the areas which remain vague be defined moreclearly such as

1) The generation of a more complete definition of failuremodes within each failure mechanism category;2) The determination of whether the existing categories aresatisfactory or are more categories required;3) The determination of failure rates for each category; and4) The determination of whether failure rates are linear ornon-linear within each category.

In addition, the general usefulness of this technique must beexplored, applications must be discussed by the users, and stan-dards for data taking must be developed by the is manufac-turers.

References

1. The power dissipation of cos/mos ic's is so low (typically nW per gate)that the total power dissipation of a 100 -gate circuit does not signifi-cantly raise the junction temperature above that of a quad gate. There-fore, the effect of power dissipation can be neglected in this example.

2. At this point, no data has been analyzed. Analysis may show that thefailure rate within a failure category may actually be non-linear, e.g.the ratio of the bond per bond -hour failure rate between a 56 -bonddevice and a 28 -bond device may not be 2.0 but may be 1.8 or 2.5, etc.Likewise the ratio of the chip defects per mil -hour between a 50 -by -50mil device and a 100 -by -100 mil device may not be 4.0 but may be 3.8or 4.5, etc. This non -linearity may be due to a relaxation of inspectioncriteria to increase yields of complex devices, fatigue of the inspection,learning, thermal dissipation or some other physical phenomenon.

3. O'Connel, E. P., "An Introduction to MIL -STD -883 Test Methods andProcedures for Microelectronics", Rome Air Development Center, GriffinsAir Force Base, N.Y. 13440.

Table I-Failure-rate calculations.

Failure Failuremeth- rateanism appor-cate- lion-gory ment

Quad gate 100 -Gate MSI

Failurerateconstit-uentsfailures/hour

Failurerate

Normalized constit-failure rate uents

Weight Valuefailures/

Units Weight hour

Bonds 33% 0.33 XA 28 bonds 0.0118 X4 bond fail- 44 bonds 0.5186 X4urea/bondhour

Chipsize 25% 0.25 XA 2,500 0.001 XA

miPchip 10,000 1.000 X4

defects/ mil,miI2-hour

Circuitcom-plexity 25% 0.25 XA 4 gates 0.0625 X4 failures/ 100 gates 6.250 Xi

gate -hourCon-stant 17% 0.17 XA N/A 0.1700 X4 failures/ N/A 0.1700 X4

device -hour

Totals N/A \ 7.9386 XA

Drill chuck for a wire -wrap tool

John F. KingsburyGraphic Systems DivisionDayton, N.J.

Reprint RE -16-4-18 Final manuscript received October 14, 1970.

Anyone who has had to modify printed -circuit boards in thefield has found that using a high-speed drill often burns theprinted circuit board and that slow -speed drills are not alwaysavailable. This note describes a modified wire -wrap -tool bit and

a modified pin vise that function as a miniature drill chuckfor a wire -wrap tool. Wire -wrap tools are readily available inshops, laboratories, and field areas in AC or battery -poweredmodels. When equipped with the converted bit and pin vise,they become useful as a drill. The chuck accommodates minia-ture drill bits, making the wire -wrap tool especially useful inmodel shops or field locations for rework and modification ofprinted circuits or construction of breadboards. Its relativelyslow speed of rotation insures no burning of circuit boards.

Fig. 1 shows the drill -chuck accessory separately and as itappears when mounted in a wire wrap tool. The conversion iseasily made as shown in Fig. 2, which illustrates the wire -wraptool bit, the bit sleeve and pin -vise alterations.

Fig. 1-Drill-chuck accessory for a typical wire -wrap tool.

1-1/4 rri

2 3/4"

DRILL 3/64 HOLE

H182 26263

"i-- 17/8"

I 1/8"

CUTHERE

TYPICAL PIN VISE

26245 -464

CUTHERE

15/8"

ROLL PIN 5/84"

l'iq

3119

11UASSEMBLED DRILL CHUCK BIT

Fig. 2-Wire-wrap tool drill -chuck accessory; the bit, sleeve, andpin -vise are cut, modified, and assembled to form the wire -wrapdrill -chuck accessory.

87

Penand Podium

Comprehensivesubject -author index

to Recent RCA

technical papers

Both published papers and verbal presentations are indexed. To obtain a pub-lished paper, borrow the journal in which it appears from your library, or writeor call the author for a reprint. For information on unpublished verbal pre-sentations. write or call the author. (The author's RCA Division appears paren-thetically after his name in the subject -index entry) For additional assistancein locating RCA technical literature. contact. RCA Staff Technical Publica-tions, Bldg. 24, RCA, Camden. N.J. (Eat. PC -401S).

This index Is prepared from listings provided bimonthly by RCA DivisionTechnical Publcations Administrators and Editorial Representatives-whoshould be contacted concerning errors or omissons (see inside back cover).

Subject IMMIX categories are based upon the Thessurus of EngineeringTema, Engineers Joint Council, N.Y., 1st Ed., May 1964.

Subject IndexTitles of papers are permuted wherenecessary to bring significant keyword(s)to the left for easier scanning. Authors'division appears parenthetically after hisname.

ACOUSTICS

TRI-WAVE STEREO ACOUSTICS-J. EVolkmann (Labs. Pr) Mtg. of the AudioEngineering Soc.. New York City;10/15/70

VARIABLE ACOUSTIC STUDIOS, RCA's-J E Volkmann (Labs. Pr) Mtg of theAudio Engineering Soc. New York City.10/11/70

AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTS

VOICE WARNING DETECTION Tech-niques to Helicopter Aids. Application ofArmy- J Burnell (EASD. Van NuyslGOMAC Digest.

AMPLIFICATION

ELECTRON -BEAM INJECTED TRANSIS-TOR AMPLIFIER (EBIT). Fabrication ofan-R. K Pearch. M Freeling. H JWolkstein, S Ponczak (EC. Harrison)IEEE Conf on Electron -Device Tech-niques. New York City, 9'23.24'70

TRAVELING WAVE AMPLIFIER UsingThin Epitasial GaAs Leper-R H Dean.A B. Dreeben. J F Kaminski. A. Triano(Labs. Pr) GOMAC Cont, Ft. Monmouth,New Jersey. 10/6-8/70

ULSE AMPLIFIER. Dertfloprrwl of aMonolithic 2S -Ampere --V. Organic. R.Wayner, A Lichowsky (EASE). Van Nuys)Gov. Microcircuited Application Conf.:10/7/70; Washington. D.C.

CIRCUITS INTEGRATED

A1,0, COS/MOS INTEGRATED CIR.CUTTS Using Plasma AnodizatIon, Fabri-cation of-P. E Norris, C. W Benyon. JShaw (Labs, Pr) GOMAC, Ft. Monmouth,New Jersey: 10/6-8/70

CROSSTALK CHARACTERISTICS ofShielded Wiring and Printed CircuitTrack, Comparison of-J. A. Wissner(CSO. Camden) Audio Engineering Soc.New York; 10/13/70

HYBRID CIRCUITS, New ProcessingTechnologies o1-J. A. Amick (Labs. Pr)8th Technical Cony on Electronic Com-ponents, Reggio Calabria, Italy; 9/20-27/70

IC's for Microwaves R. B Schilling (SSD.Som) Electronics World: 7/70

COMMUNICATION, DIGITAL

MULTI -BIT DELTA MODULATION. Com.parlson and Design Criteria for-M.Hecht (AED, Pr) Symp on Picture CodingN. Carolina State Univ.

COMMUNICATIONS COMPONENTS

FMFD DEMODULATOR, A UnThreshold Extending-M.M Gerber(GCS. Camden) IEEE Trans on Commu-nications Technology Vol COM-113, No1. 8/70

OSCILLATORS, High -Power K -Band Sill.con Avelanch.-Diode- S G Liu. J JRisky. K K N. Chang (Labs, Pr) Procof the IEEE: Vol. 58. No. 6: 6/70

OSCILLATOR from L to C -Band, High.Power Microstrip Avalanche-Diode-S.G. Liu. J. J Risk° (Labs. Pr) IEEE IntlElectron Devices Mtg. Washington. DC.;10,28-30,70

SOLID STATE EXCITER for AmpliphaseAM Broadcast Transmitters- D A Sauer(CSD. Camden) IEEE. Fall Symp. Wash-ington. D C , 9'25'70

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM, A DynamicSpec. Division Multiples-H. Staras. LSchiff (Labs, Pr) IEEE Trans on Vehicu-lar Technology: Vol VT -19. No 2; 5/70

RADIO RELAY BASEBAND DIVERSITYSYSTEMS. Analysis of. -K. Feher (Ltd.Mont) Filth Biennial Symp. on Communi-cation Theory and Signal Processing,8/21.26/70: Kingston, Oni

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS

DIGITAL CONTROL OF a CRT Phototype -selling System S Racir) (GSD Dayton)Computer Design. II 70

COMPUTER STORAGE

COS/MOS PARALLELED PROCESSORARRAY-A Alaspa, E Dingwall (ASDBurl) IEEE J of Solid State Circuits. VolSC5. No. 5: 10/70

MOS MEMORY Trews!. in Fast Eli -PolarCrowd-E. J. Boleky. J R Burns, J. EMeyer, J. H. Scott (Labs, Pr) Electronics:Vol. 32. No. 15. 7/20/70

CONTROL SYSTEMS

CLOSED LOOP DYNAMICS of a Dual -Spin Spacecraft. Linearization of theK T. Phillips (AED. Pr) AIAA Guidanceand Control Cont.; Cony Paper SantaBarbara, Calif.

DISPLAYS

ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY, Two-Color-K. C Adam (EASD. Van Nuys) Informa-tion Display; Vol. 7. No. 7; July,'Aug 1970

HOMEFAX: A Consumer Information Sys-tem-W. D Houghton (Labs. Pr) Soc. forMotion Picture and Television Engineers,New York City; 10/5-7/70

MATRIX DISPLAY Techniques-B. J.Lechner (Labs, Pr) Information DisplayTutorial, Polytechnic Institute of Brook-lyn; 9/15/70

STORAGE -DISPLAY TUBES, Recent De-velopments in Cathadochromic--P Hey-man, I Gorog, B. Faughnan (Labs. Pr)IEEE Intl Electron Devices Mtg . Wash.ington, D.C.; 10/28-30/70

DOCUMENTATION

TECHNICAL JOURNALS Look to theFuture- D B Dobson (ASD, Burl) Socof Technical Writers and Publishers Sem-inar on "The End of Communicating: TheImpact of Technology." Boston. Mass.:10/23/70

ELECTRO-OPTICS

ELECTRO.OPTICAL SYSTEMS Auto-matic Testing of-R. Welter. A Berens(ASD. Burl) ASSC Record; 10/70

ENERGY CONVERSION

CONSTANTTEMPERATURE HEATPIPES, Experimental Operation of-W.E. Harbaugh. G Y. Eastman (EC. Lanc)Intersociety Energy Conversion Engineer.ing Conf Las Vegas. Nevada. 9/21.25/70

HYBRID THERMOCOUPLE DevelopmentProgram-A Status Report L P Garvey.R Straight IEC, Haman) IntersocietyEnergy Conversion Engineering ConfLas Vegas, Nevada: 9/21/25/70

LITHIUM -CONTAINING SOLAR CELLS.Room -Temperature Stability of T HForth. J Corra. A G Holmes-Siedie(AED. Fr) IEEE Photovoltaic SpecialistsCont. Proc. 01 Conf ) Seattle. Wash.

SILICON -GERMANIUM AIR -VAC CON-VERTER Development, Status of --R EBerlin IEC. Horse) Intersociety EnergyConversion Engineering Conf.) LasVegas. Nevada. 9'21-25'70

SODIUM/NICKEL HEAT PIPES. Develop-ment of HighPerformance-R. A Freg-gens R W Longsderff (EC. Lanc) Inter -society Energy Conversion EngineeringCost Las Vegas, Nevada; 9/21.25/70

ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING

PHOTOMUTIPLIER COOLING, Generat-ing Cold Gas for-J. Gerber (Labs, Pr)Review of Scientific Instruments, Vol. CI,No 7; 7/70

VISCOELASTIC DAMPING to ImprovePerformance of (Horizontal) VibrationTest Fixture, The Application of --E J.Setescak (AED. Pr) 41st Shock and Vi-bration Symp, Shock and Vibration Bulle-tin No. 41; 10/27-29/70; USAF Academy.Colorado Springs. Colorado

GEOPHYSICS

SEA SURFACE TEMPERATURE, PassiveMicrowave Radiometric Measurementsof D G Shipley. K J Torok (AED. Pr)1970 IEEE Intl Conf. on the Ocean En-vironment; Conf. Digest; Panama City.Fla.

NATURAL ATMOSPHERIC DISTURB-ANCES-Lightning & Static Electricity-Hill/Spec (RCASvCo. Cherry Hill) Confin San Diego. Calif 9'10-11 '70

GRAPHIC ARTS

ELECTROSTATIC COMPUTER PRINTING-D A Ross (Labs. Pr) EASCON AnnualConf. Washington. D C , 10'26-28 70

GRAPHIC ARTS, Impact of ElectronicComposition In the-J. Vragel (GSD,Dayton) STWP/Boston U. Seminar)10'23/70

HOLOGRAPHY

DIODE LASERS to Recover Holographl-sally Stored Information, Use of-A. H.Firester. M E Heller (Labs. Pr) J. ofQuantum Electronics. Vol. 0E-6, No. 9:9/70

STORAGE of Holograms in a Ferroelec-trlePholoconduetor Device-S A Keneman. G. W Taylor, A Miller. W HFonger (Labs. Pr) Applied Physics Let-ters, Vol. 17, No. 4; 8/15/70

LABORATORY TECHNIODES

ANALYZING CERAMIC -METAL SEALFAILURES, Microscope Techniques for-T. F. Berry (EC. Haw) IEEE Conf. onElectron -Device Techniques; New YorkCity. 9'23.24'70

ELECTRON BEAM PUMPED Semicon-ductor Lasers and Other High Excitation.Apparatus for Studying F H Nicoll(Labs. Pr) Review or Scientific Instru-ments; Vol. 41, No. 8; 8/70

ETCHING OF SILICON with HI-HF Mixtures. Low -Temperature Gaseous-E. RLevin. J P Dismukes. M D Courts (Labs.Pr) 71h Intl Congress on Electron Mi-croscopy Grenoble. France. 8/30-9/5/70

INSTRUMENTATION (A Review), Se-lected Topics in-F1 E Honig (Labs. Pr)Triennial Intl Cost on Mass Spectros-copy. Brussels: 9 /3 '70

LOCAL MAGNETIC FIELDS by ScanningElectron Microscopy, Examination of-M. D. Coutls. E. R Levin (Labs, Pr) 7thIntl Congress on Electron Microscopy,Grenoble, France. 8:30.9/5/70

PHONON SPECTROSCOPY Through SpinLattice Coupling-C. H Anderson, E S.Sabisky (Labs. Pr) Colloque Ampere.Bucharest, Romania; 9 , 1 -5 /70

LASERS

ARGON LASER Amplifiers and Oscilla-tors, A Comparative Analytical Study ofthe Performance of -1 Gorog (Labs, Pr)Quantum Electronics Conf.; Kyoto, Japan:9/7-10/70

CHALCOGENIDE SPINEL Magnetic Semi-conductors --K Miyalani (Labs, Pr) KoterButsuri: Vol. 5, No. 1 8 5; 1970

ELECTROLUMINESCENT II -VI Hetet.-junclions--A G Fischer (Labs. Pr) IntlCon! on Heterolunctions. Budapest. Hun-gary: 10/10-17/70

ELECTRON EMISSION FROM GaAs, G.P.AND RELATED COMPOUNDS, Recent De-velopmen!-B F Williams. A G Sommer,D G. Fisher. J J. R. E Enstrom.M S Abraham (RCA. Labs, Pr) IntlSymp on GaAs and Related Compounds;Aachen. Germany; 10/5-7/70

FABRY-PEROT STRUCTURE A1,Ga, ,AsInjection Lasers with Room -TemperatureThreshold Current Densities of 2530A/cml- H Kressel, F Z Hawrylo (Labs.Pr) Applied Physics Letters. Vol. 17. No4; 8/15/70

GaAs INJECTION LASER ARRAYS, HighAverage Power P Nyul. A Limrn (SSD.Somi Electro Optical Systems DesignConf. New York City; 9/22-24/70

HeCd LASERS Using ReCirculationGeometry-K. G Hernqvist (Labs, Pr)Int') Quantum Electronics Con!. Hyoto,Japan; 9/7.10/70

INFRARED PHOTOCATHODE APPLICA-TIONS, Vapor Growth of Ga, An, AsAlloys for --R E Enstrom, D Richman,J Apper. D. G. Fisher, A H Sommer, B.F. Williams (Labs. Pr) Third Intl Symp.on Gallium Arsenide. Aachen. Germany:10/5.7/70

INJECTION LASERS. Recent Progress in--R Glicksmon (SSD. Som) Electro Opti-cal Systems Design Conf. New York City,9 22-24'70

LUMINESCENT PROPERTIES of GaN-JI Pankove. J. E Berkeyheiser. H PMaruska, J. Wittke (Labs, Pr) Solid StateCommunications, Vol. 8; 1970

MAGNETIC CHROMIUM SPINELS, Opti-cal Transitions Between Spin -PolarizedBands In-H. W Lehman. G Harbeke(Labs. Pr) Intl Cost on Magnetism,Grenoble, France: 9/11-19/70

PHOTOMULTIPLIERS for Laser Delft-tion-A Review of Recent Programs-HR Krell IEC. Left) Third Annual Conf.on Laser Studies of the Atmosphere;Ocho Rios, Jamaica; 9/9.12/70

PHOTOCOMPOSITION SYSTEM. A CRTGraphic --I Finn (GSD, Dayton) EASCON.10/27'70. Electrography Session.

PHOTOMULTIPLIERS for Laser RangingD E. Persyk (EC, Lanc) EOSD Conf.

PHOTOMULTIPLIERS for Laser Ranging-D. E Persyk (EC. Lane) Electro OpticalSystems Design Conf.; New York City;9/22-24/70

PULSED INFRARED SOURCES, UsingGaAs Arrays as-W. F DeVilbiss (SSD.Sow) Electro Optical Systems DesignCont.; New York City) 9/22-24/70

RARE -EARTH -DOPED OXYSULFIDES forGaAs -/roped Lwainescard DetrIces-PNYocom, J. P. Wittke, I. Ladany (Labs, Pr)AIME Mtg : New York; 9/2/70

TRANSPORT PROPERTIES of HgCr,Se,at Ferromagnetic Resonance-M. Toda'Labs. Pr) Applied Physics Letters. Vol.17. No 1. 7'1/70

VERY LOW THRESHOLD GaAs end Al -GaAs Infection Lasers, Prot/ergo' of -HKressel. F Z Hawrylo. H. F Lockwood(Labs. Pr) IEEE Intl Electron DevicesMtg . Washington. D C ; 10/28-30/70

VISIBLE -LIGHT -EMITTING N JUNCTIONS In Alas, The Preparation of- C:J Nuese A G Sigel. M. Ettenberg. J JGannon. S. L. Gilbert (Labs, Pr) AppliedPhysics Letters; Vol. 17, No. 2; 7/15/70

MANAGEMENT

PROJECT MANAGERS, How to Train-I.Brown (AID. Pr) First Western SpaceCongress. Proc Santa Maria. Calif.;10'27-29/70

MATHEMATICSNONLINEAR KLEIN-GORDON EQUA-TION, Solutions in the --R Hirota (LabsPr) Physical Soc. of Japan. Tokai UnivHiratsuka. Japan: 9/23-27/70

OPTICS

OUANTUM LIMITATION to Vision-ARose (Labs, Pr) Soc for PhotographicScientists and Engineers; Colloquium onImage Amplification, New York City)5/18/70

QUANTUM LIMITATIONS to Vision-ARose (Labs, Pr) Soc. for PhotographicScientists and Engineers Seminar: LosAngeles, 9/17.70

QUANTUM LIMITATIONS to 51,10., at lowlight levels-A Rose (Labs. Pr) ImageTechnology. Vol 12 No 1, June July1970

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED MultipleCavity Narrow Bandeau Special FillerR Mark. 0 Morand. S Waldstein (ASD.Burl) Applied Opticos, Vol 9. No 10 p2305-2310; 10/70

PLASMA PHYSICS

ANISOTROPIC PLASMA PRESSURE andiM DielevIric Sensor-T. W Johnston(LTD. Mont) J of Plasma Physics Vol 4Pt 2, 5/70

UPPER HYBRID RESONANCE by Satel-lites, Detection of the-I. P. Shkarofsky(LTD. Mont) Plasma Waves in Space andin the Laboratory: Vol. 2, Edinburgh Univ.Press; 1970

PROPERTIES, ATOMIC

GROUND STATE ENERGY of Free Ex-clIons In Group IV and WV Semiconduc-tors, on he --W. Czala (Labs. Pr) SwissPhysical Soc MIg Basel. Switzerland:10 '16-18 '70

PHONON TRANSPORT, The Role of Dis-persion and of Relaxation Time Approxi-mation for R Klein. R K Wenner (Labs.Pr) Swiss Physical Soc. Mtg . Basel,Switzerland, 10/16-18/70

SOFT PHONON MODE and Coupling InSSbSI Mode-G Harbeke. E F. Steig-rneier, R. K Wehner (Labs. Pr) SwissPhysical Soc. Mtg., Basel, Switzerland:10/16-18/70

PROPERTIES, MOLECULAR

CHEMICAL DIFFUSION In A1,0, ThinFilms Vapor Deposited on Single CrystalSilicon Substrelee-M Schieber. K. HZaininger (Labs. Pr) Conf on CrystalGrowth S Epitaxy from Vapor Phase.Zurich, Switzerland: 9/23-26/70

CHROMIUM SULFOAND SELENO-SPINELS, Crystal Growth and Charac-terization of-H.von Philipsborn (Labs.Pr) Cant on Crystal Growth 8 Epitasyfrom the Vapor Phase, Zurich, Switzer-land; 9/23-26/70

88

DEFECT GENERATION In Silicon -D. JOutrun (Labs, Pr) IBM East Fishkill, SolidState Seminar. 10,16/70

DISSOCIATION of the EV'. ChargeTrans's, Slate Into Erst and a Free Holein Y and La Osystellidee-C. W. Snuck.W H Fonger (Labs. Pr) Silver JubileeSymp. on Molecular Structure & Spec-troscopy. Ohio State Limy . Columbus.Ohio, 9,8-12/70

EPITAXIAL SEMICONDUCTOR LAYERS.Growth Defects in -E. R Levin, M. DCoons (Labs. Pr) 7th Intl Congress onElectron Microscopy. Grenoble, France.9/14-19170

GALLIUM PHOSPHIDE from Gallium So-lulion In an Owl Flow System, TheGrowth and Crown*, of--B.J Curtis(Labs, Pr) Mtg of the British Associationfor Crystal Growth. 9,9-11,70

HETEROEPITAXIAL GERMANIUM ANDSILICON. The Interdependence of theElectrical Properties and Ih DefectStructure in -D J Durum (Labs, Pr/ 18thNational Symp of the American VacuumSoc Washington, DC , 10/20-23/70

LIOUID CRYSTALS: Structure and Prop-erties of M.eomorphic Compounds- JA Castellano (Labs, Pr) Technical Asso-ciation of Pulp and Paper Industry, Min-ncapolis, Minnesota. 9 25'70

MONONITRIDES of Sc, Y. and the Ram -Earth Elements. EpItasiol Growth -J, PDismukes. W M Vim (Labs. Pr) Conf. onCrystal Growth and Epitasy from theVapor Phase. Zurich, Switzerland; 9/23-28/70

RATE OF SURFACE COVERAGE Duringthe Enigmas! Growth of Silicon on Spinel-G W Cullen (Labs. Pr) Electrochemi-cal Soc Mfg Atlantic City. New Jersey.111,4 O

RF SPUTTERING Processes -J L,,; Soc of Metals.

SEMICONDUCTING ofSc. Y, and the Rare Earth Elements.Vapor Deposition of J P Dismukes. WM Vim J J Trel,en. R E Novak (Labs.Pr) Cool on Crystal Gromlh and Epitaxyfrom Vapor Phase. Zurich. Switzerland,9/23/70

SILICON ON SAPPHIRE AND SPINEL,The Preparation and Properties of Chem-ically Vapor Deposited -G W. Cullen(Labs, Pr) Conf on Crystal Growth 8Epitavy from the Vopor Phase. Zurich,Switzerland, 9 '21-25/70

SINGLE -CRYSTAL 1111.11,0, The Growthel Large -A. D. Morrison. F A. Lewis. A.Millar (Labs. Pr) FerroelectriCs; Vol. 1,No. 2; 5/70

SINGLE GROWTH OFCdCr, (0-0-2)-F Okamoto, T.Oka (Labs. Pr) Physical Soc. of Japan.Tokai Univ., Hiratsuka, Japan: 9/23-27/70

SYSTEM Nb,Sni Jib, and the Donolly ofSlates Model for Nb,Sn-L J Vieland(Labs, Pr) J of the Physics and Chemistry of Solids Vol 31 1970

THERMAL ANNIHILATION of SlackingFault. in GaAs, klechoniern of the --M. SAbrahams. C J Bulocchi (Labs. Pr) Jof Applied Physics. Vol 41 No 6, 5 70

VAPOR -PHASE GROWTH of Several III -V Compound Semiconductors J J Tintten (Labs. Prl Annual Mtg of the Amer,can Vacuum Soc.. Washington. D C10/20/70

VAPOR -PHASE GROWTH of SeveralV Compound Semiconductors -J J Tietlen (Labs, Pr) Conf. on Crystal Growthand Epitaxy. Zurich. Switzerland. 9,24/70Cleveland. Ohio: 10,19/70

PROPERTIES. SURFACE

A1,0 FILMS Prepared by Eleclron BeamEvaporation of Hot Pressed A1,0, inOxygen Ambient -D. Hoffman. D Leibo-votz Labs Pr) 17th National VacuumSoc. Symp- Washington, D C ; 10/20-23/70

ELASTIC SURFACE WAVES: Thin -FilmTransducers and Layered -System Disper-sion -P Schnitzler, L Bergstem, L

Strauss (Labs, Pr) IEEE Trans. on Sons& Ultrasonics: Vol SU-17. No 3: 7'70

PHONON INTERFERENCE in Thin Filmsof Liquid Helium --C H Anderson. E S

Sabisky (Labs. Pr) Department of Physics.Um,/ of Massachusetts. Amherst, Mass.;10,2/70

SONIC -FILM BORAM-R Shahbender. L.Onyshkevych, H Kurlansok (Labs. Pr)GOMAC, Ft Monmouth. New Jersey;1068 70

PROPERTIES CHEMICAL

ANHARMONIC CRYSTAL. Adiabatic andIsothermal Elastic Constants of an R

K Wenner R Klon (Labs. Pr) SW,SSPhysical Soc Mk) . Basel. Switzerland,10 '16-18 70

ELECTROLESS NICKEL PLATING BATHS-Properties and Cheracloristics, NewRoom Tomperolure-N Feldstein (Labs.Prl Electrochemical Soc Atlantic CO,New Jersey 10,4-9/70

ELECTROLESS NICKEL PLATINGB ATHS. Potentiomenic Analysis of Hypo.phosphite in -N Feldstein. T S Lancsek.. J A Amick (cabs, Pr) AnalyticalChemistry, Vol 42, No 8. 7 '70

ELECTROLESS PLATING. Anionic Inhibi-tion In -N. Feldstein. P R Amodio (Labs.Pr) . of the Electrochemical Soc. Vol. 117.No 9. 9 70

ELECTROLYTIC REMOVAL of P -TypeGaAs Substrates from MK N -TypeSemiconductor Layers -C. J Nuese. J JGannon (Labs. Pr) J of the Electrochemical Soc Vol 117, No. 8. 8/70

SELECTIVE ELECTROLESS PLATINGTechniques: A Survey -N. Feldstein(Labs. Pr) Plating. August 1970

PROPERTIES ELECTRICAL

CHARGE TRANSPORT in n -TypeCdCr,Se,. MlaedConduction Model for -A Arndt, L R Friedman 'Labs. Pr) ThePhysical Review B, Vol. 2, No. 2: 7/15/70

HALL MOBILITY and Carrier Concentra-tion In Silicon -on -Sapphire. TemperatureDependence of IM -13 J Dumin. E CRoss (Labs. Pr) J or Applied Physics.Vol 41. No 7: 6'70

,Zn,Cr,Se,. Magnetic, Optical, andElectrical Properties of- T Takahashi. KMiyatani, K Minematsu (Labs. Pr) Physi-cal Soc. of Japan, Tokai Univ HiratsukaJapan: 9,23-27/70

SCATTERING by 'Ammons InRare Earth Metals --M Inoue (Labs. Pr(J of the Physical Soc of Japan. Vol 29No 1. 7 70

SI,N,,-S10, STRUCTURES. Charge Stor-age Eflocts In -E. C Ross (Labs. Pr)Gordon Research Con! TrIlon. NewHampshire 9 1 70

SILICON -ON -SAPPHIRE. SuperlinearCurrrent Density vs Electric Field inp -Type -E C Ross. G Wartield (LabsPr) J of Applied Physics, No 6, 5:70

SINGLE -CRYSTAL Electricaland Optical Switching Properties of -GW Taylor (Labs. Pr) FIII0OlOarICS. VolI, No 2; 5/70

PROPERTIES. MAGNETIC

Ag-In DOPED CdCr2S.,, Magnetic FieldEffects on- - M Torte. S Towne (Labs,Pr) Physical Soc of Japan. Tokai UnivHiratsuka. Japan, 9/23-27/70

HEXAGONAL CHROMIUM CNALCOGERIDES MCr,X IM Be. Pb. Eu. and DrX S end Se). Magnetic Properties of hMiyalant. F Okamoto. Y. Wada. M Ko-lima. T Harada (Labs. Or) Physical Socof Japan, Tokai Univ Hiratsuka, Japan.9/23-27/70

HEXAGONAL PbCr,S, STRUCTURE. Mag-netic Semiconductor Properties of Com-pounds Having the -F. Okamoto (Labs,Pr) Intl Cont., on Magnetism, Grenolbe.France: 9/14-19/70

Hg, Magnetic. Optical, andElectrical Properties of-T.Takahashi.K Miyalan, K Minematsu (Labs, pziPhysical Soc of Japan, Tokai UnivHiratsuka. Japan, 9/23-27 '70

HgCr,Se,,, Magnetic Semiconductor Prop-erties of- K Moyatan, K Minematsu, ITakahashi, P K Baltzer (Labs. Pr) IntlCont. on Magnetism. Grenoble. France9/14-19/70

MAGNETIC PHASE TRANSITIONS -KMiyalani (Labs, Pr) Symp on PhaseTransitions of Materials. Meguroku.Tokyo. Japan, 10/29-30/70

PROPERTIES. OPTICAL

CdCr,S,. Optical Properties of -K. MiYa-tan, S Osaka. F Okamoto (Labs. Pr)Physical Soc of Japan M1g Tokyo.Japan, 10/1.3/70

FERROMAGNETIC CdCr,Be,,. Photocon-ductivity In -S. B Berger, A Amin (Labs.Pr) Conf. on Magnetism. Grenoble,France. 9'14-19'70

HgCr,Se,. Optical Properties of-K.Miya-lani. S Osaka T Takahashi (Labs. PrlMtg of the Physical Soc. of Japan. TokaiUniv, Hiralsuka. Japan. 9/23.27/70

Hg, ,Zn,CrAesa, Magnetic. Optical. andElectrical Properties el -T. Takahashi,K K Mineolal. (Labs. Pr)Physical Soc. of Japan, Tokai Univ .Hiratsuka. Japan, 9/23-27/70

MAGNETIC CHROMIUM SPINELS. Opti-cal Transitions Between Spin.PolarivedB ands in --H W Lehmann. G Harbeke.H Pinch (Labs. Pr) Swiss Physical Soc.

Mig Basel, Switzerland. 10'16.18'70

OPTICAL ABSORPTION OF Gstil-J I

Pankove H P Maruska, J E Berkey.heiser (Labs, Pr) Applied Physics Letters.Vol 17. No. 5: 9/1/70

SINGLE -CRYSTAL B1,11,0,,, Electricaland Optical Switching Properties of GW. Taylor (Labs, Pr) Ferroelectrics, Vol1. No. 2, 5/70

RADAR

CHIRP RADAR SYSTEMS. ilidelobe Sup-pression In -S. Honickman (Labs, Pr(URSI Mtg., Ohio State Univ.. 9/15-17/70

RADIATION EFFECTS

A1,0, COS/MOS, Long -Term RadiationEffects In -F Micheletti. F KolondraIlabs. PrI GOMAC. Ft. Monmouth. NewJersey. 10 6.8 70

ANNEALING of Electron BombardmentDamage In Lithium -Containing Silicon -

G J Brucker (AED PH 1970 IEEE Conton Nuclear and Space Radiation EffectsIEEE Trans on Nuclear Science. SanDego, Calif

CMOS LOGIC NETWORKS, LongTermEffects of Radiation on --A. G Holmes-Siedle, W J Poch, (AED, Pr) 1970 IEEEConf on Nuclear and Space RadiationEffects, IEEE Trans. on Nuclear ScienceSan Diego Calif.

HARDENING SILICON SOLAR CELLSAgainal the Radiation Envi renew', RecentAdvances in -A4 Wolf, G Brucker (AED.Pr) 1970 IE CEC. Las Vegas. Nevada

INSULATOR FILMS, Radiation Effects in-K. H Zaininger (Labs. Pr) Gordon Re-search Cord Tilton. New Hampshire9/1/70

RECORDING

PRODUCING UNPLAYABLE TAPES. TheCompleal Arl 01- R N Hold ICSD

i- lei, Videotape Producers Assoc;

SPACECRAFT TAPE RECORDER, LongLife -R. Miller, R. J. Treadwell (AED,EASCON; Washington, D C ; 10/26-28'70

RECORDING. AUDIO

MODULAR AUDIO CONSOLE for Brood -casting and Recording The Design of New W F Hanway (CSD Camden)Audio Engineering Scc . New York10 13 70

RELIABILITY

HOMEFAX, A Consumer Information Sys-tem W 0 Houghton (Labs. Pr) Soc forMotion Picture and Teletwaon Engineers.New York City, 10'5-7/70

SELF -SCANNED IMAGE SENSORS Basedupon Bucker -Brigade Scanning -M. G.Kovac, P K. Weimer, F V Shallcross.W. S Pike (Labs. Pr) IEEE Intl ElectronDevices MN Washington D C 10/29-30/70

RELIABILITY

GENERALIZED MIL -STD -09 PROGRAM.An Evaluation of a -A C Spear (ASO.Burl) C. n' .in ()utility Curlrol Statisticsin Industry. Rutgers line. New Bruns-wick, N.J.; 9/12/70

PRODUCT ASSURANCE ACTIVITY --AProgram Office Viewpoint. Lite Cycle of

V ri klonsnaw (AED I -T Mh Cord onNew Horizons in Reliability and Ouality:Harpur College. Binghamton, N Y ;10 ,24 ,70

SOLID-STATE DEVICES

ADAPTIVE FERROELECTRIC TRANS-FORMER -A Solid -State Analog MemoryDeirice--J H PvIcCusker. S S Perlman(Labs. Pr( IEEE Trans on Electron De-VICeS, Vol. ED -17, No 7, 7'73

EPITAX1AL SILICON on Law Aluminum -Rich Spinel. MOS and Voris.' JunctionDevice Characteristics -K H. Zaininger,C C Wang (Labs, Pr) Solid -State Eleafrom.. Vol. 13. 1970

GUNN DEVICES -F. Sterzer (Labs, Pr)Cool on New Microwave Components;Stockholm Sweden. 9/14-14/70

MICROWAVE Power Tran..istors -H CLee ISSN ' Ian Short

MOS TRANSISTORS on Insuiating Sub-strates. The Effective Mobility of- E JBoteky (Labs. Pr) IEEE Int" Electron De-vices Mtg_ Washington, D C , 10/28-30/70

POWER SWITCHING. Solid -State -G. DHanchett (SSD. Som) Hudson DivisionConvention of American Radio RelayLeague. Tarrytown, N.Y.; 1007-18/70

SILICON DEVICES. Refroclan Men" BO-lems for-J.A Arnich (Lai, Pr) Mate-rials Engineering Congress Ind Expos,ton, American Soc of Metals, Cleveland,Ohio, 10,12/70

THYRISTORS for Power Switching Appli-callons-J Yellin (SSD, Scm) RCA Dis-tributor Seminars: 9/15-17/7ES

SPACE COMMUNICATION

SIGNAL PROCESSING TECANIOUE toReduce Transmission Bandwidth Re-quirement I Blacewice (AED. Pr)First Western Space Congress. Prot:Santa Maria. Calif ; 10,27-24,70

TRIANGULATION THEORY, A Colligationof -C C. Johnson (RCA SvCo, CherryHill) Institute of Navigation

SPACE NAVIGATION

CELESTIAL NAVIGATION- MexpensivePosition Fixes by Satellite. The New- -J E Board (AED, Pr) 25th AnniversaryMtg of the Ins of Navigation, U.S AirForce Academy. Colorado Siengs

SPACECRAFT

EARTH RESOURCES SATELLITE Pro-gram B P Miller (AED. Pr) N. J. UrbanSchools Development Councs AerospaceCool . New Brunswick. N.J.; 111/28/70

ITOS-1, Earth Oriented Salollile-W J.Haneman IAED. Pr) First Western SpaceCongress: Proc: Santa Maria. Calif.;10:27.29'70

ITOS-f (TIROS MI Design and OrbitMPerformance A Schnapl (AED, Pr) 21s1Congress of the Int'l Astronautical Fed -oration, Constance (German Federal Re-public) 10'4-10/70

TIROS/ESSA/ITOB SPilcomell to LaunchVOW* Compatibility -H. Van Elkan(AED. Pr) First Western Space Congress,Santa Maria. Cali, , 10:27-29'70

WEATHER SATELLITE tor the RadiationEnvironment -A Case History. The Di -sign of A G Holmes-Siedle. W J PochIAED. Prr British Interplanetary MainConf 1; London. England

TELEVISION BROADCASTING

TELEVISION Today and Yesterday -V.K Zworykin (Labs. Pr) Institute of Televi-sion Engineers of Japan, Tokyo. Japan.10,9/70

TV TRANSMITTER RF DEMODULATORSand the Home Receiver. PerformanceComparison o1-W.L Behrend (CSD.Camden) IEEE. Fall Symp.. Washington,D C 9 '25 '70

TELEVISION EQUIPMENT

LOW LIGHT LEVEL TELEVISION Tech-niques - R J Burl: AppliedOphes. Vol 9. No 10: 10/70

TV IMAGE STABILIZATION. Owl Loop-J. Dubbury (ASD. Burl) IEEE Reflector,10/70

TRANSMISSION LINES

FIELD DISTRIBUTION in WavoguldeLoaded with Than Slab of Intlb-K.Suzuki, R. Hirola (Labs. Pr) Proc of theIEEE: Vol. 58, No. 6: 6/70

TUBES. ELECTRON

IMAGE ISOCON, The New -E. M. Mumsetman (EC. Land) Limy of Rhode IslandSummer Program, 8'12'70

RCA IMAGE INTENSIFIERS. Recent Ad-vancements i R G Stoudenheimer(SSD, Song Laser Industry ASSOC. AnnualConf. New York City, 9'22.24170

SILICON INTENSIFIER TARGET (SIT)Camera Tubes. Low Light Level Perform-ance of- R L Rodgers IEC Lane(FOSD Cord

STORAGEDISPLAY TUBES. Recent De-velopments in Cathodochromic-P. Hey -

I 00,09 R Faughnan (Labs, Pr)IEEE Intl Electron Devices Mtg, Wash.Irnton, D C . 10'28-30'70

THERMAL CURRENT FILAMENT FormedIron. Uniformly Avalanching Junction,The Time Development of a -R. A. Sun-shine (Labs. Pr) IEEE International Elec-tron Devices Mtg . Washington, D.C.:10/28-30/70

TUBE COMPONENTS

AD -CONDUCTOR CATHODE -K. G Horn-qvist (Labs, Pr) IEEE Conf. on ElectronDevices, New York; 9/23-24/70

CERAMIC -METAL SEALS for Troweling -Way" Tubes, Ruggedised-T. F. Berry, F B Skrobinski (EC.Harsn) IEEE Conf. on Electron -DeviceTechniques: New York City: 9/23-24/70

HELICES FOR TRAVELING -WAVETUBES, Improved Methods for Winding

R K Pearce. R Sikora (EC, Harsh)IEEE Conf. on Electron -Device Tech-niques. New York City; 9/23-24/70

NEGATIVE -ELECTRON -AFFINITY PHO-TOCATHODES in Pholoroultiplier Tubes

- T. T Lewis, F A Helvy (EC. LandLaser Industry Assoc. Annual Conf.: NewYork City; 9/22-24/70

OPTOELECTRIC COLD CATHODE UsingAl, Go, , As -GaAs InsteroluncUons, AnEfficient -H !Crease!. E. S. Kohn, HNelson. J. J Tietien, L R. Weisberg(Labs. Pr) 1970 IEEE Conf on ElectronDevice Techniques. New York, 9,23-24 70

GENERAL TECHNOLOGY

INVENTION and Innovation -J. A Ralph -man (Labs. Pr: Managements Dinner MfgComputer Test Corp.: Cherry Hill. NJ

89

Author IndexSubject listed opposite each author'sname indicates where complete citationto his paper may be found in the subjectindex. An author may have more thanone paper for each subject category.

ASTRO-ELECTRONICS DIVISIONBalcewicz, J. F. spate communic,thunBoard, J. E. space navigationBrown, I. managementBrucker. G J. radiation effectsBrucker. G. J. radiation effectsCorns J. energy conversionFaith, T. J. energy conversionHecht. M. communication. digitalHolmes-Siedle, A. G., spacecraftHolmes-Siedle. A. G. radiation effectsHothaesSiedie. A. G. energy conversionMiller. B. P. spacecraftMiller. R. recordingMonshaw, V. R. reliabilityPhillips. K. T. control systemsPoch. W. J. spacecraftPoch. W. J. radiation effectsSchnapf. A. spacecraftSetirscak. E. J. environmental

engineeringShipley. D. G. geophysicsTorok. K. J. geophysicsTreads. R. J. recordingVan Elkan. spacecraft

AEROSPACE SYSTEMS DIVISIONAlaspa. A. computer storageBerens. A. electro-opticsDingwall. E. computer storageDobson. D. B. documentationDubbury, J. television equipmentDeftest, R. J. television equipmentMark, R. opticsMorand, D. opticsSpear. A. C. reliabilityWeinstein. S. opticsWeller. R. electro-optics

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMSDIVISION

Behrend, W. L. television broadcastingGerber. N. M. communications

componentsHanaway, W. F. recording audioHurst, R. N. recordingSauer, D. A. communications

componentsWiesner. J. A. circuits integrated

ELECTROMAGNETIC AVIATIONSYSTEMS DIVISIONAdam. K. C. displays

PatentsGrantedto RCA Engineers

As reported by RCA Domestic Patents.Princeton

AEROSPACE SYSTEMS DIVISIONUse in an Automatic Testing System 01 aSimulator of an Article Being Tested forTesting the Testing System II W Sil-verman (ASD, Burl) U S Pal 3,541,440November 17 1970

Apparatus for Measuring Low Voltagesand Currents with Amplifier Protect'.Means E Sarkisian, N J Amdur (ASD.Burl) U S Pat 3.541,462, November 17.1970

ASTRO.ELECTRONICS DIVISIONSatellite Communications Systems SCubic (AED. Htstn) U S. Pal 3,541.553,November 17. 1970

Digital Spectral Line WLee (AED. Htstn) U 5 Pat 3.531,207;September 29. 1970

Electronic Shutter -A 0 Cope IAED,Htstnl U S Pat 3.525 806 August 251970

ELECTROMAGNETIC AND AVIATIONSYSTEMS DIVISIONIntegrated Power Output Circuit -ALichowskv IEASD. Van Nuysl U S Pat3 544 860. December 1 1970

Momentary Retaining Trenslation Meansfor Multiple Switches -K C. GasparIEASD Van Nuysl U S Pat. 3.544,738.December 1. 1970

Magnetic "Pen" for a Graphic Tablet --L A Jones. R B Goyer IEASD, VanNuys) U S Pat 3.532.817, October 6,1970

ElectromchnlcI Coupling-J.CMeagher IEASD. Van Nuys) U S. Pat3.542,284, November 24, 1970

CONSUMER ELECTRONICSKeying Circuit -J M Kresock, T WBurros ICE, Indp1s) U.S.Pat. 3,541235.November 17, 1970

90

Burnett, J. zurcraft instrumentsLichowsky. A. amplificationOrganic V. amplificationWayne, R amplification

ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS

Berlin. R. E. energy conversionBerry. 7 F. laboratory techniquesBerry 7 F. tube componentsEastman. G. Y. energy conversionFreeling. M. amplificationFreggens, R. A. energy conversionGarvey, L. P. energy conversionHarbaugh. W. E. energy conversionHelvy. F. A. tube componentsKrell. H. R. lasersLewis, T. T. tube componentsLongsderft, R. W. energy conversionMusselman, E. M. tubes, electronPearce, R. K. tube componentsPearce. R. K. amplificationPersyk. D. E. lasersPersyk. D. E. lasersPonczak. S. amplificationRodgers, R. L. tubes. electronSikora. R. tube componentsSkrobinski. F. B. tube componentsStraight, R. energy conversionWolkstoin, H. J. amplification

GRAPHIC SYSTEMS DIVISION

Finn. 1. graphic artsReciti. S. computer applicationsVragel. J. graphic arts

LABORATORIES

Abrahams. M. S. lasersAbrahams. M. S. properties. molecularAmick. J. A. v ,rcuits integratedAmick. J. A. properties. chemicalAmick. J. A. solid-state devicesAmity, A. properties. opticalAmity. A. properties, electricalAmodio. P. R. properties. chemicalAnderson, C. H. laboratory techniquesAnderson, C. H. properties, surfaceAPPer. J. lasersBailor, P. K. properties, magneticBenyon, C. W. circuits integratedBerger, S. B. properties, opticalBergstein. L. properties. surfaceBerkeyheieer. J. E. lasersBerkeyheiser, J. E. properties, opticalBoleky. E. J. solid-state devicesBoleky. E. J. computer storageB olocchr. C. J. properties, molecularBurns. J R. computer storageCastellano. J. A. properties, molecular

Automatic Beam Current Limiting UsingReference Current Sources -E W CurtisICE. Indplsl U S Pat 3,541.240, Novem-ber 17. 1970

Circuit for Eliminating Spurious Modula-tion of the Subcarrier Frequency Oscil.later in a Color Television Receiver I.

A Cochran (CE. Indpls) U S Pat 3,541,-241, November 17, 1970

Lock -On Prevention in Transistor Deflec-tion Circuits- J A McDonald T J Chris-topher ICE, Indp1s) U S Pat 3,544,811,December 1. t970

Spurious Oscillation Suppression inTransistor Deflection Circuits -J. A Mc-Donald. T J Christopher ICE, Indp1s) U S.Pat 3,544810. December 1, 1970

Color Television Receiver -0 H WillisICE Indp1s1 U S Pat 3.535437. October20. 1970

Noise Immune Video Circuits -J N.Pratt. G. E Anderson (CE. Indp1s) U.SPal 3,535,444; October 20. 1970

Capstan and Flywheel Arrangement forMagnetic Tape Transport -0 R AndrewsICE. Indpls) U S P.I. 3 537.332.Novem-ber 3 1970

Television Tuner Cast Housing with In-tegrally Cast Transmission Lines DBrand (CE, Indp1s) U S Pa' 3.538466,November 3, 1970

Magnetic Tape Cassette Player Appara-tue-C. E Rose (CE. Indp1s) U S Pat3 532 293. October 8 1970

Video Recording and Reproducing Ap-paratus Utilizing a Single Track on aMagnetic Tape for the Luminance andColor Information Components of a ColorTelevision Signal II R Warren ICE.Indp1s1 U S Pat 3.542.946; November74. 1970

ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS

Ion Bombardment of Insulated GateSemiconductor Devices- T G Alhanas.D M Griswold (EC. Som) U S Pat3.540 925 November 17. 1970

Video Circuits Employing CascodedCombinations of Field Effect Transistorswith High Voltage, Low Bandwidth Bi-polar Transistors -W. Austin IEC.Somi U S Pal 3.541,234; November 17.1970

Sputter Ion Pump -W G. Henderson, JT Mark (EC, Land) U.S. Pal 3.540.812;November 17, 1970

H eal Exchanger for High Voltage Elec-tronic Devices -G. V Eastman (EC, Land)U S Pat 3.543841; December 1, 1970

Chang, K. K. N. communicationscomponents

Coutts, M. D. laboratory techniquesCoons, M. D. properties, molecularCullen, G. W. properties, molecularCurtis. B. J. properties, molecularCrag*. W. properties, atomicDean, R. H. amplificationDisrnukes. J. P. laboratory techniquesDisrnukes. J. P. properties, molecularDismukee J. P. properties, molecularDreeben. A. B. amplificationD umin, D. J. properties, electricalDumin, D. J. properties, molecularDumin. D. J. properties, molecularEnstrom. R. E. lasersEllenberg, M. lasersFau9hnan, B. displaysFau9hnan. B. tubes. electronFeldstein, N. properties. chemicalFirester. A. H. holographyFischer. A. G. lasersFisher. D. G. lasersFonger. W. H. holographyFonger. W. H. properties. molecularFriedman. L. R. properties. electricalGannon. J. J. properties. chemicalGannon. J. J. lasersGilbert. S. L. lasersGerber. J. environmental engineeringGorog. I. displaysGores, I. tubes. electronGorog. I. lasersNevada. T. properties. magneticHai.. G. properties opticalHarbeke. G. Properties. atomicHari... G. lasersHawrylo, F. Z. lasersHeller. M. E. holographyHernqvist, K. G. tube componentsHrnovIst. K. G. lasersHeyman. P. displaysHeyman. P. tubes. electronHirola. R. transmission linesHirota, R. mathematicsHoffman. D. properties, surfaceHonickman, S. radarHonig. R. E. laboratory techniquesHoughton, W. D. displaysHoughton. W. D. recording, imageInoue. M. properties, electricalKaminski. J. F. amplificationKlein. R. properties. atomicKlein R. properties, chemicalKohn. E. S. tube componentsKojima, M. properties, magneticKolondra. F. radiation effectsK ovac. M. G. recording, imageKressel, H. tube componentsKressel, H. lasersK urlansik. H, properties surfaceLadany. I. lasersLancsek. T. S. properties. chemical

Grid Support for Electron Tubes --F. GHammersand. W A Novaio,isky IEC.Land) U S Pat 3.544.831, December 1.1970

Traveling Wave Tube with EvaporatedNickel Altenuator Coating and Methodof Manufacture Thereof J Brous (ECSam) U S Pat 3.544.832, December 1,

1970

Logic Circuit --B Zuk (EC. Som) U SPat 3.539.873. November 10. 1970

Conductive Coatings of Tin Oxides -0W Roe IEC. Land U S Pat 3,537.890.November 3. 1970

Apparatus for Electroplating a Ribbon -J Green (EC, Som) U S Pat 3.537.-

971. November 3. 1970

D.C. Restoration Circuit with Arc -OverProtection -A L Lrmberg (EC. SomiU S Pat 3,535.436, October 20. 1970

Method of Making Photoemissive Elec-tron Tubes -R. IA Matheson, F A Helvy(EC. Land) U.S Pat 3,535011, October20. 1970

Semiconductor Wafer Transporting Jig --C Shambelan (EC. Semi U S Pat

3.534.862. October 20. 1970

Centrifugal Testing Apparatus -J PaullIEC, Som) U S Pat 3.534.595. October20, 1970

Gain Controlled AmpliBar-J R Harford(EC. Soot) U S Pat 3.538.448, November3, 1970

Integrated Circuit Amplifier Biasing Ar-rangement J Awns (EC. Somi U S Pal3 531.657. September 29, 1970

Signal Translating Stale -S A Steckler(EC, Som) U S Pat 3 531 730, September29. 1970

Superconductive Magnet Construction -J J Drautman. Jr (EC, Somi U S Pat3.534 308, October 13. 1970

Electrical Circuit for Providing Substan-tially Constant Current -A. L. LirnbergIEC. Sem) U S Pat 3.534,245; October13. 1970

H igh Current Transistor Amplifier StageOperable with Low Current Biasing-- AL Lemberg (EC. Som) U S Pat 3.534.279.October 13, 1970

Semiconductor Devices Hiving SolderedJoints J 011endorf, F. P Jones (EC.Sore) S Pat Pat. 3,532,044, October6 1970

High Input Impedance Solid State D.C.Amplifier Suitable for Use in ElectricalMeasurement-- S Knanishu IEC. Som)U S Pat 3.532983; October 6. t970

Lochner, B. J. displaysLehmann, H. W. properties. opticalLehman. H. W. lasersLeibowitz, D. properties, surfaceLevin, E. R. laboratory techniquesLenin. E. R. laboratory techniquesLevin. E. R. properties, molecularLewis, F. A. properties, molecularLiu, S. G. communications componentsLiu, S. G. communications componentsLockwood. H. F. lasersNal uska, H P. properties, opticalMaruska. L. P. lasersMcCusker, J. H. solid -stale devicesMeyer. J. E. computer storageMicheletti, F. radiation effectsMiller. A. holographyMiller. A. properties, molecularMoyalani, K. properties, magneticMiyatani. K. properties. electricalMiyatani, K. properties. magneticMyrtle,* K. properties. opticalMiyatani. K. properties, opticalMiyatani. K. lasersklinemalsu. K. properties. electricalMinernalsu. K. properties, magneticMinematsu, K. properties, opticalMorrison. A. D. properties, molecularNelson, H. tube componentsNicoll. F. H. laboratory techniquesNorris, P. E. circuits integratedMorals, R. E. properties, molecularNuese. C. J. lasersNuese. C. J. properties. chemicalOka. T. properties. molecularOkamoto, F. properties. molecularOkamoto, F. properties. magneticOsaka. S. properties. OpticalPenkove, J. I. properties, opticalPankove, J. I. lasersPerlman, S. S. solid-state devicesPike, W. S. recording. imagePinch. H. properties, opticalRalchmen, J. A. general technologyRichman, D. lasersRisko. J. J. communications componentsRisko. J. J. communications componentsRose. A. opticsRose. A. opticsRose. A. opticsRoss. D. A. graphic artsRoss, E. C. properties, electricalSebisky. E. S. properties. surfaceSabisky. E. S. laboratory techniquesSchieber, M. properties, molecularSchiff. L. communications systemsSchnitxler, P. properties, surfaceScott. J. H. computer storageShahbender, R. properties. surfaceShaw. J. circuits integratedShallcross. F. V. recording. imageSigai. A. G. lasersSommer. A. M. lasers

Memory Employing Transistor StorageCells B Zuk (EC. Somi U S Pat 3.533.-087, October 6, 1970

Control Circuit for Memory -A. K RappIEC, Somi U S Pat 3,533D88 October8. 1970

GRAPHIC SYSTEMS DIVISION

Optical Field Correction Devices for anElectronic Photocomposition System- JC Schira IGSO Dayton) U S Pal 3 540361, November 17, 197()

Photocomposing Apparatus -H. E Hey -nor (GSD, Dayton) U S Pal 3.530 780,September 29 1970

GOVERNMENT COMMUNICATIONSSYSTEMS DIVISION

Single Wire Crosspoint Switching Circuitwith External Signaling J M Walter, FD Rando (GCS. Camden) U.S.Pat3.541,515, November 17, 1970

Receiver Gain Control System ProvidingNegative Resistance Stabilization J WDan el Jr iGCS Camden, U 5 Oat3 544.902 December t 1970

Device for Generation of a Sell -ActingFluid Bearing -0 D Maxson (GCS.Camden) U S Pal 3,534.893, October 20.1970

High Efficiency Single Turn MagneticHead -A J Foster (GCS, Camden) U SPat 3 535 466, October 20, 1970

Servo System -A. C Luther, R G BreedIGCS. Camden) U S Pat 3,543950, No-vember 24, 1970

LABORATORIES

E lectra -Optical S r E Moi(Labs. Pr) U S Pat 3,541,247, November17 1970

Electro-Optical Compositions and De-vices E Goldmacher, J A Castellano(labs. Pr) U S Pat 3,540.796, November17. 1970

Line Terminating Circuits ---R A Canoe.P Hsieh (Labs. Pr) U S Pat 3 54t475November 17, 1970

Memory System with Defective StorageLocations- R A Cringe (Labs, Pr) USPal 3,541,525. November 17. 1970

Color Temperature Correction Controlledby the Color Killer and Color Oscillator-C J Hall, R Peter (Labs. Switz) U SPat. 3.541,243 November 17, 1970

Stares. H. communications systemsSleigrneier, E. F. properties. atomicSteno% F. solid-state devicesStrauss, L. properties, surfaceStruck, C. W. properties, molecularSunshine, R. A. tubes, electronSuzuki. K. Transmission linesTakahashi. T. properties. opticalTakahashi. T. properties. magneticTakahashi. T. properties, electricalTaylor. G. W. holographyTaylor. G. W. properties. electricalTaylor. G. W. properties, opticalTietten. J. J. properties, molecularTietjen. J. J. tube componentsTietien, J. J. properties, molecularTietjen, J. J. properties. molecularToda. M. lasersToda. M. prOPerties. magneticTosima, S. properties. magneticThong A. amplificationVieland. L. J. properties. molecularVolkmann. J. E. acousticson Philipsborn H. properties. molecular

Vossen. J. L. properties. molecularWade. Y. properties, magneticWang. C. C. solid-state devicesWarfield. G. properties, electricalWehner. R. K. properties, chemicalWehner, R. K. properties, atomicWilliams, B. F. lasersWink.. J. P. lasersVim. W. M. properties. molecularYocom. P. N. lasersZaininger. K. H. radiation effectsZaininger. K. H. solid -slate devicesZworvkin. V. K. television broadcasting

LIMITED, MONTREAL

Feher, K. communications systemsJohnston. T. W. plasma physicsShkarofsky. I. P. plasma physics

SERVICE COMPANY

Hill geophysicsJohnson. C. C. space communicationSpec geophysthe

SOLID STATE DIVISION

DeVilbiss, W. F. lasersGlocksman. R. lasersHanchett. G. D. solid-state devicesLee, H. C. solid -stale devicesLonm, A. lasersNyul. P. lasersSchilling. R. B. circuits integratedStoudenheimer, R. G. tubes. electronYellin, J. solid-state devices

Superconductors -P. R Seism. F D Rosi(Labs. Pr) U S Pat 3.544.316, December1,1970

Multi -Head Magnetic Transducer -J J

Hanak (Labs. Pr) U.S. Pat 3.544.983 De-cember 1, 1970

Polarization Controlled Photochromic"Write -In" System -J. J Amodei (Labs.

S Pat 3 535.021 October 20 1970

Identification Circuit for Phase Alternat-ing Line System Operation of ColorVideo Tape Recordings P S Carnt. TE Bart (Labs. Swazi U.S Pat 3.538.244:November 3, 1970

Method for Poling Bismuth Titanate-M.M Hopkins. A Miller (Labs. Pr) U S Pat3,531.779, September 29. 1970

Threshold Gale Circuits -I( R Kaplan(Labs. Pr) U S Pat 3 532.89' October6, 1970

Display Circuit Including Charging Cir-cuit and Fast Reset Circuit --B J

Lechner (Labs, Pr) U S Pat 3.532.813October 6. 1970

Shift Circuits Including Threshold orOther Logic Gates and Having Multiple -Phase Shift Pulses Applied to EachSlags -R 0 Winder (Labs. Pr) U S Pat3 552 991, October 6. 1970

Microminiature Electrical ComponentHaving Inde.ble Relief Pattern- WKern (Labs. Prl U S Pal 3.543.106. No-vember 24. 1970

Transitory Hologram Apparstue-H J.Gerritsen, H S Sommers, Jr (Labs, Pr)U.S.Pat 3.542.452; November 24, 1970

Light Pen Operating with RemoteGraphic Display -J. C. Miller, C M. Wine(Labs. Pr) U.S Pat. 3.543.240. November24. 1970

RCA RECORDS

Cartridge Debris Trap -W. R Isom (Rec.Indp1s) U S Pat 3.537 710, November 3.1970

P Roller Construction -W. RIsom (Rec Indpis) U S Pat 3.537,1381.November 3, 1970

RCA LTDDigital Logic Circuit for [Wiring Syn-chronising Signals from a CompositeSignal- W Steinberg (Ltd. Canada) U SPat 3.532,810; October 6, 1970

RCA SERVICE COMPANYTiming System for Readout of StoredDale- C C Spagnoh B W Binkley, DC Lavallee (ServCo. Cherry Hill) U.S.Pat 3,542.286, November 24, 1970

ProfessionalMeetings

-::- Dates andDeadlines

Be sure deadlines are met -consultyour Technical Publications Adminis-trator or your Editorial Representativefor the lead time necessary to obtainRCA approvals (and government ap-provals. if applicable) Remember, ab-stracts and manuscripts must be soapproved BEFORE sending them tothe meeting committee

Calls For Papers

APRIL 5-6 1971 USNC/URSI-IEEESpring Meeting. Stotler Hilton Hotel.Washington. DC.USNC URSI 6 IEEEGroups cooperating Deadline info: (abut(1/25/71 to: IEEE. 345 East 47th Street,New York, N.Y. 10017

APRIL 26-28 1971 25111 A I Frequency Control Symposium, ShelburneHotel, Atlantic City, NJ . Solid Stale andFrequency Control Division, ElectronicComponents Laboratory. U S Army Elec-tronics Command. F1 Monmouth. N JDeadline info: (sum) 15 copies (at least500 words) 12115'70 to: Director. Elec-tronic Components Laboratory, U.S.ArmyElectronics Command, Attention' AMSELKL-SP (Mr. J M Stanley). Ft. Monmouth.NJ 07703

MAY 11-13. 1971 Siath Region TechnicalConlerenee, Woodlake Hotel. Sacra-mento. Cal_ Region 6. Sacramento SectDeadline info: (abut) 12/1/70 (mu)3/1/70 10: Ronald Soohoo. Univ ofCalif Dept of EE. Davis. Calif 95616

MAY 16.20, 1971' International Micro-wave Symposium, Marriott Twin BridgesMotor Hotel. Washington, D C , G-MTT.Deadline info: (papers) 2/4/71 lo: R VGarver. Harry Diamond Labs . Conn 8Van Ness St. Washington. D C 20438

MAY 17-20. 1971 Spring Joint ComputerConference, Convention Ctr AtlanticCity, New Jersey. IEEE Computer Soci-ety. AFIPS Deadline info: (papers)1/4/71 lo: AFIPS Wigs . 210 SummitAve Montvale. New Jersey 07645

MAY 24.26 1971 IEEE Power Engineer-ing Society Power Industry ComputerApplications Conference. Steller HiltonHotel. Boston. Mass, IEEE Power EngrgSociety Deadline info: (abet) 10/15/70(papery) 1/0/71 lo: P L Dandeno. HydroElec Pwr Comm of Ontario. 620 Uni-versity Ave Toronto, Ont Canada

JUNE 1-3. 1971 Electrical 0 ElectronicM eeeee lament & Test Instrument Confer-enc., Skyline Hotel. Ottawa Ontario.Canada. G -IM, Ottawa Section DeadlineInfo: (abet) 1/15/71 to: F L Herrnach.8.162 Metrology Bldg. NBS. Washing.ton, D.C. 20234.

JUNE 14-16. 1971 International Confer-ence on Communications. Queen Eliza-beth Hotel, Montreal. Quebec. Canada.G -Corn Tech. Montreal Section Deadlineinfo: (mu) 1/1/71 to: W C Benger.Northern Elec Co Ltd, P05 3511, Sta-tion C Ottawa 3. Ontario, Canada

JUNE 27 -JULY 1, 1971 Design Autome-lion Workshop, Shelburne Hotel. AtlanticCity. New Jersey, IEEE Computer Society.ACM. SHARE Deadline Info: last) 1/4/71to: R B Hitchcock. Jr IBM. Box 218,Yorktown Hots N Y t0598

JULY 18-23 1971 IEEE Power Engrg.Soc., Summer Meeting & Inn Symp. onHigh Pwr. Teeing, Portland Hilton Hotel.Portland. Oregon. IEEE Power Engrg. So-ciety Deadline info: (papers) 2/15/71 to:International Symposium on High PowerTesting. IEEE. Miss Dianne Goldfinger,345 East 47th Street, New York, N Y10017, for additional information pleasecontact Dr E W Greenfield. College ofEngineering Research Division. Washing.ton State University. Pullman. Washing.ton 99163

JULY 20-23, 1971 Conference on Nu-clear 0 Space Radiation Effects. NewEngland Ctr for Continuing Ed . Durham.I17w Hampshire. G -NS. Univ of NewHampshire Deadline info: (papers)2/15/71 to: T M Flanagan. Gull Radia-tion Tech, POB 508, San Diego. Calif92112

AUG 11.13 1971 Joint Automatic Con-trol Conference, Washington Univ StLouis. Mo., G -AC, AACC Deadline info:

1/111/71 to: Dr John Lewis. De-partment of Electical Engineering. ThePennsytvania Slate University, UniversityPark, Pennsylvania 16802

AUG 17 la amt le 1971 High Fre-quency Generation and Amplification -Devices and Applications. Cornell Uni-versity. Ithaca New York, School of Elec-trical Engineering, Cornell University.Tae office of Naval Research In coopera-tion with IEEE. Circuit Theory Group.Electron Devices Group. Microwave The.ory and Techniques Group Deadline In -10: (abet) 5/1/71 three copies single*Wed to: Professor Lester F EastmanProgram Chairman. School of ElectricalEngineering, Cornell University, PhillipsHell. Ithaca, New York 14850

AUG 23.28. 1971- European MicrowaveCon( e, Royal Inst of Tech Stock-holm. Sweden, G-AATT, Region 8. SwedishAced of Engrg So. IEE. et al Deadlineinto: (syn) 3/1/71 abet) 7/15/71 to: HStoyskal. European Microwave Conf. Fac23. 104 50 Slockho-m 80 Sweden

AUG 2427. 1971 Western ElectronicShow 8. Convention. San Francisco Hil-ton 8 Cow Palace, San Francisco. CalifRegion 6, WEMA, Deadline info: (sessionproposals) 3/1/71 to: WESCON Office.3600 Wilshire Blvd. Los Angeles, Calif90005

SEPT 6-10 1971 London Int/mm.11one!Symp. on Network Theory. City UnivLondon. England OCT-. IEEE UKRI Sec-tion. IEE. IERE, City Univ coop Deadlineinfo: (PaPeni) 3/10/71 to: G S Bray-shaw. City Univ St John St LondonE C 1 England

SEPT 7.10, 1971 Conference on "Di.-Univ of Loughborough. Lough-

borough. England. IEE. IEEE UKRI Sec.bon IERE et al Deadline Info: (syn)14/14/70 (paw.) 4/1/71 to: IEE. SavoyPlace, London W C 2 England

SEPT 14-16, 1971: Intl Conf. on Engi-neering in the Ocean Environment, Town8 Country Hotel. San Diego. Calif,Oceanography Coordinating Comm 8San Diego Section Doedlin Info: (abet)3/30/71 10: Maurice Nelles. Bisset*.Berman Corp 3939 Ruffin Rd SanDiego. Calif 92123

SEPT 19.23. 1971 Joint Power Genera-tion Technical Conference. Chase ParkPlaza Hotel. St Louis. Missouri. IEEEPower Engrg Society, ASME. ASCE Par-ticipating Deadline info: (me) 5/7/71 to:B L Cot Westinghouse Elec Corp,Lester P 0 Philadelphia. Penna 11913.

SEPT 21-23. 1971 Conference on Infra -Red Techniques, Linty 01 Reading. Read-ing England. IERE IEEE UKRI Section.ICE Inst of Phys 8 Phys Society Dead-line Info: (syn) 1/31171 (ampers) 4/30/71to: IERE. 8.9 Bedford Square. LondonW C 1 England

SEPT 27-30. 1971 IEEE Power Engimerinos Society Tech. Cont. on Under-ground Distribution. Cobo Hall 8 HotelPontchartrain, Detroit, Michigan, IEEEPower Engrg Society Deadline info:(Wens) 3/1/71 (abet) 9/30/70 to: B ESmith. Virginia Elec & Power Co P091194, Richmond, Va 23209

OCT 18-22. 1971- Region 0 Convention(EUROCON), Palm! de Beaulieu, Laos -acme. Switzerland Deadline info: labs'sum) 4171 to: Andieas Rannestad. Nor-wegian Del Res Est . FOB 25 N 2007Kieller, Norway.

OCT 25-29, 1971 Jt, National Confer-ence on Mater Systems, DisneylandHotel Anaheim, Calif G-SMC ORSADeadline info: (abet) 1/1/71 (papers)6/15/71 fo: F J Mullin. MS R3 2054TRW I Space Park. Redondo Beach.Calif 90278

NOV 3.5, 1971' Northeast ElectronicsResearch & Engineering Meeting, Shera-ton Boston Hotel, War Mem Aud .Boston. Mass New England SectionsDeadline info: 7/2/71 lo: IEEE BostonOffice. 31 Charming St Newton, Mass02158

JUNE 12.17. 1972 1972 (5th) Congressof the International Federation of Aulomatic Control. Paris. France DeadlineInfo: (abet) 3/1/71 (ms) 7/15/71 to: sub-mit abstracts and papers through AACCby sending them to one of the followingindividuals. any of whom can providerfurther information Applications: Dr.Winston L Nelson, Bell Telephone LabsInc. Whippany, New Jersey 07981; OleSystems: Dr Ken Bischoff. School ofChemical Engineering, Cornell Univ.,Ithaca. New York 14850: Components:Prof George A Etzweiler, Electrical En-gineering Dept. Pennsylvania Stale University. University Park. Penns 16802.Education: Prof Stephen J Kahne. Elec-trical Engineering Dept. University ofMinnesota. Minneapolis, Minnesota55455; Space: Dr John A Aseltine. 1617Via Zurita. Palos Verdes Estates. Califords 90274: Systems: Prof Herman RWeed, Electrical Engineering Dept OhioSlate University. Columbus. Ohio 43210Theory: Dr Bernard Friedland. SingerGeneral Precision, Inc, 1150 McBridgeAvenue. Little Falls. New Jersey 07424

AUG 21-26. 1972 13th International Con.gress of Theoretical and Applied Me-chanics, Moscow State University. Mosrow USSR Deadline info: (sum) 3/15/72to: Prof G K Mikhanov. LeningradskeProspekt 7. Moscow A-40

Meetings

JAN 25-27. 1971 AIAA 9th AerospaceSciences Meeting, New York, N Y Proginfo: AIAA 1290 Ave of the America's.New York. N Y 10019

FEB 15-10 197t AIAA Tactical Missilesin Transition Meeting, Hoiloman AirForce Base. N Mes Prog info: AIAA1290 Ave of the Americas. New York,N Y 10019

FEB 9.11, 1971 Aerospace A ElectronicSystems Winter Cony., Biltrnore Hotel.Los Angeles. Cali, G-AES, L A CouncilProp Info: R J Parks, Jet PropulsionLab, 4800 Oak Grove Dr . Pasadena,Calif 91103

FEB 17-19 1971 AIM Integrated Infor-mation Systems Conference. Palo Allo,Calif Prop info: AIAA. 1290 Ave of theAmericas. New York. N Y 10019

FEB 17-19 1971 Intl Solid State Cir-cuits Conference. Sheraton Hotel. Univof Penna Phila Penna SSC Council.Phila Section Univ 01 Penna Prop info:R W Webster. Texas Instruments. POB5012. Dallas. Texas 75222

MARCH 1-3 1971 Intl Symposium onPaull Tolerant Computing. HuntingtonSheraton Hotel. Pasadena. Calif, IEEEComputer Society. Jet Prop. Labs of CalTech Pros info: W C Carter, IBM Re-search Ctr , Yorktown Heights, N.Y10598

MARCH I-3, 1971 Particle AcceleratorConference. Pick Congress Hotel, Chi.cago. Illinois. GNS. NBS et al Prog info:L C Teng, National Accelerator Lab.Box 500 Batavia. Illinois 60510

MARCH 10.12 1971 AIM 6m Aerody-namic Testing Conference, Albuquerque,N Men Prop info: AIAA. 1290 Ave of theAmericas. New York, N.Y.10019

MARCH 15-17, 1971 AIM Specs ShuttleDevelopment Testing and OperationsConference, Phoenix Aria Pros info:AIAA. 1293 Ave of the Americas NewYork. N Y 10019

MARCH 22-25, 1971 IEEE InternationalConvention & Exhibition, CoiliseumN Y Hilton Hotel. New York. N Y ProgInfo: J H Schumacher. IEEE, 345 E 47thSt . New York. N Y 10017

MARCH 31 -APRIL 2 1971 ReliabilityPhysics Symposium, Stardust Hotel. LasVegas Nev G -R Prop Into: 0 D Trapp.Fairchild Semiconductor. 464 Ellis StMountain View. Calif 94040

APRIL 5-0 1971 Souibeastern Sympo-slum on System Theory. Georgia Inst ofTech. Atlanta. Georgia. IEEE ComputerSociety. G -AC, Georgia Tech Prog info:C 0 Alford. School of EE. Georgia Insti-tute of Tech . Atlanta. Ga. 30332.

APRIL 5-6. 1971 Rubber & Plastics Ind.Technical Conference, Holiday Inn. Ak.ion. Ohio. G-IGA. Akri. Section Propinfo: Chet Blumenauer. Jriroyal Inc.. 154Grove St . Chicopee Fats. Mass 01021

APRIL 12.15 1971 National Telemeter-ing Conference. Washington Hilton Hotel.Washington. DC. GAES. G- Com-TechProg info: H B Riblet Johns HopkinsUniv 8621 Georgia Ave , Silver Spring,Md 20910

APRIL 13-15 1971 Conference on Fron-tiers in Education. Dually Hotel Central,Atlanta, Georgia, GEdu:ation, G1AMS.ASEE. Atlanta Section Prop Info: W LHughes, Oklahoma Slate Jniv Stillwater.Oklahoma 74074

APRIL 13-15. 1971 Symaosium on Appli-cations of Walsh Functions. Naval Re-search Lab. Washington. DC, G -EMCparticipating, NRL, limy of Maryland.Prop info: H. F Harrnuth. Dept of EE.Univ of Maryland, College Park, Md.20742

APRIL 13-16 1971 International Magne-tics Conference, Den... Hilton Hotel.Denver. Colorado, GMAG Prog info:Geoffrey Bate. IBM Corp Boulder. Colo-rado 80302

APRIL 19.20 1971 Power ConditioningSpecialists Conference, Jet PropulsionLab Pasadena, Calif G-AES Prop Info(IEEE 345 East 47th SPret New York,N Y 10017

APRIL 19-21 1971 AIAA/ASME 12thStructures. Structural Dynamics, andMaterials Conference, Anaheim. CalifProp info: AIAA, 1290 of the Amer-icas. New York. N Y 10011

APRIL 19-21, 1971 Off -Shore TechnologyConference, Astrohall, Houston. Tenon,TAR Oceanography Coordinating Com-mittee et al Prop info: H S Field. Geo-physical Res Corp . 136 Mohawk Blvd.,Tulsa. Oklahoma 74106

APRIL 19-22. 1971 Israel ConvMion ofElectrical 8 Electronics Engineers, Tel -Aviv Fair Grounds & She,lon Hotel, Tel -Aviv. Israel, IEEE Israe Section et al.Prog Into: IEEE, 345 East 47th Street.New York, N Y 10017

APRIL 2021. 1971 Electric ProcessHeating in Industry Technical Confer-ence, Pfister Hotel. Mae: ukee. Wiscon-sin. G-IGA, Milwaukee Section Prog info:Fred Pyecrolt, Phila Elm Co . 211 SBroad St.. Phila Penna 19105

APRIL 21.23 1971 AAS'AIAA VariableGeometry of Expandable Structures Con-ference. Anaheim, Cold Prog Info: AIAA1290 Ave of the Americas, New York,N Y 10019

APRIL 24-29. 1971 73rd Annual Meeting8. Exposition, Conrad Hilton Hotel. Ch..cago. III Prog info: The American Cera-mic Society. Inc . 4055 North High SI .

Columbus, Ohio 43214

APRIL 26-28. 1971 Region III TechnicalConvention, Univ of Virg nia, Charlotts-vide Virginia. Region III Prog info: EW Hutton. General Elf, Co WaYnedDor° Va 22980

APRIL 26-28 1971 AIM 6th Thermo -physics Conference, Ti.: ahoma. TennProp info: AIAA, 1290 Ave of the Ameri-cas. New York. N Y 10019

APRIL 26-28 1971 Conf, on the Manage-ment of Transmission P. Dietribution %e-lem.. London England. IEE. IEEE UKRISection Prop. info: ICE. Savoy Place.London. W C 2 England

APRIL 26-29 1971 /ISMS AIAA Habit.-bility in Spec. Stations Meeting, Hous-ton Texas Prog Info: AIAA. 1290 Ave ofthe Americas. New York. N.Y 10019

APRIL 28.30. 1971 Southwestern IEEEConference 8 Exhibition, Rice Hotel, Al-bert Thomas Cony Ctr. Houston, Texas.SWIEEECO. Houston Section Prop Into:D R Williams. Dept of EE. Univ. of Hous-ton. Houston. Texas 77004

MAY 3-6, 1971 Ind. 0 Comm, Power Sys,IS Elec. Space Healing 8 Air ConditioningJt. Technical Conference, Detroit HiltonHotel Detroit, Michigan. G-IGA, S. E

Prop info: 7 L Schaller, Allen-BradleyCo 1491 N Harding St. Indianapolis,Indiana 46207,

MAY 4.5. 1971: Appliance Technical Con-ference. Sheraton Chicago Hotel. Chi-cago. Illinois. G-IGA. Chicago SectionProp info: Vic Petchul, Dana Chase PubInc. York St at Park Ave.. Elmhurst, Ill60126.

MAY 10.12. 1971. Electronic ComponentsConference, StaVer Hilton Hotel, Wash-ington, D C GPMP. EIA Prop info: E

Moss. Mallory Capacitor Co 3029 F

Washington St, Indianapolis. Ind 46206

MAY 10.12. 1971 AIAA Joint StraNigicMissile Sciences Meeting (Classified Se-cret). U S Naval Academy. Annapolis.Maryland Prop info: General Chairman,Dr. Richard Harlunian, Aerospace Corp.,1111 Mill Street, San Bernardino, Calif.92408

MAY 12-14 1971 Electron. Ion, andLaser Beam Technology Conf., Univ ofColorado. Boulder. Colorado. G -ED, AVSet al Prop info: IEEE. 345 East 47thStreet. New York, N Y 10017

MAY 17-19. 1971. Aerospace ElectronicsConference, Sheraton Dayton Hotel, Day-ton, Ohio. G-AES. Dayton Section. Propinfo: IEEE Dayton Office. 124 E Monu-ment Ave., Dayton, Ohio 45402 ,

MAY 25.27 1971 AIAA 1st Annual UrbanTechnology Meeting and Technical Dieplay: "Cities -1976", New York Coliseum.New York. N Y Prog Info: Dr HerbertFox. Chairman. New York Section AIAA,Chairman. Dept of Ad oiMech Technol-ogy. New York Institute of Technology.Old Westbury. N.V.

JUNE 2-4. 1971: Conference onEngineering 8 Applications, WashingtonHilton Hotel. Washington, DC., IEEEQuantum Elec. Council, OSA. Prog Info:D E Caddes, Sylvania Elec. Sys., Elec-tro-Optics Organ . Mountain View. Calif94040

JUNE 7-8. 1971' Chicago Spring Conf. onB roadcast 8 TV Receivers, Marriott MotorHotel. Chicago. Illinois, G-BTR, ChicagoSection Prog into: Donald Ruby, ZenithRadio Corp 6001 W Dickens Ave. Chi-cago. III 60639

JUNE 7-8 1971' Symposium on Applies -none of Ferro -electric*, IBM Res. CtrYorktown Hips N Y 8 Holiday Inn, WhitePlains, N Y GSU Prop Info: L E Cross.Penn State Univ, State College, Penna16802.

JUNE 8-10. 1971 Conference on Aero-space Antennas, London. England. IEE.IERE. IEEE UKRI Section Prop info: IEE.2 Savoy Place. London W C 2 England.

JUNE 14-18. 1971 AIAA 7th PropulsionJoint Specialisl Conference, Sall LakeCity, Utah Prop Info: AIAA 1290 Ave ofthe Americas, New York, N.Y.10019

JUNE 21.23. 1971 AIAA 4th Fluid andPlasma Dynamics Conference. CabanaHyatt House. Palo Alto. Calif Prog info:Arnold Goldburg. Head. Flight Scienceslaboratories. P 0 Box 3981. Seattle.Washington 98124

JULY 5-8 1971 0th International ShockTube Symposium, London. England ProgInfo: AIAA. 1290 Ave of the Americas.New York, N Y 10019

Call for Educational ExhibitsAUG 25.27 1971 1971 IEEE Interna-tional Geoscience Electronics Sym-posium. Washington. D C GeoscienceElectronics Group of the IEEE Deadlineinfo: Individuals and companies areinvited to submit a comprehensive de

scription of exhibits demonstrating Geo-science Electronics Hardware no laterthan 1 April 1971 Any supporting infor-mation, such as illustrations. can be sub-mitted with the description to aid thecommittee in mak ng their selecton toMr Charles F Getman, Exhibits Chair-man. 1971 IEEE International GeoscienceElectronics Symposium. U S NavalOceanographic Office. Engineering Serv-ices Division, Washington. D.C. 20390

91

Engineering L. News and Highlights

S. H. Watson retires

Samuel H. Watson, Manager of CorporateStandardizing for the past 26 years and anRCA employee for 48 years, has recentlyretired. Mr. Watson began his engineeringcareer with the General Electric Com-pany, Schenectady, New York, as a grad-uate of the G. E. Engineering School. In1929, he transferred to RCA in Camden,and engaged in product design and fieldengineering on automotive and aircraftreceivers. During the war years he servedas a mechanical project engineer on mili-tary communications equipment, includ-ing altimeters and radar. He wasappointed Manager of the CorporateStandardizing function in 1944. He cur-rently represents RCA on the CompanyMember Council of the American Na-tional Standards Institute (ANSI). He

was a member of the Council Administra-tive Committee from 1947 to 1948, andagain from 1950 to 1953. He was chair-man of the Council in 1949 and again in1942.

He is a Senior Member of the IEEE anda charter member and Fellow of theStandards Engineers Society.

In November 1960, Mr. Watson waschosen "Personality of the Month" bythe staff of the Magazine ol Standards,published by ANSI. He was awarded theANSI Standards Medal in December1962. This is an annual award given to anindividual who has served the voluntarystandards movement through leadershipin the actual development of standards.Mr. Watson was the U.S. represen-tative to the ISO TC/10 Committee onDrawings at the meeting held in Geneva,Switzerland. in December 1962; chairmanof the U. S. delegation to the meetingheld in Moscow. USSR, June 1967. InOctober 1967, he was appointed chair-man of the Electronic Industries Associa-tion (EIA) Engineering Policy Council,the management and policy body of EIAEngineering Department. Mr. Watson iscurrently a member of the followingmetric advisory committees: the Amer-ican National Standards Institute MetricAdvisory Committee; the National MetricAdvisory Panel of the Dept. of Defense;the EIA Metric Study Panel.

Recently, Mr. Watson received the LeoB. Moore Award of the Standards Engi-neering Society (see p. 94). He has alsocontributed the "Editorial Input" for thisissue (p.2).

RCA Alascom applies for authority to establish communications satellite stationRCA Alaska Communications Inc.. todayfiled a request with the Federal Communi-cations Commission for authority to es-tablish and operate a ground station thatwould make Alaska the first state to uti-lize satellites for intrastate communica-tions. Howard R. Hawkins, President ofRCA Alascom, said the satellite earth sta-tion would be located at Lena Point,Alaska, near Juneau. He indicated thatestimated cost of the facility would be$1.5 million and that the station wouldprovide additional circuits for telephoneservice, two-way television transmissionand expanded voice/record services. Thestation would also make possible the firstlive television between the Juneau/Sitkaarea and other parts of Alaska and thesouth 48 states.RCA Alascom was granted authority bythe Alaska Public Utilities Commission onAugust 31, 1970, to acquire the AlaskaCommunication System and furnish longlines telecommunication services forAlaska by any available method or tech-nology. [See the paper by John D. Sellers,

Chief Engineer, RCA Alascom, in thisissue-p. 48] That authorization includedpermission to provide intrastate servicevia satellite. Therefore, only FCC ap-proval is required for RCA Alascom toestablish the earth station.Equipped with a 32 -foot antenna, theLena Point station would be connected tothe Juneau telephone toll center by anexisting microwave route which has apresent capacity of 300 voice circuits.This link is being upgraded and expandedby RCA Alascom to provide two-way tele-vision transmission capability. Also con-necting at Lena Point would be an exist-ing microwave system to Hoonah and anew microwave system to Angoon andSitka, each with a capacity of 600 voicecircuits and two-way television transmis-sion capability.

The earth station is designed to supple-ment the backbone network between themajor urban centers in Alaska. It alsowould provide additional direct paths tothe south 48 states and alternate routing

Engelbrecht named Director. Solid StateTechnology Center

Rudolf S. Logelbrecht, formerly head ofthe Electroacoustics Department at BellLaboratories, Holmdel, N. J., has accepteda position with RCA Corporation as Op-erations Director, Solid State TechnologyCenter.

Recently established at Somerville, N. J.,the technology center serves RCA's diver-sified needs for solid state componentsand integrated circuits. It conducts jointdevelopment programs with the com-pany's equipment and apparatus divisions,particularly in the information and com-munications fields, and forward -lookingprograms for the various product areasin the Solid State Division. In his newcapacity. Mr. Engelbrecht will report to

illiam C. Iliitinger, Vice President andGeneral Manager of the Solid State Di-vision.

During his 17 years with Bell Labs, Mr.Engelbrecht was responsible for a varietyof exploratory solid state developmentprograms involving high -frequency, high-speed devices and circuits. In this field.he has published numerous papers andbeen granted over 15 U. S. and foreignpatents. A Fellow of the IEEE, Mr. Engel-brecht is chairman of the ProfessionalGroup on Electron Devices and pastchairman of the International Solid StateCircuits Conference.

with terrestrial facilities. The Lena Pointstation would operate with the stations atTalkeetna. Alaska and lamesburg, Cali-fornia or Brewster Flat, Wash. and withother Alaska stations as they are installed.The RCA Alascom application to the FCCcalls for the Lena Point earth station tooperate with the Intelsat IV communica-tions satellite, pending establishment ofa domestic satellite system. Station designwould also permit operation with IntelsatIII or other alternative satellite systems.

92

New graduate degree program for RCA engineers

Dr. lames Hillier, Executive Vice Presi-dent, Research and Engineering, DavidSarnoff Research Center, Princeton, N. J.,has announced the implementation of anew graduate education program to en-able RCA engineers to obtain an accred-ited Master of Science Degree in ElectricalEngineering at any RCA location on acompletely flexible schedule. Formal aca-demic recognition of the program hasbeen granted by virtue of an agreementrecently concluded between RCA and theFlorida Institute of Technology at Mel-bourne, Florida.

The program combines the resources ofRCA's Continuing Engineering Education(CEE) video tape instructional systemwith the Off -Campus Residence Programof Florida Institute of Technology. Be-cause of the recognized high quality ofthe CEE instructional system, the RCAcourses are offered interchangeably withthe established on -campus courses whichconstitute the regular Florida Institute ofTechnology graduate program. This is thefirst complete Master's Degree Programoffered anywhere utilizing the video tapemedium.

In announcing the new program to hisengineering colleagues, Dr. Hillier said,"I know you share with me the feelingof rising pressure to 'stay with it' tech-nically as we move into this new decade.With the doubling of knowledge everyfew years (some say as few as five), andthe staggering rate at which new tech-nology is applied, our products becomerapidly more complex, and our competi-tion more sophisticated. The need for anengineer to maintain his technical andprofessional competence in the seventiesis more pressing than ever before.

"You, as a professional man, have ofcourse the ultimate responsibility for yourown self-improvement. However, RCAas a company has long recognized theimportance to its competitive productbusinesses of keeping its engineering tal-ent current to high standards. Such pro-grams as the David Sarnoff Fellowships,in -plant after hours programs, the TuitionLoan and Refund plan, and the recentContinuing Engineering Education (CEE)program have all played an important rolein helping our engineers improve theireffectiveness. But the enrollment has been

small by comparison with what I con-sider satisfactory."

Dr. Hillier then urged RCA engineers toconsider carefully how the MSEE maybenefit them in their professional careers.

The new program, in brief, operates asfollows: a residence period, consisting oftwo days of intensive review and exam-ination during the summer months foreach three -credit course, is required byFlorida Institute of Technology. For the1970-71 year. the review and examinationcenter will be located at the TradewindsResidence Hall, located at Melbourne,Florida.

Tuition charges, payable by the studentat the time of the residence period, arereimbursable through the Company Tui-tion Loan and Refund Policy. Textbooks,study guides, and video tapes are fur-nished by Corporate Engineering Services,Camden, N. J.

The MSEE program was offered begin-ning in November of 1970. Additional in-formation may be obtained from Dr. J. M.Biedenbach, Building 2-8, Camden, NewJersey.

Three RCA men admitted to N.J. Bar

Peter Abruzzese, Siegmar Silber, and Ray-mond Smiley-all Members of the PatentDepartment-recently passed the NewJersey Bar Examination and were swornin to practice before the New Jersey Su-preme Court and the U.S. District Courtfor the District of New Jersey. In addi-tion, Mr. Silber was admitted to the courtof Customs and Patent Appeals in Wash-ington, D.C., and was also appointed tothe N.J. State Bar Committee for Conser-vation and Ecology.

Mr. Abruzzese acquired the degree ofJuris Doctor from Seton Hall Law Schoolin June of 1970. He received the BSEEfrom Newark College of Engineering in1964 and did graduate work at RutgersUniversity. He joined RCA as a Memberof the Patent Staff in June, 1969.

Mr. Silber is a 1970 graduate of FordhamUniversity's School of Law. Prior to at-tending Law School, he attended Massa-chusetts Institute of Technology, receivedthe BA from Columbia University, andthe MA from Yeshiva University's Grad-uate School of Humanities. He joinedRCA as a Member of the Patent Staff inSeptember of 1970.

Mr. Smiley received the Juris Doctor de-gree from Temple Law School in 1969.He is also a member of the D.C. Bar andregistered to practice before the U.S. Pat-ent Office. Mr. Smiley received the BSEEfrom Case Institute of Technology in 1969,and the MBA in Industrial Managementfrom the Wharton School, University ofPennsylvania, in 1965. He joined RCA asa member of the Patent Staff in January1969.

Additionally, Joel Spivak, also a member

of the Patent Department, was admittedto the court of Customs and Patent Ap-peals in Washington, D.C.

RCA solid-state wideband amplifiersmove into TWT marketAs a result of research and developmentwork at RCA Laboratories in Princeton.a new product line of solid-state trans-ferred electron amplifiers (TEA'S) arebeing offered to military, industrial andcommercial markets. The new microwavedevices will be aimed at specific marketsnow using traveling -wave tubes. Othermarket opportunities such as communi-cation, airborne phased -array radar andelectronic countermeasures systems willresult due to their small size and low volt-age requirements (below 20 volts).

While solid-state transferred -electron os-cillators (Ito's) have been replacingklystron-type tubes in many microwavesystems, solid-state amplifiers did not fol-low until recently because of inherentlimitations in frequency, saturated poweroutput, linearity, bandwidth and dynamicrange. These limitations have beenovercome.

Continuous -wave linear amplifiers areavailable in C-, X-, and Ku -band frequen-cies (i.e. 4-18 GHz) with instantaneousbandwidths of 4 GHz or more.The new devices make use of the nega-tive -resistance characteristic of transferredelectron devices to obtain stable broad-band amplification. Normally, these de-vices are operated at two to three timesthe threshold voltage. Measurements ofnegative resistance from 6 to 12.4 GHzfor a single device have been recordedand the actual upper limit is unknown.

The individual amplifier devices are fabri-cated from N -type epitaxial sandwichstructures that are grown by a vapor -hydride transport process. The thicknessof the N -layer is chosen so that the transit -time frequency lies within the amplifierpass band. At X -band frequencies (i.e.,8 to 12.4 GHz) a layer thickness near 10microns is used with super -critical doping.

An outstanding advantage that TEA'Soffer over conventional TWT'S is systemsimplicity by virtue of the fact that thesedevices will operate from simple DCpower supplies of 20 volts or less. TEA'Salso lend themselves to direct integrationinto total systems. One of the most inter-esting features of this amplifier is theprojection that has been made on instan-taneous bandwidth. Calculations haveindicated the potential of achieving multi -octave instantaneous bandwidths with asingle amplifier.

These amplifiers have a number of proper-ties that make them particularly suited forsolid-state replacement of traveling -wavetubes in many systems. First, they arestable and truly linear. A noise figure ofapproximately 15 dB in X-, C-, and Ku -hand and a dynamic range of over 70 dBfor near octave bandwidths have beenmeasured. The third order intermodula-tion distorion has been measured andfound to be comparable to TWT'S.

RCA interest in the new amplifier aroseover a year ago when two scientists-Barry S. Perlman and Dr. Thomas Walsh-were doing research on transferred -electron (or Gunn) oscillators at theMicrowave Applied Research Laboratoryin Princeton, N.J. under the guidance ofDr. Fred Sterzer, Laboratory Director.

93

Awards

Communications Systems Division

Bernard M. 1 rachtcnberg of GovernmentCommunications Systems received an in-dividual Technical Excellence Award forthe contributions to the Lunar Communi-cations Relay Program.

Astro-Electronics Division

Eleven engineers of the Astro-ElectronicsDivision received NASA awards for"tech-nical contributions reported to NASA ...determined to have significant value inthe conduct of aeronautical and space ac-tivities." The engineers are: A. S. Chcrdak,J. S. Douglas, E. A. Goldberg, R. C.Greene, T. I. Furia, C. A. Berard, W. T.Farrell, C. R. Peek, W. T. Bisignani, W. B.Garner, and A. P. Crossley.

Al Aronson of the Electro-Mechanical andPower activity received the EngineeringExcellence for October, 1970, for his workon Infrared Sensors.

Martin Hecht of the Communications andData Processing activity received the En-gineering Excellence Award for Novem-ber, 1970, for his work in frequencycompensation in A/D converters.

Government Engineering

K. R. Keller of Defense Mictoelectronicsin Somerville received a NASA Awardfor publication of a NASA TechnicalBrief on "Reducing Contact Resistance atSemiconductor to Metal or Aluminum toMetal Interfaces."

Joseph Tripoli receives Barenkopf Award

Joseph S. Tripoli, a member of the Engi-neering Products group of Patent Opera-tions, Princeton, N.J., has received theBarenkopf Award from Temple Univer-sity School of Law. The Barenkopf Awardis given annually to the senior student inthe Evening Division with the highestscholastic rank and includes a full tuitionscholarship for the senior year.

Mr. Tripoli has been attending TempleLaw School since 1967. He joined theRCA Missile & Surface Radar Divisionin Moorestown as an engineer in 1965,following his graduation from the CityCollege of New York. In 1969 he trans-ferred to Patent Operations at the DSRC.

Watson receives Leo. B. Moore Award

S. H. Watson, Manager, Corporate Stan-dardizing, Corporate Engineering Ser-vices, was presented with the Leo. B.Moore Award of the Standards EngineersSociety. The award, consisting of a goldmedal and citation, is made annually"for highest achievement, extraordinarycontribution, and distinguished service inthe field of standardization and its pro-fessional advancement through originalresearch and writing, creative applicationand development, or professional andpublic service."

Applied Optics features RCA

The October 1970 issue of Applied Op-tics, published by The Optical Society ofAmerica, contains 18 papers and an intro-duction dealing with optics research anddevelopment at RCA. Guest -edited byI. P. Wittke of RCA Laboratories, the 188pages represent current optics workthroughout RCA.

RCA Review, December 1970Chemical Vapor Phase Deposition of

Electronic Materials

Foreword

L. R. Weisberg and G. W. Cullen

Semiconductors

Low -Temperature Vapor Growth of Homoepi-taxial Silicon D Richman,

Y. S. Chiang, and P. H. Robinson

Heteroepitaxial Growth of Germanium andSilicon on Insulating SubstratesD. J. Dumin, P. H. Robinson, G. W. Cullen,

and G. E. GottliebVapor -Phase Growth of Several III -V Com-pound Semiconductors J J Tietlen,

R. E. Enstrom, and D. Richman

The Preparation of Ternary and QuaternaryCompounds by Vapor Phase Growth

B. J. Curtis, F. P. Emmenegger,and R. Nitsche

Vapor Growth of (II -VI) -(111-V) Quaternary Al-loys and Their Properties W. M. Yim,

J. P. Dismukes, and H. Kressel

Vapor Deposition of Semiconducting Mononi-trides of Scandium, Yttrium, and the RareEarth Elements J P. Dismukes,

W. M. Yim, J. J. Tietjen,and R. E. Novak

Vapor Phase Growth of Magnetic Semicon-ducting Spinets H L. Pinch

and L. Ekstrom

Superconductors

Compounds and Alloys for SuperconductingApplications R E. Enstrom,

J. J. Hanak, and G. W. Cullen

Insulators

Deposition and Properties of Silicon Dioxideand Silicate Films Prepared by Low -Tempera-ture Oxidation of Hydrides W. Kern

and A. W. Fisher

Vapor Deposition of Characterization of MetalOxide Thin Films for Electronic Applications

C. C. Wang, K. H. Zaininger,and M. T. Duffy

Preparation, Properties, and Applications ofChemically Vapor Deposited Silicon NitrideFilms M T. Duffy and W. KernDeposition of Aluminum Oxide Films from Or-gano-Aluminum Vapor Compounds

M. T. Duffy and W. Kern

Interface Properties of Chemically Vapor De-posited Silica Films on Gallium Arsenide

W. Kern and J. P. White

The RCA Review is published quarterly. Copiesare available in all RCA libraries. Subscriptionrates are as follows (rates are discounted 20%for RCA employees):

DOMESTIC FOREIGN1 -year $4.00 $4.402 -year 7.00 7.803 -year 9.00 10.20

Staff announcementsMissile and Surface Radar Division

k. l'iro, Division Vice Presidentand General Manager has announced theorganization of Missile and Surface RadarDivision as follows:Charles C. Botkin, Manager, Cobra MistProgram; George J, Branin, Manager,Product Assurance; Dudley M. Cottler,Chief Engineer, Engineering Department;Ronald V. Donato, Plant Manager,Moorestown Plant; James J. Dougherty,Manager, Materials; Wesley R. Frysztacki,Manager, Strategic Systems Department;Richard J. Hall, Manager, MicrocircuitDepartment; George J. Honeyford, Mana-ger, Moorestown Personnel; Sidney G.Miller, Manager, Ballistic Missile DefenseProgram; Edward W. Petrillo, Manager,Operations Control; Joseph M. Seligman,Manager, Range and Tactical Systems De-partment; Howard G. Stewart, DivisionVice President, Marketing; and Joseph C.Volpe, Manager, MFAR Program.

Aerospace Systems Division

John R. McAllister, Division Vice Presi-dent and General Manager has appointedWilliam H. Price, II, Manager, TacticalSystems Marketing.

Astro-Electronics Division

C. S. Constantino, Division Vice Presi-dent and General Manager has appointedLeo Weinreb, Manager, Color CameraProject.

Consumer Electronics

Barton Ixretizer, Executive Vice Presidenthas appointed W. Thomas Collins, Mana-ger, Consumer Affairs, Consumer Elec-tronics.

Electronic Components

Joseph T. Cimorelli, Division Vice Presi-dent and General Manager, has appointedMatthew M. Bell, Manager, EquipmentDesign and Development, Receiving TubeDivision.

Government and Commercial Systems

Andrew F. Inglis, Division Vice Presidentand General Manager has appointedAdron M. Miller, Manager, Administra-tive Services, and Vroman W. Riley,Manager, Cable Systems, CommunicationsSystems Division.

RCA Service Company

Joseph F. Murray, Division Vice Presi-dent, Government Services, has appointedWilliam F. Given, Division Vice Presi-dent, Field Projects.

Operations Staff

Richard W. Sonnenfeldt, Staff Vice Presi-dent, Special Projects has appointedFrederick 0. Ziegler Director, StateLiaison.

94

CSD Announces New Organization

All technical product line planning, de-sign and development operations of theRCA Computer Systems Division werecombined, effective Oct. 30, 1970, into asingle Systems Development organization,reporting to L. E. Donegam, Jr., DivisionVice President and General Manager. Thenew organization (see organization chart)brings together Engineering, SystemsProgramming, and Product Planning, rea-ligned in logical systems, hardware prod-ucts, and software product groups-eachoperating under entrepreneurial manage-ment.

In addition to Systems Managers andProduct Managers, the new organizationalso includes several supporting groups.Each Systems and Product Manager headsa profit center and is responsible for de-veloping the part of the product line as-signed to him and for assuring that itproduces planned revenue, profit, andshare of market.

Division Vice Presidentand

General ManagerL E Donegan, Jr

SystemsArchitecture

ManagerErnest J. Dieterich

SmallSys ems

(Acting Manager)Harold N. Morris

MediumSys ems

(Acting Manager)Harold N. Monis

LargeSys emsManager

Harold H. Rumph

LIndustrySys emsManager

Sys emsProgramming

Div. Vice PresidentFrancis A. Rowe Arthur W. Carroll

MarlboroProduct Laboratory

Manager

Palm BeachProduct Laboratory

ManagerBrian W. Pollard Harold N. Morris

Organization Chart-Computer Systems Division, Systems Development Organization.

Professional Activities

Missile Test Project

The Instrument Society of America'sCanaveral Section recently received theSociety's KATES award for its 1970 an-nual report. The report was compiled byJames A. Kibling of the Missile TestProject.

J. W. Van Cleve, Manager, RCA Mis-sile Test Project Mainland Instrumenta-tion, and K. J. Starzinger, Manager, Op-erations Control, have been elected topositions with the Cape Canaveral Sectionof the American Institute of Aeronauticsand Astronautics. Van Cleve will serve asthe section's Secretary and Starzinger willserve as a Council Member to the Board.

Corporate Engineering Services

Fred Oberlander, Administrator, Corpo-rate Standardizing, recently received aCertificate of Recognition from the U.S.Army Electronics Command and industryco-sponsors, "for his valued services andcontributions as a member of the AnnualWire and Cable Symposium Committeefrom January 1969 to December 1970."The citation further stated that "his pro-fessional leadership in the establishmentof the technical program, and whole-hearted participation in the many organi-zational activities, have contributed ma-terially to the sustained success of thisSymposium."

Communication Systems Division

James H. Goodman of Government Com-munications Systems is presently servingas chairman of the Philadelphia chapterof the IEEE group on Reliability. Mr.Goodman was recently notified by theReliability Group's Administrative Com-mittee that his "chapter's activities during1969-70 were considered particularly

meritorious, warranting the special recog-nition accorded by Group ChapterAwards."

Computer Systems Division

Stephen P. Young, Senior Member of theTechnical Staff, Design Automation Sec-tion, Marlboro, Massachusetts, has beenappointed editor of the Computer AidedDesign News section of the IEEE maga-zine, Computer, which is published bi-monthly for the membership of the IEEEComputer Group. This is an associationof IEEE members with professional inter-est in the field of computers. Computerwas formerly published under the title ofComputer Group News.

Industrial Tube Division

Jules M. Forman and A. Month were twoof three panel speakers from industry to

give talks on 11/3/70 at the new WillowStreet Vocational Technical School lo-cated in the southern part of LancasterCounty. Mr. Forman's presentation wason the subject of "Technology" in generaland the electronic technology field in par-ticular. Mr. Month discussed the voca-tional environment and its value for highschool students with special emphasis onthe field of related engineering technology.

J. M. Forman and P. G. Bedrosian, repre-sented the Industrial Tube Division at theJEDEC IT -16 Committee Quarterly Meet-ing. JT-16 is an Electronic Industries As-sociation (EIA) Committee that is re-sponsible for the formulation and moni-toring of Government Standards andSpecifications applicable to all electrontubes under the cognizance of JEDEC.

Clip out and mail to Editor, RCA Engineer, #2-8, Camden

MCEa EngineerHave we your correct address?If not indicate the change below:

Name Code*

Street or Blcg

City and State or Plant

'Please indicate the code letter(s) that appear next to your nameon the envelope.

95

R. M. Cohen named to RCA EngineerAdvisory Board

William C. Hittinger. Division VicePresident and General Manager. SolidState Division. recently appointed RobertM. Cohen a Member of the RCA EngineerEditorial Advisory Board, representingthe Solid State Division. The EditorialAdvisory Board provides counsel andguidance to the editorial staff and assistsin long-range planning of editorial ac-tivities.

Mr. Cohen joined RCA in 1940 at theElectron Tube Division plant in Har-rison, N. J. He was engaged in variousdesign and development positions in re-ceiving tube engineering and was ap-pointed Engineering Leader. New ProductDevelopment, in 1950. In 1953 he becameManager. Semiconductor ApplicationsEngineering Laboratory, in the Harrisonplant. He moved to the newly establishedSomerville facility in 1955 as Manager,Entertainment Product Development, andin 1961 was named Manager, Engineering,for the Commercial Semiconductor Op-erations Department. In 1967 he becameManager, Quality and Reliability Assur-ance, for the Solid State Division. Mr.Cohen received the BSEE from the New-ark College of Engineering. He is a Fellowof the IEEE, has published numeroustechnical papers and is the holder of eightU. S. patents. He is a member of JEDECCouncil of EIA.

Louis Elbert is new Ed Rep for SystemsProgramming

Louis D. Elbert has been appointed Edi-torial Representative for Systems Pro-gramming, Computer Systems Division.In this capacity Mr. Elbert will be respon-sible for planning and processing articlesfor RCA Engineer and for supporting theCorporate -wide technical papers and re-ports program.

Mr. Elbert's career in the computer indus-try has been with software development.Starting in 1955 as a Machine Accountantin the Navy he designed and implementeddata processing systems for personnel,financial, material procurement, and in-ventory control applications. In 1959 withthe Insurance Company of North Americahe supplied technical assistance for cod-ing and design of insurance report pro-grams. In 1960 he collaborated in thedesign and implementation of Univac'sfirst COBOL Compiler. He joined RCAin 1961 with RCA Advanced Program-ming in Pennsauken, New jersey, assignedto software compiler and assembler de-sign. He moved to Palm Beach in 1963 asLeader design and implementation of soft-ware for RCA 2201, returning to CherryHill in 1964 to become Leader ServiceRoutines and Assembly Systems. In 1965he became Manager of Utility Systemsand later Manager Conversion and UtilitySystems. In 1969 he moved to a positionas Staff Planner for conversion and data

Clip out and mail to Editor. RCA Trend, Bldg 2-8, Camden. N.J.

TrendAre you receiving TREND?If not, supply the following information:

Name Code'

Immediate Supervisor

Division

Plant Location

*Please indicate the code letters that appear next to your name onthe RCA Engineer envelope.

base systems in Communications and Con-version Systems. In 1970 he was ManagerSystems Programming Standards until hisrecent promotion to Staff Systems Pro-gramming, Computer Systems Division inCinnaminson, New Jersey. Prior to enter-ing the computer industry, he spent sevenyears as a seminarian in the Society ofPriests of the Sacred Heart. He is activein the Association of Computer Ma-chinery, having served as Newsletter Edi-tor. He is currently coordinator of SpecialInterest Groups for Delaware ValleyChapter ACM.

Bruce Shore receives Author Award

At its Eleventh Annual Authors -TeachersLuncheon, the New Jersey Association ofTeachers of English conferred its AuthorAward on Bruce H. Shore of RCA Corpo-rate Public Affairs for his book, The NewElectronics. The book, which provides aninformative overview of solid state elec-tronics, was described in some detail inthe RCA Engineer. Vol. 16, No. 2 (Aug/Sep. 1970).

ALERT/71 to replace ALERT

ALERT, the RCA computer -based systemfor automatically notifying engineers andscientists of technical information sourcespertinent to their current work, has beenoperational for over a year. Based on thisoperating experience, a new and improvedcurrent awareness service-ALERT/71-has been developed.

Some key features of ALERT/71 are:-More extensive and pertinent data base

against which profiles can be matched.

-Full abstracts of items matching aninterest profile will be available asoutput in most cases; users can obtaintheir ALERT/71 notices in more thanone format.

-Author's affiliations, organizationssponsoring the work, translation statusfor foreign materials, and other identify-ing information will be more completeon ALERT/7I notices.

-Data bases for ALERT/71 are morethoroughly indexed for searching; morerelevant material will be identified bythe computer profile -matching process.

-More options will be available to theALERT/71 user as to what basic classesof information are to be searched fora given profile, thus reducing non -relevant output.

Information on the new system is beingdistributed to present ALERT users, RCAlibraries and engineering and researchgroups during January and February. Formore information, contact Technical In-formation Systems, Corporate EngineeringServices, Bldg. 2-8-1, Camden, N. J., PC -3119.

96

Government and Commercial SystemsAerospace Systems Division

Electromagnetic andAviation Sys*.eris DivisionAstro-Electronics Division

Missile & Surface Radar DivisiorGoverrment Engineering

Government Plans andSystems Developmen-.

Communications Systems DivisiorComm ?rcia Systems

Industrial and Automaticn Systems

Government Commun ca'iors System;

ludorrnation SystemsComputer Systems Division

Magnetic Products DivisionMemory Products Division

Graphic Systems Divisioi

Research and EngineeringLaboratories

Electronic ComponentsRece ving Tube Division

Television Picture Tube Division

Industrial Tube Division

Technical ProgramsSolid State Division

Consumer Electronbs Divisior

ServicesRCA Service Company

RCA Global Ccmmunications, Inc.National Brzadcasting Company, Inc.

RCA RecordsRCA International Divisior

RCA Lid.Patents and Licensing

Editorial RepresentativesThe Editorial Representative in your group is the one you should contact in scheduliigtechnical papers and announcements of your professional activities.

Engineering, Burlington, Mass.

Engineering, Van Nuys, Calif.Engineering, West Los Angeles, Calif.

Engineering, Princeton, N.J.Advanced Development and Research, Princeton, N.J.

Engineering, Moorestown, N.J.

Advanced Technology Laboratories, Camden, N.J.Defense Microelectronics, Somerville. N.J.

Aavanced Technology Laboratories, Camden, N.J.Central Engineering, Camden, N.J.

Engineering Information and Communications, Camden, N.J.

Chairman. Editorial Board, Camden, N.J.Mobile Communications Engineering, Meadow Lands, Pa.Professional Electronic Systems, Burbank. Calif.Studio, Recording, & Scienlic Equip. Engineering, Camden, N.J.

Broadcast Transmitter & Antenna Eng., Gibbsboro, N.J.

Engineering, Plymouth, Mich.

Engineering, Camden, N.J.

Palm Beach Product Laboratory, Palm Beach Gardens, Fla.Marlboro Product Laboratory, Marlboro, Mass.

Instructional Systems Engineering. Palo Alto, Cal.Service Dept., Cherry Hill, N.J.

Systems Programming, Riverton, N.J.

Development, Indianapolis, Ind.

Engineering, Needham, Mass.

Engineering, Dayton, N.J.

Research, Princeton, N.J.

Chairman, Editorial Board, Harrison. N.J.

Receiving Tube Operations. Woodbridge, N.J.Receiving Tube Operations. Cincinnati, Ohio

Television Picture Tube Operations Marion, Ind.Television Picture Tube Operations, Lancaster, Pa.

Industrial Tube Operations, Lancaster, Pa.Microwave Tube Operations, Harrison, N.J.

Engineering, Harrison, N.J.

Solid State Power Device Engrg.. Somerville N.J.Semiconductor and Convesion Tube Operations, Mountaintop, PaSemiconductor Operations. Findlay, OhioSolid State Signal Device Engrg., Somerville, N.J.

Chairman, Editorial Board, Indianapolis, Ind.Engineering, Indianapolis, Inc.

Radio Engineering, Indianapolis. Ind.Advanced Development, Indianapolis, Ind.

Black and White TV Engineering, Indianapolis, Ind.Ceramic Circuits Engineering. Rockville, Ind.

Color TV Engineering, Indianapolis. Ind.

Consumer Products Service Dept., Chery Hill, N.J.Consumer Products Administration, Cherry Hill, N.J.

Tech. Products, Adm. & Tech. Support, Cherry Hill, N.J.Missile Test Project, Cape Kennedy, Fla.

RCA Global Communications, Inc.. New York, N.Y.

Staff Eng., New York, N.Y.Record Eng., Indianapolis, Ind.

New York, N.Y.

Research & Eng., Montreal, Canada

Staff Services, Princeton, N.J.

Technical Publication Administrators listed above areresponsible for review and approval ofpapers anc presentations.

MEM EngineerA TECHNICAL JOURNAL PUBLISHED BY CORPORATE ENGINEERING SERVICES"BY AND FOR THE RCA ENGINEER"

FORM NO. RE -16-4 PRINTED IN USA